Back cover. Mitsubishi Electric MDS-C1 Series

MELDAS is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.

Other company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Introduction

Thank you for selecting the Mitsubishi numerical control unit.

This instruction manual describes the handling and caution points for using this AC servo/spindle.

Incorrect handling may lead to unforeseen accidents, so always read this instruction manual thoroughly to ensure correct usage.

Make sure that this instruction manual is delivered to the end user.

Always store this manual in a safe place.

All specifications for the MDS-C1 Series are described in this manual. However, each

CNC may not be provided with all specifications, so refer to the specifications for the

CNC on hand before starting use.

Notes on Reading This Manual

(1) Since the description of this specification manual deals with NC in general, for the specifications of individual machine tools, refer to the manuals issued by the respective machine manufacturers. The "restrictions" and "available functions" described in the manuals issued by the machine manufacturers have precedence to those in this manual.

(2) This manual describes as many special operations as possible, but it should be kept in mind that items not mentioned in this manual cannot be performed.

i

Precautions for safety

Please read this manual and auxiliary documents before starting installation, operation, maintenance or inspection to ensure correct usage. Thoroughly understand the device, safety information and precautions before starting operation.

The safety precautions in this instruction manual are ranked as "WARNING" and "CAUTION".

DANGER

When there is a potential risk of fatal or serious injuries if handling is mistaken.

WARNING

When operator could be fatally or seriously injured if handling is mistaken.

CAUTION

When a dangerous situation may occur if handling is mistaken leading to medium or minor injuries, or physical damage.

Note that some items described as

CAUTION

may lead to major results depending on the situation. In any case, important information that must be observed is described.

The numeric control unit is configured of the control unit, operation board, servo drive unit, spindle drive unit, power supply, servomotor and spindle motor, etc.

In this section "Precautions for safety", the following items are generically called the "motor".

• Servomotor

• Spindle motor

In this section "Precautions for safety", the following items are generically called the "unit".

• Servo drive unit

• Spindle drive unit

• Power supply unit

ii

WARNING

1. Electric shock prevention

Do not open the front cover while the power is ON or during operation. Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.

Do not operate the unit with the front cover removed. The high voltage terminals and charged sections will be exposed, and can cause electric shocks.

Do not remove the front cover even when the power is OFF unless carrying out wiring work or periodic inspections. The inside of the servo drive units is charged, and can cause electric shocks.

Wait at least 15 minutes after turning the power OFF before starting wiring, maintenance or inspections. Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.

Ground the servo drive unit and servomotor with Class C (former class 3) grounding or higher.

Wiring, maintenance and inspection work must be done by a qualified technician.

Wire the servo drive unit and servomotor after installation. Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.

Do not touch the switches with wet hands. Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.

Do not damage, apply forcible stress, place heavy items on the cables or get them caught.

Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.

CAUTION

1. Fire prevention

Install the servo drive units, servomotors and regenerative resistor on noncombustible material. Direct installation on combustible material or near combustible materials could lead to fires.

Shut off the power on the servo drive unit side if the servo drive unit fails. Fires could be caused if a large current continues to flow.

When using a regenerative resistor, provide a sequence that shuts off the power with the regenerative resistor's error signal. The regenerative resistor could abnormally overheat and cause a fire due to a fault in the regenerative transistor, etc.

The battery unit could heat up, ignite or rupture if submerged in water, or if the poles are incorrectly wired.

2. Injury prevention

Do not apply a voltage other than that specified in Instruction Manual on each terminal.

Failure to observe this item could lead to ruptures or damage, etc.

Do not mistake the terminal connections. Failure to observe this item could lead to ruptures or damage, etc.

Do not mistake the polarity ( + , – ). Failure to observe this item could lead to ruptures or damage, etc.

The servo drive unit's fins, regenerative resistor and servomotor, etc., may reach high temperatures while the power is ON, and may remain hot for some time after the power is turned OFF. Touching these parts could result in burns. iii

CAUTION

3. Various precautions

Observe the following precautions. Incorrect handling of the unit could lead to faults, injuries and electric shocks, etc.

(1) Transportation and installation

Correctly transport the product according to its weight.

Use the servomotor's hanging bolts only when transporting the servomotor. Do not transport the servomotor when it is installed on the machine.

Do not stack the products above the tolerable number.

Do not hold the cables, axis or detector when transporting the servomotor.

Do not hold the connected wires or cables when transporting the servo drive units.

Do not hold the front cover when transporting the servo drive units. The unit could drop.

Follow this Instruction Manual and install in a place where the weight can be borne.

Do not get on top of or place heavy objects on the unit.

Always observe the installation directions.

Secure the specified distance between the servo drive unit and control panel's inner wall, and between other devices.

Do not install or run a servo drive unit or servomotor that is damaged or missing parts.

Do not block the intake or exhaust ports of the servomotor provided with a cooling fan.

Do not let foreign objects enter the servo drive units or servomotors. In particular, if conductive objects such as screws or metal chips, etc., or combustible materials such as oil enter, rupture or breakage could occur.

The servo drive units and servomotors are precision devices, so do not drop them or apply strong impacts to them. iv

CAUTION

Store and use the units under the following environment conditions.

Environment

Ambient temperature

Ambient humidity

Storage temperature

Storage humidity

Atmosphere

Conditions

Servo drive unit Servomotor

0°C to +55°C (with no freezing) 0°C to +40°C (with no freezing)

90%RH or less

(with no dew condensation)

80%RH or less

(with no dew condensation)

–15°C to +70°C

90%RH or less (with no dew condensation)

Indoors (where unit is not subject to direct sunlight), with no corrosive gas, combustible gas, oil mist, or dust

Altitude

Vibration 4.9m/s

2

1,000m or less above sea level

(0.5G) or less

Follows each specifications manual

Securely fix the servomotor to the machine. Insufficient fixing could lead to the servomotor slipping off during operation.

Always install the servomotor with reduction gear in the designated direction. Failure to do so could lead to oil leaks.

Structure the rotary sections of the servomotor so that it can never be touched during operation. Install a cover, etc., on the shaft.

When installing a coupling to a servomotor shaft end, do not apply an impact by hammering, etc. The detector could be damaged.

Do not apply a load exceeding the tolerable load onto the servomotor shaft. The shaft could break.

Store the motor in the package box.

When inserting the shaft into the built-in IPM motor, do not heat the rotor higher than

130°C. The magnet could be demagnetized, and the specifications characteristics will not be ensured.

If the unit has been stored for a long time, always check the operation before starting actual operation. Please contact the Service Center or Service Station. v

CAUTION

(2) Wiring

Correctly and securely perform the wiring. Failure to do so could lead to runaway of the servomotor.

Do not install a condensing capacitor, surge absorber or radio noise filter on the output side of the servo drive unit.

Correctly connect the output side (terminals U, V, W). Failure to do so could lead to abnormal operation of the servomotor.

Do not directly connect a commercial power supply to the servomotor. Failure to observe this could result in a fault.

Servodrive unit Servodrive unit

COM

(24VDC)

COM

(24VDC)

When using an inductive load such as a relay, always connect a diode as a noise measure parallel to the load.

Control output signal

RA

Control output signal

RA

When using a capacitance load such as a lamp, always connect a protective resistor as a noise measure serial to the load.

Do not reverse the direction of a diode which connect to a DC relay for the control output signals to suppress a surge. Connecting it backwards could cause the drive unit to malfunction so that signals are not output, and emergency stop and other safety circuits are inoperable.

Do not connect/disconnect the cables connected between the units while the power is ON.

Securely tighten the cable connector fixing screw or fixing mechanism. An insecure fixing could cause the cable to fall off while the power is ON.

When using a shielded cable instructed in the connection manual, always ground the cable with a cable clamp, etc.

Always separate the signals wires from the drive wire and power line.

Use wires and cables that have a wire diameter, heat resistance and flexibility that conforms to the system. vi

CAUTION

(3) Trial operation and adjustment

Check and adjust each program and parameter before starting operation. Failure to do so could lead to unforeseen operation of the machine.

Do not make remarkable adjustments and changes as the operation could become unstable.

(4) Usage methods

Install an external emergency stop circuit so that the operation can be stopped and power shut off immediately.

Turn the power OFF immediately if smoke, abnormal noise or odors are generated from the servo drive unit or servomotor.

Unqualified persons must not disassemble or repair the unit.

Never make modifications.

Reduce magnetic damage by installing a noise filter. The electronic devices used near the servo drive unit could be affected by magnetic noise.

Use the servo drive unit, servomotor and regenerative resistor with the designated combination. Failure to do so could lead to fires or trouble.

The brake (magnetic brake) assembled into the servomotor are for holding, and must not be used for normal braking.

There may be cases when holding is not possible due to the magnetic brake's life or the machine construction (when ball screw and servomotor are coupled via a timing belt, etc.).

Install a stop device to ensure safety on the machine side.

After changing the programs/parameters or after maintenance and inspection, always test the operation before starting actual operation.

Do not enter the movable range of the machine during automatic operation. Never place body parts near or touch the spindle during rotation.

Follow the power supply specification conditions given in the separate specifications manual for the power (input voltage, input frequency, tolerable sudden power failure time, etc.).

Set all bits to "0" if they are indicated as not used or empty in the explanation on the bits.

Do not use the dynamic brakes except during the emergency stop. Continuous use of the dynamic brakes could result in brake damage.

If a breaker is shared by several power supply units, the breaker may not activate when a short-circuit fault occurs in a small capacity unit. This is dangerous, so never share the breakers. vii

CAUTION

(5) Troubleshooting

If a hazardous situation is predicted during power failure or product trouble, use a servomotor with magnetic brakes or install an external brake mechanism.

Use a double circuit configuration

Shut off with the servomotor brake control output.

Shut off with NC brake control PLC output.

that allows the operation circuit for the magnetic brakes to be operated

Servomotor

MBR EMG even by the external emergency stop signal.

Magnetic brake

24VDC

Always turn the input power OFF when an alarm occurs.

Never go near the machine after restoring the power after a power failure, as the machine could start suddenly. (Design the machine so that personal safety can be ensured even if the machine starts suddenly.)

(6) Maintenance, inspection and part replacement

Always carry out maintenance and inspection after backing up the servo drive unit's programs or parameters.

The capacity of the electrolytic capacitor will drop over time. To prevent secondary disasters due to failures, replacing this part every five years when used under a normal environment is recommended. Contact the Service Center or Service Station for replacement.

Do not perform a megger test (insulation resistance measurement) during inspections.

If the battery low warning is issued, save the machining programs, tool data and parameters with an input/output unit, and then replace the battery.

Do not short circuit, charge, overheat, incinerate or disassemble the battery.

(7) Disposal

Dispose of this unit as general industrial waste. Note that MDS Series unit with a heat dissipating fin protruding from the back of the unit contains substitute Freon. Do not dispose of this type of unit as general industrial waste. Always return to the Service Center or Service

Station.

Do not disassemble the servo drive unit or servomotor parts.

Dispose of the battery according to local laws.

(8) General precautions

The drawings given in this Specifications and Maintenance Instruction Manual show the covers and safety partitions, etc., removed to provide a clearer explanation. Always return the covers or partitions to their respective places before starting operation, and always follow the instructions given in this manual. viii

CONTENTS

1. Introduction

1-1 Servo/spindle drive system configuration ......................................................................................... 1-2

1-1-1 System configuration ................................................................................................................. 1-2

1-1-2 Unit outline type ......................................................................................................................... 1-3

1-2 Explanation of type ........................................................................................................................... 1-4

1-2-1 Servomotor type......................................................................................................................... 1-4

1-2-2 Servo drive unit type .................................................................................................................. 1-8

1-2-3 Spindle motor type ................................................................................................................... 1-10

1-2-4 Spindle drive unit type ............................................................................................................. 1-12

1-2-5 Power supply unit type............................................................................................................. 1-13

1-2-6 AC reactor type ........................................................................................................................ 1-14

2. Specifications

2-1 Servomotor ....................................................................................................................................... 2-2

2-1-1 Specifications list ....................................................................................................................... 2-2

2-1-2 Torque characteristics ............................................................................................................... 2-7

2-2 Spindle motor.................................................................................................................................. 2-10

2-2-1 Specifications........................................................................................................................... 2-10

2-2-2 Output characteristics .............................................................................................................. 2-15

2-3 Drive unit......................................................................................................................................... 2-20

2-3-1 Installation environment conditions.......................................................................................... 2-20

2-3-2 Servo drive unit ........................................................................................................................ 2-20

2-3-3 Spindle drive unit ..................................................................................................................... 2-22

2-3-4 Power supply unit..................................................................................................................... 2-22

2-3-5 AC reactor................................................................................................................................ 2-23

2-3-6 D/A output specifications for servo drive unit .......................................................................... 2-24

2-3-7 D/A output specifications for spindle drive unit........................................................................ 2-25

2-3-8 Explanation of each part .......................................................................................................... 2-26

2-4 Restrictions on servo control .......................................................................................................... 2-29

2-4-1 Restrictions of electronic gear setting value ............................................................................ 2-29

2-4-2 Restrictions on absolute position control ................................................................................. 2-31

3. Characteristics

3-1 Servomotor ....................................................................................................................................... 3-2

3-1-1 Environmental conditions........................................................................................................... 3-2

3-1-2 Quakeproof level........................................................................................................................ 3-2

3-1-3 Shaft characteristics................................................................................................................... 3-3

3-1-4 Oil/water standards .................................................................................................................... 3-4

3-1-5 Magnetic brake .......................................................................................................................... 3-5

3-1-6 Dynamic brake characteristics................................................................................................... 3-8

3-2 Spindle motor.................................................................................................................................. 3-10

3-2-1 Environmental conditions......................................................................................................... 3-10

3-2-2 Shaft characteristics................................................................................................................. 3-10

3-3 Drive unit characteristics................................................................................................................. 3-11

3-3-1 Environmental conditions......................................................................................................... 3-11

3-3-2 Heating value ........................................................................................................................... 3-12

3-3-3 Overload protection characteristics ......................................................................................... 3-13

4. Dedicated Options

4-1 Servo options.................................................................................................................................... 4-2

4-1-1 Battery and terminator option (mandatory selection)................................................................. 4-3

4-1-2 Dynamic brake unit (MDS-B-DBU) (mandatory selection for large capacity)............................ 4-8

4-1-3 Ball screw side detector ........................................................................................................... 4-10

4-1-4 Machine side detector.............................................................................................................. 4-11

4-1-5 Detector conversion unit (MDS-B-HR)..................................................................................... 4-13

4-1-6 Signal divider unit (MDS-B-SD) ............................................................................................... 4-15

4-2 Spindle option ................................................................................................................................. 4-17

4-2-1 Magnetic sensor....................................................................................................................... 4-19

4-2-2 Spindle side detector (OSE-1024-3-15-68, OSE-1024-3-15-68-8) ......................................... 4-21

4-2-3 C-axis detector (OSE90K) ....................................................................................................... 4-23

4-2-4 C-axis detector (MBE90K) ....................................................................................................... 4-25

4-2-5 C-axis detector (MHE90K) ....................................................................................................... 4-26

4-2-6 Spindle side PLG (MXE128/180/256/512)............................................................................... 4-27

4-2-7 Detector conversion unit (MDS-B-PJEX)................................................................................. 4-31

4-3 Cables and connectors ................................................................................................................... 4-33

4-3-1 Cable connection diagram ....................................................................................................... 4-33

4-3-2 List of cables and connectors .................................................................................................. 4-34

5. Peripheral Devices

5-1 Selection of wire ............................................................................................................................... 5-2

5-1-1 Example of wires by unit ............................................................................................................ 5-2

5-2 Selection the AC reactor, contactor and no-fuse breaker ................................................................ 5-5

5-2-1 Standard selection ..................................................................................................................... 5-5

5-2-2 Selection when a contactor is shared ........................................................................................ 5-6

5-3 Earth leakage breaker ...................................................................................................................... 5-7

5-4 Branch-circuit protection ................................................................................................................... 5-8

5-4-1 Circuit protector.......................................................................................................................... 5-8

5-4-2 Fuse protection .......................................................................................................................... 5-8

5-5 Noise filter ......................................................................................................................................... 5-9

5-6 Surge absorber ............................................................................................................................... 5-10

5-7 Speedometer and load meter ......................................................................................................... 5-11

5-8 Cable for peripheral control ............................................................................................................ 5-12

5-8-1 Cable for external emergency stop.......................................................................................... 5-12

5-8-2 Cable for servomotor magnetic brake...................................................................................... 5-13

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

Appendix 1-1 Servomotor outline dimension drawings ........................................................................A1-2

Appendix 1-1-1 HC Series.................................................................................................................A1-2

Appendix 1-1-2 HA Series.................................................................................................................A1-8

Appendix 1-2 Outline dimension drawings of spindle motor...............................................................A1-12

Appendix 1-2-1 SJ Series................................................................................................................A1-12

Appendix 1-2-2 SJ-V Series ............................................................................................................A1-15

Appendix 1-2-3 SJ-VS Series .........................................................................................................A1-25

Appendix 1-2-4 SJ-PMF Series (IPM motor)...................................................................................A1-27

Appendix 1-3 Unit outline dimension drawings...................................................................................A1-28

Appendix 1-3-1 Servo/spindle drive unit .........................................................................................A1-28

Appendix 1-3-2 Power supply unit ..................................................................................................A1-37

Appendix 1-3-3 AC rector................................................................................................................A1-41

Appendix 2. Cable and Connector Specifications

Appendix 2-1 Selection of cable ...........................................................................................................A2-2

Appendix 2-1-1 Cable wire and assembly.........................................................................................A2-2

Appendix 2-1-2 Flexible conduits ......................................................................................................A2-4

Appendix 2-2 Cable connection diagram..............................................................................................A2-6

Appendix 2-3 Connector outline dimension drawings ........................................................................A2-12

Appendix 3. Selection

Appendix 3-1 Selecting the servomotor series .....................................................................................A3-2

Appendix 3-1-1 Motor series characteristics .....................................................................................A3-2

Appendix 3-1-2 Servomotor precision...............................................................................................A3-3

Appendix 3-2 Selection of servomotor capacity....................................................................................A3-4

Appendix 3-2-1 Load inertia ratio ......................................................................................................A3-4

Appendix 3-2-2 Short time characteristics ........................................................................................A3-4

Appendix 3-2-3 Continuous characteristics.......................................................................................A3-5

Appendix 3-3 Example of servo selection.............................................................................................A3-7

Appendix 3-3-1 Motor selection calculation ......................................................................................A3-7

Appendix 3-3-2 Servo selection results...........................................................................................A3-10

Appendix 3-3-3 Motor shaft conversion load torque .......................................................................A3-11

Appendix 3-3-4 Expressions for load inertia calculation .................................................................A3-12

Appendix 3-4 Selecting the power supply...........................................................................................A3-13

Appendix 3-4-1 Selecting according to the continuous rated capacity ...........................................A3-13

Appendix 3-4-2 Selection with maximum momentary capacity.......................................................A3-15

Appendix 3-4-3 Selection example .................................................................................................A3-16

Appendix 4. Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications

Appendix 4-1 Explanation of large capacity spindle unit specifications ...............................................A4-2

Appendix 4-1-1 Outline......................................................................................................................A4-2

Appendix 4-1-2 List of units...............................................................................................................A4-2

Appendix 4-1-3 Selection of AC reactor (B-AL), contactor and NFB ................................................A4-2

Appendix 4-1-4 Outline dimension drawings.....................................................................................A4-3

Appendix 4-1-5 Panel cut dimension drawing...................................................................................A4-8

Appendix 4-1-6 Heating value...........................................................................................................A4-9

Appendix 4-1-7 Selecting the power capacity ...................................................................................A4-9

Appendix 4-1-8 Selecting the wire size .............................................................................................A4-9

Appendix 4-1-9 Drive unit connection screw size ...........................................................................A4-10

Appendix 4-1-10 Connecting each unit ...........................................................................................A4-10

Appendix 4-1-11 Restrictions ..........................................................................................................A4-12

Appendix 4-1-12 Parameters ..........................................................................................................A4-14

Appendix 4-1-13 Precautions ..........................................................................................................A4-14

Appendix 5. Transportation Restrictions for Lithium Batteries

Appendix 5-1 Transportation restrictions for lithium batteries ................................................................A5-2

Appendix 5-1-1 Restriction for packing .............................................................................................A5-2

Appendix 5-1-2 Issuing domestic law of the United State for primary lithium battery transportationA5-5

Appendix 6. Compliance to EU EC Directives

Appendix 6-1 Compliance to EC Directives..........................................................................................A6-2

Appendix 6-1-1 European EC Directives ..........................................................................................A6-2

Appendix 6-1-2 Cautions for EC Directive compliance .....................................................................A6-2

Appendix 7. EMC Installation Guidelines

Appendix 7-1 Introduction .....................................................................................................................A7-2

Appendix 7-2 EMC instructions ............................................................................................................A7-2

Appendix 7-3 EMC measures ...............................................................................................................A7-3

Appendix 7-4 Measures for panel structure..........................................................................................A7-3

Appendix 7-4-1 Measures for control panel unit ...............................................................................A7-3

Appendix 7-4-2 Measures for door....................................................................................................A7-4

Appendix 7-4-3 Measures for operation board panel........................................................................A7-4

Appendix 7-4-4 Shielding of the power supply input section ............................................................A7-4

Appendix 7-5 Measures for various cables...........................................................................................A7-5

Appendix 7-5-1 Measures for wiring in panel....................................................................................A7-5

Appendix 7-5-2 Measures for shield treatment .................................................................................A7-5

Appendix 7-5-3 Servomotor power cable..........................................................................................A7-6

Appendix 7-5-4 Servomotor feedback cable .....................................................................................A7-6

Appendix 7-5-5 Spindle motor power cable ......................................................................................A7-7

Appendix 7-5-6 Spindle motor feedback cable .................................................................................A7-7

Appendix 7-6 EMC countermeasure parts............................................................................................A7-8

Appendix 7-6-1 Shield clamp fitting...................................................................................................A7-8

Appendix 7-6-2 Ferrite core ..............................................................................................................A7-9

Appendix 7-6-3 Power line filter ......................................................................................................A7-10

Appendix 7-6-4 Surge protector ......................................................................................................A7-15

Appendix 8. EC Declaration of conformity

Appendix 8-1 Compliance to EC Directives..........................................................................................A8-2

Appendix 8-1-1 Low voltage equipment............................................................................................A8-2

Appendix 8-1-2 Electromagneic compatibility ...................................................................................A8-9

Appendix 9. Instruction Manual for Compliance with UL/c-UL Standard

Appendix 9 Instruction Manual for Compliance with UL/c-UL Standard...............................................A9-2

Appendix 10. Compliance with China Compulsory Product Certification (CCC Certification) System

Appendix 10-1 Outline of China Compulsory Product Certification System.......................................A10-2

Appendix 10-2 First Catalogue of Products subject to Compulsory Product Certification .................A10-2

Appendix 10-3 Precautions for Shipping Products .............................................................................A10-3

Appendix 10-4 Application for Exemption...........................................................................................A10-4

Appendix 10-5 Mitsubishi NC Product Subject to/Not Subject to CCC Certification ..........................A10-5

1. Introduction

1-1 Servo/spindle drive system configuration .......................................................................................... 1-2

1-1-1 System configuration................................................................................................................... 1-2

1-1-2 Unit outline type........................................................................................................................... 1-3

1-2 Explanation of type............................................................................................................................. 1-4

1-2-1 Servomotor type .......................................................................................................................... 1-4

1-2-2 Servo drive unit type.................................................................................................................... 1-8

1-2-3 Spindle motor type .................................................................................................................... 1-10

1-2-4 Spindle drive unit type ............................................................................................................... 1-12

1-2-5 Power supply unit type .............................................................................................................. 1-13

1-2-6 AC reactor type ......................................................................................................................... 1-14

1 - 1

1. Introduction

1-1 Servo/spindle drive system configuration

1-1-1 System configuration

1-axis servo drive unit

(MDS-C1-V1)

2-axis servo drive unit

(MDS-C1-V2)

Spindle drive unit

(MDS-C1-SP)

Terminator

Power supply unit

(MDS-C1-CV)

Battery unit

(MDS-A-BT)

From NC

L+

L–

To 2nd and 3rd axis servo

Connect a terminator when the battery unit is not used.

Breaker or fuse

(Note)

Prepared by user

Contactor

(Note)

Prepared by user

AC reactor

(B-AL)

Linear scale

(for full closed control)

(Note) Prepared by user

NFB

(Note)

Prepared by user

Magnesensor or spindle side detector

3-phase 200VAC power supply

1 - 2

1. Introduction

1-1-2 Unit outline type

Unit outline type

A0 A1 A2

D:200 D:260

200

Fin

D:220

200

Fin

Outline dimensions

[mm]

H:380

H:380 H:380

Heat dissipa- tion method

Unit outline type

W:60

Wiring allowance at front: 50mm

A0 type does not have fins

In-panel heat radiation

D:260

200

Fin

W:60

Wiring allowance at front: 50mm

Required ventilation space at back:

15mm

Heat radiated outside panel

(forced wind cooling)

W:60

Wiring allowance at front: 50mm

Heat radiation allowance at back:

15mm

Heat radiated outside panel

(natural air cooling)

D:260

200

Fin

D:260

/263

200

Fin

Outline dimensions

[mm]

H:380 H:380 H:380

Heat dissipa- tion method

W:90

Wiring allowance at front: 50mm

Required ventilation space at back:

15mm

Heat radiated outside panel

(forced wind cooling)

W:120

Wiring allowance at front: 50mm

Required ventilation space at back:

15mm

Heat radiated outside panel

(forced wind cooling)

W:150

Wiring allowance at front: 50mm

Required ventilation space at back:

15mm (D2: 12mm)

Heat radiated outside panel

(forced wind cooling)

(Note) Refer to "Appendix 1 Outline dimension drawings" for detailed outline drawings.

(For customers switching from MDS-A/B Series)

The MDS-C1 Series incorporates a highly efficient heat dissipating structure, so the depth of the fin section is smaller than the MDS-A/B Series. Units with an "S" at the end of the type have a smaller unit width than the MDS-A/B Series.

When designing the control panel with these unit outline dimensions, it may not be possible to mount the conventional drive unit.

1 - 3

1. Introduction

1-2 Explanation of type

1-2-1 Servomotor type

Motor series Rated output capacity Type

HC Series (Note 1)

0.5kW to 9.0kW

0.5kW to 7.0kW

HC52, HC102, HC152, HC202, HC352, HC452,

HC702, HC902

HC53, HC103, HC153, HC203, HC353, HC453,

HC703

HC103R, HC153R, HC203R, HC353R, HC503R HC R Series (Note 1) 1.0kW to 5.0kW

HA N Series (Note 2, 3) 0.05kW to 0.45kW HA053N, HA13N, HA23N, HA33N

HA-LF Series (Note 1) 11kW to 15kW HA-LF11K2-S8, HA-LF15K2-S8

(Note 1) The standard type complied with EN Standards and UL Standards.

(Note 2) The standard type complied with EN Standards.

(Note 3) Rated output capacity 0.5kW to 9kW motors are available with the HA … N Series.

1 - 4

1. Introduction

(1) HC, … R Series

Motor type

Rated output

Rated rotation speed

Serial No.

MITSUBISHI

AC SERVO MOTOR

HC102S

INPUT 3AC 123V 6.0A

OUTPUT 1 kW

IEC34-1 1994

SPEED 2000r/min

SER.No.

XXXXXXXXX DATE 98-9

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC

MADE IN JAPAN

Motor rating nameplate

HC

(1) (2) (3) (4)

-

(5)

(5) Detector

SymDetection bol method

A1

ROTARY ENCODER OSA104S2

SER. X X X X X X X X X X X DATE 9809

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORP.

MADE IN JAPAN

Detector type

A

Serial No.

Detector rating nameplate

E42

E51

A42

A51

Incremental

Absolute position

(4) Protective structure

Symbol

Protective structure

100,000p/rev

1,000,000p/rev

100,000p/rev

1,000,000p/rev

OSE104S2

OSE105S2

OSA104S2

OSA105S2

None

W

IP65 (Note) HC R has only IP65 compliance.

IP67

(3) Shaft end structure

Symbol

Shaft end structure

S

T

Straight

Taper

(2) Magnetic brakes

Symbol

Magnetic brakes

(Note) Only the straight type is available for the HC

2kW and higher capacities and HC R 3.5kW and higher capacities.

None

B

None

With magnetic brakes

(1) Rated output and rated rotation speed

HC … Series

Rating 2000r/min

Symbol

Rated output

Rating 3000r/min

Symbol

Rated output

HC … R Series

Rating 3000r/min

Symbol

Rated output

52

102

152

202

352

452

702

902

0.5kW

1.0kW

1.5kW

2.0kW

53

103

153

203

0.5kW

1.0kW

1.5kW

2.0kW

103R

153R

203R

353R

1.0kW

1.5kW

2.0kW

3.5kW

3.5kW

4.5kW

353

453

3.5kW 503R

4.5kW

5.0kW

7.0kW 703

9.0kW

7.0kW

1 - 5

1. Introduction

(2) HA … N Series

Motor type

Rated output

Detector

Serial No.

MITSUBISHI SERVO MOTOR ASSY

TYPE HA23NBS-A42

MOTOR 0.3kW 3000r/min

ENCODER ABS 100000p/rev

SERIAL# XXXXXXXXXXX DATE 9706

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION JAPAN

Rating nameplate

HA

(1)

N

(2) (3) (4)

-

(5)

(5) Detector

Symbol

Detection method

E42

E51

Incremental

A42

Absolute position

A51

(4) Protective structure

Symbol

Protective structure

100,000p/rev

1,000,000p/rev

100,000p/rev

1,000,000p/rev

OSE104S

OSE105S

OSA104S

OSA105S

None

D5

IP54

IP65

(3) Shaft end structure

Symbol

Shaft end structure

(Note) Only the straight type is available for

HA053N and 13N.

S

T

Straight

Taper

(2) Magnetic brakes

Symbol

Magnetic brakes

None

B

None

With magnetic brakes

(1) Rated output and rated rotation speed

Rating 3000r/min

Symbol

Rated output

053

13

23

33

0.05kW

0.1kW

0.3kW

0.45kW

1 - 6

1. Introduction

(3) HA-LF … Series

Motor type

Rated output

Detector

Serial No.

MITSUBISHI SERVO MOTOR ASSY

TYPE HA-LF11K2-A42

MOTOR 11kW 2000r/min

ENCODER ABS 100000p/rev

SERIAL# XXXXXXXXXXX DATE 9706

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION JAPAN

Rating nameplate

HA-LF

(1) (2) (3)

(3) Detector

Detection method

E42

E51

Incremental

A42

A51

Absolute position

(2) Magnetic brakes

Symbol

Magnetic brakes

100,000p/rev

1,000,000p/rev

100,000p/rev

1,000,000p/rev

None

B

None

With magnetic brakes

(1) Rated output and rated rotation speed

Rating 2000r/min

Symbol

Rated output

11K2 11kW

15K2 15kW

(Note 1) The protection structure is equivalent to IP44.

(Note 2) Only the straight type shaft end is available.

OSE104S1

OSE105S1

OSA104S1

OSA105S1

1 - 7

1. Introduction

1-2-2 Servo drive unit type

Motor type

Rated input

Rated output

Current state

Serial No.

MITSUBISHI

TYPE

SERVO DRIVE UNIT

MDS-C1-V1-05

POWER 0.5kW

INPUT 4A DC270-311V

0.2A 1PH 200-230V 50/60Hz

OUTPUT 3.4A 3PH 155V 0-240Hz

3040

S/W BNDXXXXXXXXX H/W VER. *

SERIAL# XXXXXXXXXXX DATE 00/01

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION JAPAN

* X X X X X X X X X X X *

Rating nameplate

MDS-C1-

(1)

1-axis servo drive unit

(1) Motor Capa- type

MDS-C1- city

(kW)

Compatible motor

HA N HC HC R

Outline

(width)

053 13 23 33 52 53 102 103 152 153 202 203 352 353 452 453 702 703 902 103 153 203 353 503 11K2 15K2

V1-01

V1-03

V1-05

V1-10

V1-20

V1-35

V1-45S

V1-45

0.1

0.5 (60mm)

1.0

2.0

3.5

(60mm)

4.5

A1

4.5 B1

● ●

● ●

● ●

● ●

● ● ●

● ●

▲ ▲

● ●

● ●

●

●

●

V1-70S

V1-70

V1-90

7.0

7.0

9.0

(90mm)

C1

(120mm)

▲ ▲

● ●

● ●

V1-110 11.0 D2

●

V1-150 15.0 (150mm)

●

●

or ▲ indicates the compatible motor for each servo drive unit.

Note continuous operation of ▲ (V1-45S, V1-70S) is limited.

CAUTION

The dynamic brake unit (MDS-B-DBU) is required for the MDS-C1-V1-110/150.

1 - 8

1. Introduction

2-axis servo drive unit Compatible motor

(1) Motor type

Capa- city

Outline

Axis

HA N HC HC R

MDS-C1- (kW)

(width)

053 13 23 33 52 53 102 103 152 153 202 203 352 353 452 453 702 703 902 103 153 203 353 503

V2-0101

●

V2-0301 0.3+0.1

M

●

L

● ●

V2-0303

● ●

● ●

V2-0501 0.5+0.1

V2-0503 0.5+0.3

A0

(60mm)

L

M

● ●

L

M

● ●

● ●

● ●

V2-0505 0.5+0.5 LM

● ●

L

● ●

V2-1005 1.0+0.5

M

● ●

V2-1010 1.0+1.0

V2-2010 2.0+1.0

LM

L

M

● ●

● ●

● ● ●

● ● ●

● ●

● ●

●

●

V2-2020 2.0+2.0 LM

A1

L

V2-3510S 3.5+1.0 (60mm)

M

L

● ●

● ●

● ●

● ●

●

●

V2-3520S 3.5+2.0

M

● ● ● ●

L

● ● ●

V2-3510 3.5+1.0

M

● ● ● ●

L

● ● ●

V2-3520 3.5+2.0

M

● ● ● ●

● ● ●

V2-3535 3.5+3.5 LM

B1

L

V2-4520 4.5+2.0 (90mm)

M

L

● ● ●

● ●

●

● ●

●

●

V2-4535 4.5+3.5

M

● ● ●

V2-4545S 4.5+4.5 LM ▲ ▲

V2-7070S 7.0+7.0 LM

V2-4545 4.5+4.5 LM

▲ ▲

● ●

● ●

V2-7035 7.0+3.5

V2-7045 7.0+4.5

V2-7070 D2

V2-9090S 9.0+9.0

C1

(120mm)

(150mm)

L

M

L

M

LM

● ●

● ●

● ●

● ●

▲

●

● or ▲ indicates the compatible motor for each servo drive unit.

Note continuous operation of ▲ (V2-4545S, V2-7070S, V2-9090S) is limited.

●

CAUTION

1. The MDS-C1-V2-3510/3520 shape is compatible with the MDS-B Series.

When newly incorporating the MDS-C1 Series, use the

MDS-C1-V2-3510S/3520S.

2. Limits apply to continuous operation of the MDS-C1-V2-4545S/9090S.

1 - 9

1. Introduction

1-2-3 Spindle motor type

MITSUBISHI AC SPINDLE MOTOR

TYPE SJ-V5. 5-01

SI CONT 4 POLE

kW

3.7 r/min

1500-6000

A(~) max

25

3 PHASES

W I N D C O N N E C T U

P OW E R FA C TOR 8 2 %

MOTOR INPUT(

~

)

137 - 162 V S2 30 min S3 50 %

kW r/min

A(~) max

AMP INPUT(

~

)

4.1 8000

FRAME D90F

IEC 34-1 1994

23 INSULATION CLASS F

AMB TEMP. 0-40ºC

SERIAL

DATE

WEIGHT 49 kg IP 44

SPEC No.RSV00023*

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

A19103-01

MADE IN JAPAN

995291-01

Rating nameplate

(1) Standard spindle motor series

SJ-

(1) (2) (3)

(5) Z-phase detection

Symbol

Z-phase presences

(Note) Presence of the Z-phase applies only to the SJ and SJ-V Series.

None No Z-phase

M Z-phase present

(4) Special specifications

Symbol

Special specifications

None None

(Note) A number indicating the constant output range is indicated after the symbol for the wide range output.

Z

W

High-speed

Wide-range constant output

(3) Base speed

Symbol

Base speed

(Note) The SJ-V Series is indicated with a specification code (–01 to –99).

A

B

1500r/min

1150r/min

L

X

5000r/min

Special

(2) Short time rated output

Symbol

Short time rated output

Symbol

2.2

3.7

5.5

2.2kW

3.7kW

5.5kW

22

26

30

Short time rated output

22kW

26kW

30kW

(Note) The 37kW and larger capacities are handled with the MDS-B-SP

Series.

Refer to Appendix 5 for details.

37kW

45kW

7.5

11

7.5kW

11kW

37

45

15

18.5

15kW 55

18.5kW

55kW

(1) Motor series

Symbol

Motor series

None

V

Large capacity

Compact medium to large capacity

VS Hollow shaft

(Note) Refer to the "MELDAS AC Spindle Built-in Series Standard Specifications" (BFN-14118-04) for details on the built-in spindle motor.

1 - 10

1. Introduction

(2) IPM spindle motor series

SJ-PMF

(1) (2)

-

(3)

(3) Specification code (00)

(2) Base speed

Symbol

Base speed

30 3000r/min

(1) 30-minute rated torque

Symbol

30-minute rated torque

018

035

17.5N·m

35.0N·m

(Note) The built-in IPM spindle motor is available by special order.

1 - 11

1. Introduction

1-2-4 Spindle drive unit type

Motor type

Rated input

Rated output

Current state

Serial No.

MITSUBISHI

TYPE

SERVO DRIVE UNIT

MDS-C1-SP-55

POWER 5.5kW

INPUT 20A DC270-311V

0.2A 1PH 200/200-230V 50/60Hz

OUTPUT 18A 3PH 155V 0-240Hz

3040

S/W BNDXXXXXXXXX H/W VER. *

SERIAL# XXXXXXXXXXX DATE 00/01

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION JAPAN

MDS-C1-

(1)

-

(2)

(2) Capacity

Symbol

Capacity

(kW)

04

075

15

22

37

55

75

110

150S

150

185

220

*

X X X X X X X X X X X

*

Rating nameplate

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

15

18.5

22

Outline type

(unit width)

A0

(60mm wide)

A1

(60mm wide)

B1

(120mm wide)

D1

(150mm wide)

(Note) The 37kW and larger capacities are available with the MDS-B-SP Series.

Refer to Appendix 5 for details.

260

300 30 (150mm wide)

(1) Spindle drive unit series

Symbol

Compatible motor rotation speed

Details

SP

SPH

SPX

SPHX

SPM

Less than 10,000r/min

10,000r/min or more

Less than 10,000r/min

10,000r/min or more

All ranges

IM standard specifications

IM detector conversion unit compatible specifications

(MDS-B-PJEX unit can be connected)

IPM motor compatible specifications

(Use to drive the IPM spindle motor)

1 - 12

1. Introduction

1-2-5 Power supply unit type

Motor type

Rated input

Rated output

Current state

Serial No.

MITSUBISHI

TYPE

POWER SUPPLY UNIT

MDS-C1-CV-150

POWER 15kW

INPUT 49A 3PH 200/200-230V 50/60Hz

0.2A 1PH 200/200-230V 50/60Hz

OUTPUT 58A DC270-311V

3040

S/W BND538W000A1 H/W VER. D

SERIAL# XXXXXXXXXXX DATE 02/09

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION JAPAN

* Ｘ Ｘ Ｘ Ｘ Ｘ Ｘ Ｘ Ｘ Ｘ Ｘ Ｘ *

Rating nameplate

MDS-C1-

(1)

Power supply unit

(1) Motor type

MDS-C1-

Capacity

(kW)

Outline type

(unit width)

CV-37

CV-55

CV-75

CV-110

CV-150

CV-185

CV-220

CV-260

CV-300

CV-370

3.7

5.5

7.5

A2

(60mm wide)

11

B1

(90mm wide)

15

18.5

C1

(120mm wide)

22

26 D1

(150mm wide) 30

37

Compatible AC reactor

Compatible contactor

(Mitsubishi)

(Note 1)

Compatible NFB

(Mitsubishi)

(Note 1)

(Note 1) This is an optional part, and must be prepared by the user.

(Note 2) The 45kW and larger capacities are available with the MDS-B-CVE Series.

Refer to Appendix 4 for details.

1 - 13

1-2-6 AC reactor type

Type B-AL-7.5K

Nameplate

1. Introduction

Top surface of AC reactor

B-AL-

(1)

AC reactor

Motor type

B-AL-

Capacity

(kW)

Compatible power supply unit

7.5K 7.5

MDS-C1-CV-37

MDS-C1-CV-55

11K

MDS-C1-CV-75

11 MDS-C1-CV-110

MDS-C1-CV-150

18.5K 18.5

MDS-C1-CV-185

MDS-C1-CV-220

37K

MDS-C1-CV-300

37 MDS-C1-CV-370

1 - 14

2. Specifications

2-1 Servomotor......................................................................................................................................... 2-2

2-1-1 Specifications list......................................................................................................................... 2-2

2-1-2 Torque characteristics ................................................................................................................. 2-7

2-2 Spindle motor ................................................................................................................................... 2-10

2-2-1 Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 2-10

2-2-2 Output characteristics................................................................................................................ 2-15

2-3 Drive unit .......................................................................................................................................... 2-20

2-3-1 Installation environment conditions ........................................................................................... 2-20

2-3-2 Servo drive unit ......................................................................................................................... 2-20

2-3-3 Spindle drive unit ....................................................................................................................... 2-22

2-3-4 Power supply unit ...................................................................................................................... 2-22

2-3-5 AC reactor ................................................................................................................................. 2-23

2-3-6 D/A output specifications for servo drive unit ............................................................................ 2-24

2-3-7 D/A output specifications for spindle drive unit ......................................................................... 2-25

2-3-8 Explanation of each part............................................................................................................ 2-26

2-4 Restrictions on servo control............................................................................................................ 2-29

2-4-1 Restrictions of electronic gear setting value ............................................................................. 2-29

2-4-2 Restrictions on absolute position control .................................................................................. 2-31

2 - 1

2. Specifications

2-1 Servomotor

2-1-1 Specifications list

HC Series (Rated speed 2000r/min)

Servomotor type

HC Series (Rated speed 2000r/min)

INC specifications: HC † -E51/-E42, ABS specifications: HC † -A51/-A42

HC52 HC102 HC152 HC202 HC352 HC452 HC702 HC902

Compatible servo drive unit type

MDS-C1-V1/V2-

Rated output [kW]

Rated current [A]

Continuous characteristics

Rated torque [N·m]

Stall current [A]

Stall torque

Rated rotation speed

Maximum rotation speed

Maximum current

[N·m]

[r/min]

[r/min]

[A]

[N·m] Maximum torque

Power rate at continuous rated torque

[kW/s]

Motor inertia

Motor inertia with brake

[kg·cm

2

]

[kg·cm

2

]

Maximum motor shaft conversion load inertia rate

Motor side detector

Structure

Environment

Ambient temperature

Ambient humidity

Atmosphere

Altitude

Vibration

Weight Without/with brake

Armature insulation class

[kg]

05 10 20

0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.5 4.5 7.0 9.0

3.2 6.0 9.0 10.7 16.9 23.3 32.8 40.8

2.39 4.78

2.94 5.88

11.8 21.6

8.7 16.7

7.16 9.55 16.7 21.5 33.4 43.0

2000

2000

35 45 70 90

35.3 41.7 59.8 87.5 120 153

25.6 21.5 34.0 38.2 69.7 82.5

6.6 13.7

20.0 42.5 82 121 160 204

8.6 15.7

22.0 51.1 92 131 170 214

High-speed, high-accuracy machine : 2 times or less of motor inertia

General machine tool

General machine

: 3 times or less of motor inertia

: 5 times or less of motor inertia

Resolution per motor rotation

E51/A51: 1,000,000 pulse/rev, E42/A42: 100,000 pulse/rev

Fully closed, self-cooling (Protection method: IP65, IP67)

Operation: 0 to 40°C (non freezing), Storage: –15 to 70°C (non freezing)

Operation: 80%RH or less (non condensing),

Storage: 90%RH or less (non condensing)

Indoors (no direct sunlight); no corrosive gas, inflammable gas, oil mist, or dust

Operation: 1000 meters or less above sea level,

Storage: 1000 meters or less above sea level

X:9.8m/s

2

(1G)

Y:24.5m/s

2

(2.5G)

X:19.6m/s

2

(2G)

Y:49m/s

2

(5G)

X:11.7m/s

2

(1.2G)

Y:24.5m/s

2

(2.5G)

5.0/7.5

7.0/9.0

9.0/11 12/18 19/25 25/30 32/38

Class F

X:19.6m/s

2

Y:49m/s

2

45/51

(Note 1) The above characteristics values are representative values. The maximum current and maximum torque are the values when combined with the drive unit.

(Note 2) Values when combined with the S-type drive unit are shown in parentheses.

2 - 2

2. Specifications

HC Series (Rated speed 3000r/min)

Servomotor type

HC Series (Rated speed 3000r/min)

INC specifications: HC † -E51/-E42, ABS specifications: HC † -A51/-A42

HC53 HC103 HC153 HC203 HC353 HC453 HC703

Compatible servo drive unit type

MDS-C1-V1/V2-

Rated output [kW]

Rated current [A]

Continuous

Rated torque [N·m] characteristics Stall current [A]

Stall torque [N·m]

05 10 20 35 45 70 90

0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.5 4.5 7.0

3.2 5.3 8.6 10.4 16.5 22.1 30.5

1.59 3.18 4.77 6.37 11.1 14.3 22.3

33.3

22.4

(31.5)

55.6

(41.0)

66.7

(55.6)

22.5

2.94 5.88 8.82 13.7

(21.2)

3000

3000

37.2

(30.4)

49.0

(40.8)

Rated rotation speed

Maximum rotation speed

Maximum current

Maximum torque

Power rate at continuous rated torque

Motor inertia

Motor inertia with brake

[r/min]

[r/min]

[A]

[N·m]

[kW/s]

8.82 16.7 28.4 40.2 55.9 79.8 105

3.8 7.4 11.4 9.5 15.0 16.9 29.3

Maximum motor shaft conversion load inertia rate

Motor side detector

Structure

Environment

[kg·cm

2

]

[kg·cm

2

]

Ambient temperature

Ambient humidity

Atmosphere

Altitude

Vibration

Weight Without/with brake

Armature insulation class

[kg]

6.6 13.7 20.0 42.5 82 121 160

8.6 15.7 22.0 52.5 92 131 170

High-speed, high-accuracy machine : 2 times or less of motor inertia

General machine tool

General machine

: 3 times or less of motor inertia

: 5 times or less of motor inertia

Resolution per motor rotation

E51/A51: 1,000,000 pulse/rev, E42/A42: 100,000 pulse/rev

Fully closed, self-cooling (Protection method: IP65, IP67)

Operation: 0 to 40°C (non freezing), Storage: –15 to 70°C (non freezing)

Operation: 80%RH or less (non condensing),

Storage: 90%RH or less (non condensing)

Indoors (no direct sunlight); no corrosive gas, inflammable gas, oil mist, or dust

Operation: 1000 meters or less above sea level,

Storage: 1000 meters or less above sea level

X:9.8m/s

Y:24.5m/s

2

2

(1G)

(2.5G)

X:19.6m/s

2

(2G)

Y:49m/s

2

(5G)

X:11.7m/s

2

(1.2G)

Y:24.5m/s

2

(2.5G)

5.0/7.5

7.0/9.0

9.0/11 12/18 19/25 25/30 32/38

Class F

(Note 1) The above characteristics values are representative values. The maximum current and maximum torque are the values when combined with the drive unit.

(Note 2) Values when combined with the S-type drive unit are shown in parentheses.

2 - 3

2. Specifications

HC † R Series (Rated speed 3000r/min)

Servomotor type

HC † R Series (Rated speed 3000r/min)

INC specifications: HC † R-E51/-E42/-E33,

ABS specifications: HC † R-A51/-A42/-A33

HC103R HC153R HC203R HC353R HC503R

Compatible servo drive unit type

MDS-C1-V1/V2-

Rated output [kW]

Rated current [A]

Continuous characteristics

Rated torque [N·m]

Stall current [A]

Stall torque [N·m]

Rated rotation speed [r/min]

Maximum rotation speed

Maximum current

[r/min]

[A]

[N·m] Maximum torque

Power rate at continuous rated torque

Motor inertia

Motor inertia with brake

[kW/s]

[kg·cm

[kg·cm

2

2

]

]

10 20 35 45

1.0 1.5 2.0 3.5 5.0

6.1 8.8 14.0 22.5 28.0

3.18 4.77 6.37 11.1 15.9

6.1 8.8 14.0 22.5 28.0

3.18 4.77 6.37 11.1 15.9

3000

3000

18.4 23.4 37.0 56.3 70.0

7.95 11.9 15.9 27.8 39.8

67.4 120 176 150 211

1.5 1.9 2.3 8.3 12.0

Maximum motor shaft conversion load inertia rate

Motor side detector

Structure

Environment

Ambient temperature

Ambient humidity

Atmosphere

Altitude

Vibration

Weight Without/with brake

Armature insulation class

[kg]

High-speed, high-accuracy machine : 2 times or less of motor inertia

General machine tool : 3 times or less of motor inertia

General machine : 5 times or less of motor inertia

Resolution per motor rotation

E51/A51: 1,000,000 pulse/rev, E42/A42: 100,000 pulse/rev

Fully closed, self-cooling (Protection method: IP65)

Operation: 0 to 40°C (non freezing), Storage: –15 to 70°C (non freezing)

Operation: 80%RH or less (non condensing),

Storage: 90%RH or less (non condensing)

Indoors (no direct sunlight); no corrosive gas, inflammable gas, oil mist, or dust

Operation: 1000 meters or less above sea level,

Storage: 1000 meters or less above sea level

X:9.8m/s

2

(1G) Y:24.5m/s

2

(2.5G)

3.9/6.0 5.0/7.0 6.2/8.3 12/15 17/21

Class F

(Note) The above characteristics values are representative values. The maximum current and maximum torque are the values when combined with the drive unit.

2 - 4

2. Specifications

HA † N Series (Rated speed 3000r/min)

Servomotor type

HA † N Series (Rated speed 3000r/min)

INC Specifications: HA † N-E51/-E42, ABS specifications: HA † N-A51/-A42

HA053N HA13N HA23N HA33N

Compatible servo drive unit type

MDS-C1-V1/V2-

Rated output [kW]

Rated current [A]

Continuous characteristics

Rated torque [N·m]

Stall current [A]

Stall torque [N·m]

Rated rotation speed [r/min]

Maximum rotation speed

Maximum current

[r/min]

[A]

[N·m] Maximum torque

Power rate at continuous rated torque

[kW/s]

Motor inertia

Motor inertia with brake

[kg·cm

2

]

[kg·cm

2

]

Maximum motor shaft conversion load inertia rate

Motor side detector

Structure

Environment

Ambient temperature

Ambient humidity

Atmosphere

Altitude

Vibration

Weight Without/with brake

Armature insulation class

[kg]

01 03

0.05 0.1 0.3 0.45

0.95 0.95 2.9 2.2

0.16 0.32 0.95 1.43

1.4 1.4 3.0 3.0

0.25 0.49 0.98 1.96

3000

3000

3.8 3.8 8.1 8.1

0.69 1.37 2.7 5.6

1.4 2.8 9.3 10.4

0.188 0.365 0.98 1.96

0.204 0.381 1.18 2.16

High-speed, high-accuracy machine : 2 times or less of motor inertia

General machine tool

General machine

: 3 times or less of motor inertia

: 5 times or less of motor inertia

Resolution per motor rotation

E51/A51: 1,000,000 pulse/rev, E42/A42: 100,000 pulse/rev

Fully closed, self-cooling (Protection method: IP54, IP65)

Operation: 0 to 40°C (non freezing), Storage: –15 to 70°C (non freezing)

Operation: 80%RH or less (non condensing),

Storage: 90%RH or less (non condensing)

Indoors (no direct sunlight); no corrosive gas, inflammable gas, oil mist, or dust

Operation: 1000 meters or less above sea level,

Storage: 1000 meters or less above sea level

X:19.6m/s

2

(2G) Y:19.6m/s

2

(2G)

2.1/2.5 2.5/2.9 3.5/4.5 4.5/5.5

Class F

(Note) The above characteristics values are representative values. The maximum current and maximum torque are the values when combined with the drive unit.

2 - 5

2. Specifications

HA-LF Series (Rated speed 2000r/min)

Servomotor type

HA-LF Series (Rated speed 2000r/min)

INC specifications: HA-LF † -E51/-E42,

ABS specifications: HA-LF † -A51/-A42

HA-LF11K2-S8 HA-LF15K2-S8

Compatible servo drive unit type

MDS-C1-V1/V2-

Rated output [kW]

Rated current [A]

Continuous characteristics

Rated torque [N·m]

Stall current [A]

Stall torque [N·m]

Rated rotation speed [r/min]

Maximum rotation speed

Maximum current

[r/min]

[A]

[N·m] Maximum torque

Power rate at continuous rated torque

Motor inertia

Motor inertia with brake

[kW/s]

[kg·cm

[kg·cm

2

2

]

]

Maximum motor shaft conversion load inertia rate

Motor side detector

Structure

Environment

Ambient temperature

Ambient humidity

Atmosphere

Altitude

Vibration

Weight Without/with brake

Armature insulation class

[kg]

110 150

11.0 15.0

63.0 77.0

52.5 71.6

84.7 98.6

70.6 91.7

2000

2000

204 260

170 240

263 233

105 220

113 293

High-speed, high-accuracy machine : 2 times or less of motor inertia

General machine tool : 3 times or less of motor inertia

General machine : 5 times or less of motor inertia

Resolution per motor rotation

E51/A51: 1,000,000 pulse/rev, E42/A42: 100,000 pulse/rev

Fully closed, self-cooling (Protection method: IP44)

Operation: 0 to 40°C (non freezing), Storage: –15 to 70°C (non freezing)

Operation: 80%RH or less (non condensing),

Storage: 90%RH or less (non condensing)

Indoors (no direct sunlight); no corrosive gas, inflammable gas, oil mist, or dust

Operation: 1000 meters or less above sea level,

Storage: 1000 meters or less above sea level

X:11.7m/s

2

(1.2G) Y:29.4m/s

2

(3G)

55/70 95/126

Class F

(Note) The above characteristics values are representative values. The maximum current and maximum torque are the values when combined with the drive unit.

2 - 6

2-1-2 Torque characteristics

20

[ HC52 ]

2. Specifications

[ HC102 ] [ HC152 ]

40 40

15

. m]

10

Short time operation range

5

0

Continuous operation range

Rotation speed [r/min]

[ HC202 ]

50

40

. m] 30

20

Short time operation range

10

0

Continuous operation range

Rotation speed [r/min]

30

. m]

20

Short time operation range

10

0

0

Continuous operation range

1000

Rotation speed [r/min]

2000

[ HC352 ]

75

60

. m] 45 Short time operation range

30

15

Continuous operation range

0

0 1000

Rotation speed [r/min]

2000

[ HC702 ]

150

120

. m] 90 Short time operation range

60

[ HC902 ]

250

200

. m] 150

100 Short time operation range

30 50

Continuous operation range Continuous operation range

0

Rotation speed [r/min]

0

0 1000

Rotation speed [r/min]

2000

(Note 1) The above graphs show the data when applied the input voltage of 200VAC.

When the input voltage is 200VAC or less, the short time operation range is limited.

(Note 2) The dotted lines show the values when combined with the S-type drive unit.

30

. m]

20 Short time operation range

10

Continuous operation range

0

Rotation speed [r/min]

[ HC452 ]

100

80

. m] 60 Short time operation range

40

20

Continuous operation range

0

Rotation speed [r/min]

2 - 7

10

8

[ HC53 ]

. m] 6

Short time operation range

4

2

0

Continuous operation range

Rotation speed [r/min]

[ HC203 ]

60

2. Specifications

[ HC103 ]

20

15

. m]

10 Short time operation range

5

0

0

Continuous operation range

1000 2000

Rotation speed [r/min]

3000

[ HC353 ]

60

[ HC153 ]

40

30

. m]

20 Short time operation range

10

0

Continuous operation range

Rotation speed [r/min]

[ HC453 ]

100

45

. m]

30

15

Short time operation range

0

Continuous operation range

Rotation speed [r/min]

[ HC703 ]

120

. m]

45

30

Short time operation range

15

Continuous operation range

0

0 1000 2000

Rotation speed [r/min]

3000

20

[ HC103R ]

75

. m]

50

Short time operation range

25

0

Continuous operation range

Rotation speed [r/min]

[ HC153R ]

20

90

. m]

60

Short time operation range

30

0

Continuous operation range

Rotation speed [r/min]

[ HC203R ]

. m]

15

10

5

Short time operation range

0

0

Continuous operation range

1000 2000

Rotation speed [r/min]

3000

[ HC353R ]

40

. m]

15

10

Short time operation range

5

0

0

Continuous operation range

1000 2000

Rotation speed [r/min]

3000

[ HC503R ]

60

20

15

. m]

10

Short time operation range

30

. m]

20

Short time operation range

45

. m]

30

Short time operation range

5

10

Continuous operation range Continuous operation range

0 0

0

1000 2000 3000

0 1000 2000 3000

Rotation speed [r/min] Rotation speed [r/min]

(Note 1) The above graphs show the data when applied the input voltage of 200VAC.

When the input voltage is 200VAC or less, the short time operation range is limited.

(Note 2) The dotted lines show the values when combined with the S-type drive unit.

15

0

Continuous operation range

0 1000 2000 3000

Rotation speed [r/min]

2 - 8

2. Specifications

[ HA053N ]

1.0

0.8

. m] 0.6

0.4

Short time operation range

0.2

0

Continuous operation range

Rotation speed [r/min]

3000

[ HA33N ]

10

8

. m]

6

4 Short time operation range

2

0

Continuous operation range

Rotation speed [r/min]

3000

200

[ HA-LF11K2-S8 ]

[ HA13N ]

2.0

1.5

. m]

1.0

Short time operation range

0.5

0

0

Continuous operation range

1000 2000

Rotation speed [r/min]

3000

400

[ HA-LF15K2-S8 ]

. m]

150

Short time operation range

100

300

. m]

200

Short time operation range

50 100

Continuous operation range

Continuous operation range

0

0 1000

Rotation speed [r/min]

2000

0

0 1000

Rotation speed [r/min]

2000

(Note) The above graphs show the data when applied the input voltage of 200VAC.

When the input voltage is 200VAC or less, the short time operation range is limited.

[ HA23N ]

4

3

. m]

2 Short time operation range

1

0

0

Continuous operation range

1000 2000 3000

Rotation speed [r/min]

2 - 9

2. Specifications

2-2 Spindle motor

2-2-1 Specifications

Spindle motor type

Base rotation speed

1500r/min Series

7.5-01

SJ-V

11-01 15-01 18.5-01 22-01 2.2-01 3.7-01 5.5-01 26-01

Compatible spindle drive unit type

SPH-22 SPH-37 SP-55

MDS-C1-

SP-75 SP-110 SP-150 SP-185 SP-220 SP-300

Continuous rating

1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22

[kW]

Output capacity

30-minute rating

50%ED rating 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 26

[kW]

Base speed

Maximum speed

Frame No.

GD 2

Tolerable radial load

[r/min]

[r/min]

Continuous rated torque [N·m]

[kg·m 2 ]

Inertia [kg·m

[N]

2 ]

0.027 0.035

0.007 0.009

0.059

0.015

0.098

0.025

1500

10000 8000

A90 B90 D90 A112 B112

6000

A160 B160 C160

9.5 14.0 23.5 35.0 47.7 70.0 95.5 118 140

0.12 0.23 0.23 0.32 0.38

0.03 0.06 0.06 0.08 0.10

980 1470 1960

Single-phase 200V 3-phase 200V

2940

Cooling fan

Input voltage

Maximum power consumption

Ambient temperature

42W 40W 63W

Environ- ment

Insulation

Ambient humidity

Atmosphere

Altitude

Operation: 0 to 40°C (non freezing), Storage: –20 to 65°C (non freezing)

Operation: 90%RH or less (non condensing),

Storage: 90%RH or less (non condensing)

Indoors (no direct sunlight); no corrosive gas, inflammable gas, oil mist, or dust

Operation: 1000 meters or less above sea level,

Storage: 1000 meters or less above sea level

110

Class F

(Note 1) The rated output is guaranteed at the rated input voltage (200/220/230VAC) to the power supply unit.

If the input voltage fluctuates and drops below 200VAC, the rated output may not be attained.

(Note 2) The 50%ED rating applies for a 10-minute cycle time consisting of ON for five minutes and OFF for five minutes.

CAUTION

When replacing the SJ-V series by the conventional SJ series, the shorter L dimension is applied.

2 - 10

2. Specifications

Spindle motor type

Large capacity series

SJ- SJ-V

30A 37BP 45BP 55-01

Compatible spindle drive unit type

SP-370 SP-450

MDS-B-

SP-550

Continuous rating

[kW]

22 30 37 45

Output capacity

30-minute rating

50%ED rating

[kW]

30 37 45 55

Base speed

Maximum speed

[r/min]

[r/min]

1500 1150

4500 3450

Frame No.

Continuous rated torque [N·m]

GD 2 [kg·m 2 ]

Inertia [kg·m

Tolerable radial load

Cooling fan

[N]

2 ]

Input voltage

Maximum power consumption

Ambient temperature

B160 B180 A200 A225

140 249 307 374

0.69 1.36 2.19 3.39

0.17 0.34 0.55 0.85

2940 4900 5880 5880

Single-phase 200V 3-phase 200V

Environ- ment

Ambient humidity

Atmosphere

Altitude

Operation: 0 to 40°C (non freezing), Storage: –20 to 65°C (non freezing)

Operation: 90%RH or less (non condensing),

Storage: 90%RH or less (non condensing)

Indoors (no direct sunlight); no corrosive gas, inflammable gas, oil mist, or dust

Operation: 1000 meters or less above sea level,

Storage: 1000 meters or less above sea level

Insulation Class F

(Note 1) The rated output is guaranteed at the rated input voltage (200/220/230VAC) to the power supply unit.

If the input voltage fluctuates and drops below 200VAC, the rated output may not be attained.

(Note 2) The 50%ED rating applies for a 10-minute cycle time consisting of ON for five minutes and OFF for five minutes.

(Note 3) The 37kW and larger capacities are available with the MDS-B-SP Series. Refer to Appendix 4 for details.

2 - 11

2. Specifications

Spindle motor type

Wide range (1:8) constant output series

Wide range constant output series

SJ-V SJ-

11-01 11-09 15-03 18.5-03

Compatible spindle drive unit type

SP-110 SP-185

MDS-C1-

Base speed [r/min] 750

SP-220 SP-260

Output

Continuous rating

3.7 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5

[kW] capacity 30-minute rating

50%ED rating [kW]

5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22

500

(600)

550

(600)

Maximum speed

Frame No.

[r/min]

B112 A160

47.1 70.0 95.5 115 140 239 294 Continuous rated torque [N·m]

GD 2 [kg·m 2 ]

Inertia [kg·m 2 ]

Tolerable radial load [N]

0.12 0.23 0.23 0.32 0.32 1.36 2.19

0.03 0.06 0.06 0.08 0.08 0.34 0.55

Cooling fan

Input voltage 3-phase 200V

Single- phase

200V

3-phase

200V

Maximum power consumption

Ambient temperature

Environ- ment

Ambient humidity

Atmosphere

Altitude

Operation: 0 to 40°C (non freezing), Storage: –20 to 65°C (non freezing)

Operation: 90%RH or less (non condensing),

Storage: 90%RH or less (non condensing)

Indoors (no direct sunlight); no corrosive gas, inflammable gas, oil mist, or dust

Operation: 1000 meters or less above sea level,

Storage: 1000 meters or less above sea level

Insulation Class F

(Note 1) The rated output is guaranteed at the rated input voltage (200/220/230VAC) to the power supply unit.

If the input voltage fluctuates and drops below 200VAC, the rated output may not be attained.

(Note 2) The 50%ED rating applies for a 10-minute cycle time consisting of ON for five minutes and OFF for five minutes.

2 - 12

2. Specifications

Spindle motor type

High-speed series

SJ-V

3.7-02ZM 7.5-03ZM 11-06ZM 11-08ZM 22-06ZM 30-02ZM

Compatible spindle drive unit type

SPH-37 SPH-110 SPH-150 SP-185 SP-220

MDS-C1-

SP-300

Continuous rating

2.2 5.5 5.5 7.5 11

[kW]

18.5

Output capacity

30-minute rating

50%ED rating

3.7

(15min. rating)

[kW]

Base speed [r/min]

7.5 7.5 11 15 22

3000 1500

Maximum speed

Frame No.

[r/min] 15000 12000

A90 A112 B112

8000

A160 B160

Continuous rated torque [N·m]

GD 2 [kg·m 2 ]

Inertia [kg·m

Tolerable radial load [N]

2 ]

7.0 35.0 35.0 47.7 70.0 118

0.027 0.098 0.098 0.12 0.23 0.32

0.007 0.025 0.025 0.03 0.06 0.08

Cooling fan

Input voltage

Single-phase

200V

3-phase 200V

Maximum power consumption

Ambient temperature

42W 40W 63W

Environ- ment

Ambient humidity

Atmosphere

Altitude

Operation: 0 to 40°C (non freezing), Storage: –20 to 65°C (non freezing)

Operation: 90%RH or less (non condensing),

Storage: 90%RH or less (non condensing)

Indoors (no direct sunlight); no corrosive gas, inflammable gas, oil mist, or dust

Operation: 1000 meters or less above sea level,

Storage: 1000 meters or less above sea level

Insulation Class F

(Note 1) The rated output is guaranteed at the rated input voltage (200/220/230VAC) to the power supply unit.

If the input voltage fluctuates and drops below 200VAC, the rated output may not be attained.

(Note 2) The 50%ED rating applies for a 10-minute cycle time consisting of ON for five minutes and OFF for five minutes.

2 - 13

2. Specifications

Spindle motor type

Hollow shaft series IPM Series

SJ-VS SJ-PM

7.5-03ZM 22-06ZM 30-02ZM F01830-00 F03530-00

Compatible spindle drive unit type

SPH-110 SP-220 SP-300 SPM-110

MDS-C1-

SPM-185

Continuous rating

5.5 11 18.5 3.7 7.5

[kW]

Output capacity

30-minute rating

50%ED rating 7.5 15 22 5.5 11.0

[kW]

Base speed

Maximum speed

Frame No.

[r/min]

[r/min]

1500 1500

12000 8000

3000

8000

A112 A160 B160 71 90

35.0 70.0 118 11.8 23.9 Continuous rated torque [N·m]

GD 2 [kg·m 2 ]

Inertia [kg·m 2 ]

Tolerable radial load [N]

Cooling fan

Input voltage

0.099 0.23 0.32 0.015 0.034

0.025 0.058 0.08 0.004 0.009

0 (Note 3)

Single- phase 200V

0 (Note 3) 0 (Note 3) 1470

3-phase 200V

1960

Maximum power consumption

Ambient temperature Operation: 0 to 40°C (non freezing), Storage: –20 to 65°C (non freezing)

Ambient humidity

Operation: 90%RH or less (non condensing),

Storage: 90%RH or less (non condensing)

Environ- ment Atmosphere

Altitude

Indoors (no direct sunlight); no corrosive gas, inflammable gas, oil mist, or dust

Operation: 1000 meters or less above sea level,

Storage: 1000 meters or less above sea level

Insulation Class F

(Note 1) The rated output is guaranteed at the rated input voltage (200 to 230VAC) to the power supply unit.

(Note 2) The 50%ED rating applies for a 10-minute cycle time consisting of ON for five minutes and OFF for five minutes.

(Note 3) Do not apply a radial load.

2 - 14

2. Specifications

2-2-2 Output characteristics

[Base rotation speed 1500r/min series SJ-V2.2-01] [Base rotation speed 1500r/min series SJ-V3.7-01]

2.2

3.7

15-minute rating

15-minute rating

1.5

1.3

0.9

Continuous rating

2.2

Continuous rating

1.3

5.5

4.1

3.7

2.8

0

0 1500 6000

Rotation speed [r/min]

10000

[Base rotation speed 1500r/min series SJ-V5.5-01]

15-minute rating

Continuous rating

7.5

5.5

4.1

0

0 1500 6000

Rotation speed [r/min]

10000

[Base rotation speed 1500r/min series SJ-V7.5-01]

15-minute rating

Continuous rating

11

8.3

7.5

5.6

0

0 1500 6000

Rotation speed [r/min]

8000

[Base rotation speed 1500r/min series SJ-V11-01]

15-minute rating

Continuous rating

15

11

8.3

0

0 1500 6000

Rotation speed [r/min]

8000

[Base rotation speed 1500r/min series SJ-V15-01]

15-minute rating

Continuous rating

18.5

15

13.9

11.3

0

0 1500 4500

Rotation speed [r/min]

6000

[Base rotation speed 1500r/min series SJ-V18.5-01]

15-minute rating

Continuous

22

18.5

16.5

13.9

0

0 1500 4500

Rotation speed [r/min]

6000

[Base rotation speed 1500r/min series SJ-V22-01]

15-minute rating

Continuous rating

0

0 1500 4500

Rotation speed [r/min]

6000

0

0

2 - 15

1500 4500

Rotation speed [r/min]

6000

2. Specifications

26

22

[Base rotation speed 1500r/min series SJ-V26-01 ]

30-minute rating

Continuous rating

30

22

0

0 1500

Rotation speed [r/min]

[Large capacity series SJ-30A]

30-minute rating

Continuous rating

6000

37

30

[Large capacity series SJ-37BP]

30-minute rating

Continuous rating

45

37

0

0 1500

Rotation speed [r/min]

[Large capacity series SJ-45BP]

4500

30-minute rating

Continuous rating

0

0

55

45

1150

Rotation speed [r/min]

[Large capacity series SJ-V55-01]

3450

30-minute rating

Continuous

0

0 1150

Rotation speed [r/min]

3450

0

0 1150

Rotation speed [r/min]

3450

2 - 16

2. Specifications

5.5

[Wide range (1:8) constant output series SJ-V11-01]

30-minute rating

3.7

Continuous rating

7.5

5.5

[Wide range (1:8) constant output series SJ-V11-09]

30-minute rating

Continuous rating

9

7.5

0

0 750

Rotation speed [r/min]

6000

[Wide range (1:8) constant output series SJ-V15-03]

30-minute rating

Continuous rating

11

9

0

0 750 6000

Rotation speed [r/min]

[Wide range (1:8) constant output series SJ-V18.5-03]

30-minute rating

Continuous rating

15

11

0

0 750

Rotation speed [r/min]

6000

[Wide range (1:8) constant output series SJ-V22-05]

30-minute rating

Continuous rating

0

0 750

Rotation speed [r/min]

6000

18.5

15

14

11.5

0

0 750

Rotation speed [r/min]

[Wide range constant output series SJ-22XW5]

6000

30-minute rating

Continuous rating

22

18.5

[Wide range constant output series SJ-22XW8]

30-minute rating

Continuous rating

0

Rotation speed [r/min]

3500 4500

2 - 17

0

0 500 600

Rotation speed [r/min]

4000

3.7

3

2.2

1.8

[High speed series SJ-V3.7-02ZM ]

15-minute rating

Continuous rating

2. Specifications

7.5

6.3

5.5

4.6

[High speed series SJ-V7.5-03ZM ]

15-minute rating

Continuous rating

7.5

5.5

0

0 3000

Rotation speed [r/min]

12000

[High speed series SJ-V11-06ZM ]

15000

30-minute rating

Continuous rating

0

0 1500

Rotation speed [r/min]

10000 12000

[High speed series SJ-V11-08ZM ]

11

7.5

30-minute rating

Continuous rating

15

11

0

0 1500

Rotation speed [r/min]

[High speed series SJ-V22-06ZM ]

12000

30-minute rating

Continuous rating

22

18.5

0

0 1500

Rotation speed [r/min]

[High speed series SJ-V30-02ZM ]

8000

30-minute rating

Continuous rating

0

0 1500

Rotation speed [r/min]

8000

0

0 1500

Rotation speed [r/min]

8000

2 - 18

7.5

5.5

[Hollow shaft series SJ-V7.5-03ZM ]

30-minute rating

Continuous rating

2. Specifications

15

11

[Hollow shaft series SJ-V22-06ZM ]

30-minute rating

Continuous rating

22

18.5

0

0 1500

Rotation speed [r/min]

[Hollow shaft series SJ-V30-02ZM ]

12000

30-minute rating

Continuous rating

5.5

3.7

0

0 1500

Rotation speed [r/min]

[IPM series SJ-PMF01830-00]

30-minute rating

Continuous rating

8000

0

0 1500

Rotation speed [r/min]

[IPM series SJ-PMF03530-00]

11

7.5

30-minute rating

Continuous rating

8000

0

0 3000

Rotation speed [r/min]

8000

0

0 3000

Rotation speed [r/min]

8000

2 - 19

2. Specifications

2-3 Drive unit

2-3-1 Installation environment conditions

Common installation environment conditions for servo, spindle and power supply unit are shown below.

Ambient temperature

Operation: 0 to 55°C (with no freezing), Storage / Transportation: -15°C to 70°C (with no freezing)

Environ- ment

Ambient humidity

Atmosphere

Altitude

Vibration/impact

Operation: 90%RH or less (with no dew condensation)

Storage / Transportation: 90%RH or less (with no dew condensation)

Indoors (no direct sunlight)

With no corrosive gas, inflammable gas, oil mist or dust

Operation/Storage: 1000 meters or less above sea level, Transportation: 10000 meters or less above sea level

4.9m/s

2

(0.5G) / 49m/s

2

(5.0G)

2-3-2 Servo drive unit

1) 1-axis servo drive unit

1-axis servo drive unit MDS-C1-V1 Series

Servo drive unit type

45 70S 70 90 110 150

Rated output [kW] 0.1 0.3 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.5 4.5 4.5 7.0 7.0 9.0 11.0

Rated voltage [V] 155AC

Output

Rated current [A] 0.95 2.9 3.4 6.8 13.0

19.0

28.0

28.0

33.5

33.5 42.0 68.0

Rated voltage [V] 270 to 311DC

Input

Rated current [A]

150

87.0

1 3 4 7 14 17 30 30 35 35 45 55 75

Voltage [V]

Frequency [Hz]

Control power

Current [A]

Rush current [A]

Rush conductivity time

[ms]

Earth leakage current [mA]

Control method

Braking brakes

External analog output

200/200 to 230AC

50/60

Max. 0.2

MAX. 35

MAX. 6

1 （ MAX. 2 ）

Sine wave PWM control method, current control method

Regenerative braking and dynamic brakes

Built-in External

0 to +5V,2ch (data for various adjustments)

Structure

Cooling method Self-cooling

Protection type (Protection method: IP20 [over all] / IP00 [Terminal block TE1])

Forced wind cooling

(internal)

Forced wind cooling (fin)

Weight

Heat radiated at rated output

Noise

[kg]

[W] 21 27 37 53 91 132 158 185

Less than 55dB

189

6.4

641

(Note) The drive unit, within the same capacity, which has a shorter width is indicated with an "S" at the end of the type.

Note that limits apply to continuous operation of the 45S and 70S types.

2 - 20

2. Specifications

2) 2-axis servo drive unit

Servo drive unit type

Rated output

MDS-C1-V2- 0101 0301 0303 0501

[kW]

0.1

+

0.1

0.3

+

0.1

0.3

+

0.3

0.5

+

0.1

Rated voltage [V]

Output

Rated current [A]

0.95

+

0.95

2.9

+

0.95

2.9

+

2.9

3.4

+

0.95

Rated voltage [V]

2-axis servo drive unit MDS-C1-V2 Series

0503

0.5

+

0.3

3.4

+

2.9

0505

0.5

+

0.5

3.4

+

3.4

1003

1.0

+

0.3

155AC

6.8

+

2.9

1005

270 to 311DC

1.0

+

0.5

6.8

+

3.4

1010

1.0

+

1.0

6.8

+

6.8

2010 2020 3510S

2.0

+

1.0

13.0

+

6.8

2.0

+

2.0

13.0

+

13.0

3.5

+

1.0

16.0

+

6.8

3510

3.5

+

1.0

16.0

+

6.8

Input

Rated current [A]

Voltage [V]

2 4 6 5 7 8 10 11 14 21 28 24 24

200/200 to 230AC

Frequency [Hz] 50/60

Control power

Current [A]

Rush current [A]

Rush conductivity time

[ms]

Earth leakage current [mA] 1 （

Max. 0.2

MAX. 35

MAX. 6

MAX.4 For 2 axes ）

Control method Sine wave PWM control method, current control method

Braking and dynamic brakes

Dynamic brakes

External analog output

Structure

Cooling method

Built-in

0 to +5V,2ch (data for various adjustments)

Protection type (Protection method: IP20 [over all] / IP00 [Terminal block TE1])

Forced wind cooling (internal) Forced wind cooling (fin)

Weight

Heat radiated at rated output

Noise

Servo drive unit type

[kg]

[W]

2-axis servo drive unit MDS-C1-V2 Series

MDS-C1-V2- 3520S 3520 3535 4520

Less than 55dB

4535 4545S 4545 7035 7045 7070S 7070 9090S

Rated output [kW]

3.5

+

2.0

3.5

+

2.0

3.5

+

3.5

4.5

+

2.0

4.5

+

3.5

4.5

+

4.5

4.5

+

4.5

7.0

+

3.5

7.0

+

4.5

7.0

+

7.0

7.0

+

7.0

9.0

+

9.0

Rated voltage [V]

Output

Rated current [A]

16.0

+

13.0

16.0

+

13.0

16.0

+

16.0

28.0

+

16.0

28.0

+

16.0

155AC

28.0

+

28.0

28.0

+

28.0

33.5

+

16.0

33.5

+

28

33.5

+

33.5

33.5

+

33.5

40.8

+

40.8

Rated voltage [V] 270 to 311DC

Input

Rated current [A] 31 31 34 44 47 60 60 52 64 70 70 90

190

Voltage [V]

Frequency [Hz]

Control power

Current [A]

Rush current [A]

Rush conductivity time

[ms]

Earth leakage current [mA]

Control method

Braking

200/200 to 230AC

50/60

Max. 0.2

MAX. 35

MAX. 6

1 （ MAX. 4 For 2 axes ）

Sine wave PWM control method, current control method

Regenerative braking and dynamic brakes

External analog output

Structure

Built-in

0 to +5V,2ch (data for various adjustments)

Protection type (Protection method: IP20 [over all] / IP00 [Terminal block TE1])

Cooling method Forced wind cooling (fin)

Weight [kg]

Heat radiated at rated output

[W]

4.5 5.2 5.2 5.2 5.2 5.2 6.0 6.7 6.7 5.9 7.3 7.3

213 213 260 266 307 280 359 406 459 365 558 558

Noise Less than 55dB

(Note) The drive unit, within the same capacity, which has a shorter width is indicated with an "S" at the end of the type.

Note that limits apply to continuous operation of the 4545S, 7070S and 9090S types.

2 - 21

2-3-3 Spindle drive unit

Spindle drive unit type

MDS-C1-SP-

MDS-C1-SPH-

MDS-C1-SPX-

MDS-C1-SPHX-

MDS-C1-SPM-

04 075 15 22

2. Specifications

Spindle drive unit MDS-C1-SP Series

37 55 75 110 150S 150 185 220 260 300

Rated output

Output

Input

[kW] 0.1 0.3 0.5 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5

Rated voltage [V]

Rated current [A]

Rated voltage [V]

Rated current [A]

1.5 2.6 4.5 10.0

1 4 7 13

15.0

17

18

20

155AC

26 37

270 to 311DC

30 41

11 15 18.5 22 26

58 76 115

Voltage [V]

Frequency [Hz]

Control power

Current [A]

Rush current [A]

Rush conductivity time

[ms]

Earth leakage current [mA]

Control method

Braking

External analog output

Structure

Cooling method

200/200 to 230AC

50/60

Max. 0.2

MAX. 35

MAX. 6

6 （ MAX. 15 ）

Sine wave PWM control method, current control method

Regenerative braking

0 to +10V, 2ch (speed meter output, load meter output, data for various adjustments)

Self-cooling

Protection type (Protection method: IP20 [over all] / IP00 [Terminal block TE1])

Forced wind cooling

(internal)

Forced wind cooling (fin)

Heat radiated at rated output

[W] 30 40 49 69 79 108 137 181 188 235

Noise Less than 55dB

(Note) The drive unit, within the same capacity, which has a shorter width is indicated with an "S" at the end of the type.

Note that limits apply to continuous operation of the150S types.

2-3-4 Power supply unit

Power supply unit MDS-C1-CV Series

Power supply unit type

MDS-C1-CV- 37 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300 370

Rated output [kW]

Rated voltage [V]

Input Frequency [Hz]

Rated current [A]

Rated voltage [V]

Output

Rated current [A]

Voltage [V]

Frequency [Hz]

Control power

Current [A]

Rush current [A]

Rush conductivity time

[ms]

Main circuit method

Structure

Cooling method

Weight [kg]

Heat radiated at rated output

[W]

Noise

200/200 to 230AC

50/60 Frequency fluctuation within ±3%

270 to 311DC

200/200 to 230AC

50/60

Max.0.2

MAX.35

MAX.6

Self- cooling

Converter with power regeneration circuit

Protection type (Protection method: IP20 [over all] / IP00 [Terminal block TE1])

Forced wind cooling

(internal)

Forced wind cooling (fin)

3.4 4.6 5.8 6.0 8.3 8.4 8.6 8.8

55 65 80 125 155 195 210 260 320 400

Less than 55dB

2 - 22

2. Specifications

2-3-5 AC reactor

An AC reactor must be installed for each power supply unit.

(1) Specifications

AC reactor type B-AL- 7.5K 11K

AC reactor

18.5K 30K 37K

Compatible power supply unit type

Rated capacity

(30-minute rating)

Rated voltage

MDS-C1-CV-

[kW]

[V]

7.5 11 18.5 30 37

200/200 to 230AC

Rated current

Frequency [Hz]

Ambient

[A] temperature

Ambient humidity

50/60 Frequency fluctuation within ±3%

Operation: -10 to 60°C (with no freezing),

Storage/Transportation: -10°C to 60°C (with no freezing)

Operation: 80%RH or less (with no dew condensation),

Storage/Transportation: 80%RH or less (with no dew condensation)

Environ- ment Atmosphere

Altitude

Indoors (no direct sunlight)

With no corrosive gas, inflammable gas, oil mist or dust

Operation/Storage: 1000 meters or less above sea level,

Transportation: 10000 meters or less above sea level

Vibration/impact 9.8m/s2 (1G) / 98m/s2 (10G)

Weight [kg] 3.6 3.0 5.2 6.0 10

2 - 23

2. Specifications

2-3-6 D/A output specifications for servo drive unit

(1) D/A output specifications

Item Explanation

No. of channels

Output magnification setting

2ch

Output cycle

Output precision

888µs (min. value)

8bit

Output voltage range 0V to 2.5V (zero) to +5V

±1/256 to ±128-fold

Output pin

Function

Others

CN9 connector

MO1 = Pin 9

MO2 = Pin 19

GND = Pins 1, 11

Phase current feedback output function

L axis U phase current FB : Pin 7

L axis V phase current FB : Pin 17

M axis U phase current FB : Pin 6

M axis V phase current FB : Pin 16

The D/A output for the 2-axis drive unit

(MDS-C1-V2) is also 2ch. When using the 2-axis drive unit, set -1 for the output data (SV061, 62) of the axis that is not to be measured.

Pin

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

CN9 connector

Name

LG

MUIFB

LUIFB

MO1

17

18

19

20

Pin

11

12

13

14

15

16

Name

LG

MVIFB

LVIFB

MO2

MDS-C1-V2

(2) Output data settings

No. Abbrev.

SV061 DA1NO D/A output channel 1 data No.

SV062 DA2NO D/A channel 2 data No.

No.

-1

0

14

Output data

D/A output not selected ch1: Speed feedback ch2: Current command

2 –

4 –

5 –

7 –

8 Feedrate

9 –

10 Position

11 –

13 –

∆

T)

12 Position

Collision detection estimated torque

15

Collision detection disturbance torque

64 Current command (high-speed)

65 Current feedback (high-speed)

77 Estimated disturbance torque

125 Test output saw tooth wave

126 Test output oblong wave

127 Test output 2.5V (data 0)

Explanation

Input the No. of the data to be output to each D/A output channel.

Original data unit

Output magnification standard setting value

(SV063, SV064)

Output unit for standard setting

Output cycle

For 2-axis drive unit (MDS-C1-V2). Set the parameters to another axis in the drive unit that is not D/A output. r/min

13 (2000rpm)

9 (3000rpm)

1000rpm/V

1500rpm/V

3.5ms

3.5ms

Stall %

Stall %

Stall %

NC display unit/2

(NC disiplay unit/2)/

Communication cycle

131

131

131

328 (Display unit = 1µm)

55 (1µm, 3.5ms)

Stall 100%/V

Stall 100%/V

Stall 100%/V

10µm/0.5V

1000 (mm/min)/0.5V

3.5ms

3.5ms

3.5ms

3.5ms

3.5ms

NC display unit/2

NC display unit/2

328 (Display unit = 1µm)

328 (Display unit = 1µm)

10µm/0.5V

10µm/0.5V

3.5ms

3.5ms

Stall %

Stall %

Internal unit

Internal unit

Internal unit

0V to 5V

0V to 5V

131

131

8 (adjustments required)

8 (adjustments required)

8 (adjustments required)

0 (256)

0 (256)

Stall 100%/V

Stall 100%/V

–

–

–

Cycle: 227.5ms

Cycle 1.7ms

3.5ms

3.5ms

0.8µs

0.8µs

0.8µs

0.8µs

0.8µs

2 - 24

2. Specifications

2-3-7 D/A output specifications for spindle drive unit

(1) D/A output specifications

Item Explanation

No. of channels

Output cycle

Output precision

Output voltage range

Output magnification setting

Output pin

Function

2ch

444µs (min. value)

8bit

0V to +5V (zero) to +10V,

0V to +10V for meter output

±1/256 to ±128-fold

CN9 connector

MO1 = Pin 9

MO2 = Pin 19

GND = Pin 1

Phase current feedback output function

U phase current FB : Pin 7

V phase current FB : Pin 17

3

4

5

6

Pin

1

2

7

8

9

10

(2) Setting the output data

No. Abbrev.

SP253 DA1NO D/A output channel 1 data No.

SP254 DA2NO D/A output channel 2 data No.

CN9 connector

Name

LG

UIFB

MO1

Pin

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

Name

VIFB

MO2

MDS-C1-SP

Explanation

Input the No. of the data to be output to each D/A output channel.

1deg=(64000

÷

65536)

No. Output data Original data unit

10V=max. speed (Zero=0V)

10V=120% load (Zero=0V)

Rated 100%=4096

Rated 100%=4096

Output magnification standard setting value

(SP255, SP256)

0

0

8

8

Output unit for standard setting

Output cycle

Depends on maximum speed 3.5ms

30-minute rating 12%/V

30-minute rating 20%/V

30-minute rating 20%/V

3.5ms

3.5ms

3.5ms

0 ch1: Speedometer output ch2: Load meter output

1 –

5 –

6

Position droop

(lower order 16bit)

7

8

9

Position droop

(higher order 16bit)

Feedrate (F

∆

T)

(lower order 16bit)

Feedrate (F

∆

T)

(higher order 16bit)

10

11

12

Position command

(lower order 16bit)

Position command

(higher order 16bit)

Position feedback

(lower order 16bit)

13

Position feedback

(higher order 16bit)

80 Control input 1

81 Control input 2

82 Control input 3

83 Control input 4

84 Control output 1

85 Control output 2

86 Control output 3

87 Control output 4

1deg=(64000

÷

65536)

0.001deg=64

1deg=(64000

÷

65536)

1deg=(64000

÷

65536)

1deg=(64000

÷

65536)

173

(at 3.5ms communication)

629

(at 3.5ms communication)

19 (18.64)

19 (18.64)

10deg/min/V 0.8µs

500rpm/V 0.8µs

360deg/V

360deg/V

0.8µs

0.8µs

2 - 25

2. Specifications

2-3-8 Explanation of each part

(1) Explanation of each servo drive unit part

<1> <2>

<1>

<3> <4> <3>

<5> <6> <5>

<7> <11>

<8>

<7>

<9>

<12>

<12>

<13>

<2>

<4>

<6>

<11>

<8>

<10>

<13>

<14>

<15>

<14>

<16>

MDS-C1-V1 (1-axis servo drive unit)

<16>

MDS-C1-V2 (2-axis servo drive unit)

The connector layout differs according to the unit being used. Refer to each unit's outline drawing for details.

Each part name

<1>

<2>

<3>

<4>

<5>

<6>

<7>

<8>

<9>

<10>

<11>

<12>

<13>

<14>

<15>

Name

LED

SW1

CN1A

---

---

---

Description

Unit status indication LED

Axis No. setting switch (Left: L axis, Right: M axis)

NC or upward axis communication connector

CN9

CN4

CN2L

CN3L

CN2M

CN3M

TE2

TE3

TE1

---

---

---

---

---

---

CN20 --- Electromagnetic/dynamic brake connector

L+, L–

L11, L21

LU,LV,LW

MU,MV,MW

Analog output connector

Power supply communication connector

Motor side detector connection connector (L axis)

Machine side detector connection connector (L axis)

Motor side detector connection connector (M axis)

Machine side detector connection connector (M axis)

Converter voltage input terminal (DC input)

Control power input terminal (single-phase AC input)

Motor power output terminal (3-phase AC output)

<16> PE Grounding terminal

(Note) The connector names differ for the V1 drive unit. (CN2L/CN3L

→

CN2/CN3, CN2M/CN3M

→

Not mounted)

The MU, MV and MW terminals are not provided. The LU, LV and LW terminals are named U, V and W.

Screw size

Type

1-axis servo drive unit MDS-C1-V1-

01 to 35,

45S

45,70S 70 to 90 110 to 150

2-axis servo drive unit MDS-C1-V2-

0101 to 2020

3510S,

3520S

3510 to

4545S,

7070S

4545 to

7045

7070

Unit width (mm)

<12> L+, L–

<13> L11,L21

60 90 120 150 60 90 120 150

M6 x 14

M4 x 10

<14> LU, LV, LW

<15> MU, MV, MW

M4 x 12

(Note)

M5 x 12 M8 x 14

<16> M4 x 8 M5 x 12 M8 x 14

(Note) The V1-45S UVW terminal screw size is M5, the same as V1-45.

M4 x 12

M4 x 8

2 - 26

2. Specifications

(2) Explanation of each spindle drive unit part

<1>

<3>

<2>

<4>

<5> <6>

<7>

<8>

<10> <9>

<11>

<12>

<13>

MDS-C1-SP

<14>

The connector layout differs according to the unit being used. Refer to each unit's outline drawing for details.

Each part name

<7>

<8>

<9>

<10>

<11>

<12>

<13>

<1>

<2>

<3>

<4>

<5>

<6>

LED

SW1

CN1A

CN1B

CN9

CN4

CN5

CN7

CN8

TE2

TE3

TE1

<14> PE

Name Description

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

Unit status indication LED

Axis No. setting switch

NC or upward axis communication connector

Battery unit/Terminator/Lower axis communication connector

Analog output connector

Power supply communication connector

Internal PLG encoder connection connector

---

---

L+, L–

L11, L21

U, V, W

C axis control encoder connection connector

CNC connection connector

Converter voltage input terminal (DC input)

Control power input terminal (single-phase AC input)

Motor power output terminal (3-phase AC output)

Grounding terminal

Screw size

Type

Unit width (mm)

<11> L+, L–

<12> L11,L21

<13> U, V, W

<14>

04 to 37

M4 x 12

M4 x 8

Spindle drive unit MDS-C1-SP-

55 to 110,150S 150 to 185

M6 x 14

M4 x 10

M5 x 12

M5 x 12

220 to 300

M8 x 14

M8 x 14

2 - 27

2. Specifications

(3) Explanation of each power supply unit part

<1>

<3>

<4>

<7>

<2>

<5>

<6>

<8>

<9>

<10>

<11>

MDS-C1-CV view

The connector layout differs according to the unit being used. Refer to each unit's outline drawing for details.

Each part name

<1>

<2>

<3>

<4>

<5>

<6>

<7>

<8>

<9>

<10>

LED

SW1

---

TE2

TE3

Name Description

---

---

Power supply status indication LED

Power supply setting switch

CHARGE LAMP TE2 output charging/discharging circuit indication LED

L+, L–

L11, L21

Converter voltage output terminal (DC output)

Control power input terminal (single-phase AC input)

TE1 L1, L2, L3 Power input terminal (3-phase AC input)

<11> PE Grounding terminal

(Note) CN23 is located at the bottom of the power supply unit.

Screw size

Type

Unit width (mm)

<7> L+, L–

<8> L11, L21

<9> MC1

<10> L1, L2, L3

<11>

37 to 75

Power supply unit MDS-C1-CV-

110 150 to 185 220 to 370

60 90 120 150

M6 x 16

M4 x 10

M4 x 10

M4 x 8

M4 x 10

M5 x 12

M5 x 8

M8 x 14

M8 x 14

2 - 28

2. Specifications

2-4 Restrictions on servo control

There may be some restrictions on mechanical specifications and electrical specifications when executing servo controls. Always read this section when designing machines and confirm that no problems exist with the specifications.

2-4-1 Restrictions of electronic gear setting value

The servo drive unit has internal electronic gears. The command value from the NC is converted into a detector resolution unit to carry out position control. The electronic gears are single gear ratios calculated from multiple parameters as shown below, and each value (ELG1, ELG2) must be 32767 or less.

If the value overflows, the initial parameter error (alarm 37) or error parameter No. 101 (2301 with

M60S/E60 Series NC) will be output.

If an alarm occurs, the mechanical specifications and electrical specifications (such as resolution of the detector) must be revised so that the electronic gears are within the specifications range.

(1) For semi-closed loop control

Reduced fraction of

ELG1

ELG2

=

PC2

×

RNG1

PC1

×

PIT

×

IUNIT

(reduced fraction)

IUNIT = 2/NC command unit (

µ m)

1

µ m : IUNIT = 2, 0.1

µ m : IUNIT = 20

When the above is calculated, the following conditions must be satisfied.

ELG1

≤

32767

ELG2

≤

32767

(2) For full-closed loop control

Reduced fraction of

PGNX

PGNY

=

PC2

×

RNG2

×

PGN1

PC1

×

RNG1

×

30

(reduced fraction)

When the above is calculated, the following conditions must be satisfied.

PGNX

≤

32767

PGNY

≤

32767

And,

Reduced fraction of

PGNXsp

PGNYsp

=

PC2

×

RNG2

×

PGN1sp

PC1

×

RNG1

×

30

(reduced fraction)

When the above is calculated, the following conditions must be satisfied.

PGNXsp

≤

32767

PGNYsp

≤

32767

POINT

If the electronic gears overflow, the alarm 37 or error parameter No. 101 (2301 with M60S/E60 series NC) will be output.

2 - 29

2. Specifications

(3) Electronic gear related parameters

Explanation

Setting range (Unit)

SV001 PC1 Motor side gear ratio

SV002 PC2

Machine side gear ratio

Set the motor side and machine side gear ratio.

For the rotary axis, set the total deceleration (acceleration) ratio.

Even if the gear ratio is within the setting range, the electronic gears may overflow and cause an alarm.

SV003 PGN1 Position

Set the position loop gain. The standard setting is "33".

The higher the setting value is, the more precisely the command can be followed and the shorter the positioning time gets, however, note that a bigger shock is applied to the machine during acceleration/deceleration.

When using the SHG control, also set SV004 (PGN2) and SV057 (SHGC).

1 to 32767

1 to 32767

1 to 200

(rad/s)

SV018 PIT Ball screw pitch Set the ball screw pitch. Set to "360" for the rotary axis.

1 to 32767

(mm/rev)

In the case of the semi-closed loop control

Set the same value as SV020 (RNG2). (Refer to the explanation of

SV020.)

In the case of the full-closed loop control

Set the number of pulses per ball screw pitch.

Resolution Detector model name

OHE25K-ET, OHA25K-ET

OSE104-ET,OSA104-ET

OSE105-ET,OSA105-ET

100,000 (p/rev)

100,000 (p/rev)

1,000,000 (p/rev)

SV019 setting

100

100

1000

SV019 RNG1

Position detector resolution

RCN723 (Heidenhain)

Relative position detection scale

AT41 (Mitsutoyo)

FME type, FLE type

(Futaba)

MP type (Mitsubishi Heavy

Industries)

AT342 (Mitsutoyo)

AT343 (Mitsutoyo)

LC191M (Heidenhain)

LC491M (Heidenhain)

8,000,000 (p/rev)

Refer to specification manual for each detector

1 (

µ m/p)

Refer to specification manual for each detector

Refer to specification manual for each detector

0.5 (

µ m/p)

0.05 (

µ m/p)

Refer to specification manual for each detector.

Refer to specification manual for each detector.

8000

PIT/Resolution

(

µ m)

The same as

SV018 (PIT)

PIT/Resolution

(

µ m)

PIT/Resolution

(

µ m)

Twice as big as

SV018 (PIT)

20 times as big as

SV018 (PIT)

PIT/Resolution

(

µ m)

PIT/Resolution

(

µ m)

Set the number of pulses per one revolution of the motor side detector.

Detector model name SV020 setting

SV020 RNG2

Speed detector resolution 100

1000

Position loop gain 1

SV049 PGN1sp in spindle synchronous control

Set the position loop gain during the synchronous tapping control.

Set the same value as the value of the spindle parameter, position loop gain in synchronous control.

When performing the SHG control, set this with SV050 (PGN2sp) and

SV058 (SHGCsp).

1 to 9999

(kp/rev)

1 to 9999

(kp/pit)

1 to 9999

(kp/rev)

1 to 200

(rad/s)

2 - 30

2. Specifications

2-4-2 Restrictions on absolute position control

When executing absolute position control, the following conditions must be satisfied. If not satisfied, mechanical specifications and electrical specifications (such as resolution of the detector) must be revised.

When executing incremental control, there are no particular restrictions on servo control. (Confirm with the NC system side specifications.)

(1) For linear axis

The following conditions, Condition 1 and 2, must be satisfied simultaneously.

(Condition 1)

2147

Length of stroke

≤

IUNIT

[m]

IUNIT = 2/NC command unit (

µ m)

1

µ m : IUNIT = 2 ， 0.1

µ m : IUNIT = 20

(Condition 2)

(a) For semi-closed loop control

Length of stroke

≤

2147 x

PC1 x PIT

PC2 x RNG2

[m]

(b) For full-closed loop control

Length of stroke

≤

2147 x

PIT

[m]

RNG1

(Note) Even during the full-closed loop control, when the MP scale is used, restrictions are applied with the condition (a), as well.

(2) For rotary axis

The following conditions must be satisfied.

PC2

≤

2147000

x PC1

RNG2

2 - 31

3. Characteristics

3-1 Servomotor......................................................................................................................................... 3-2

3-1-1 Environmental conditions ............................................................................................................ 3-2

3-1-2 Quakeproof level ......................................................................................................................... 3-2

3-1-3 Shaft characteristics .................................................................................................................... 3-3

3-1-4 Oil/water standards ..................................................................................................................... 3-4

3-1-5 Magnetic brake............................................................................................................................ 3-5

3-1-6 Dynamic brake characteristics .................................................................................................... 3-8

3-2 Spindle motor ................................................................................................................................... 3-10

3-2-1 Environmental conditions .......................................................................................................... 3-10

3-2-2 Shaft characteristics .................................................................................................................. 3-10

3-3 Drive unit characteristics .................................................................................................................. 3-11

3-3-1 Environmental conditions .......................................................................................................... 3-11

3-3-2 Heating value ............................................................................................................................ 3-12

3-3-3 Overload protection characteristics........................................................................................... 3-13

3 - 1

3. Characteristics

3-1 Servomotor

3-1-1 Environmental conditions

Environment Conditions

Ambient temperature

Ambient humidity

Storage temperature

Storage humidity

Atmosphere

Altitude

0°C to +40°C (with no freezing)

80%RH or less (with no dew condensation)

–15°C to +70°C (with no freezing)

90%RH or less (with no dew condensation)

Indoors (Where unit is not subject to direct sunlight)

No corrosive gases, flammable gases, oil mist or dust

Operation/storage: 1000m or less above sea level

Transportation: 10000m or less above sea level

3-1-2 Quakeproof level

Motor type

Acceleration direction

Axis direction (X)

Direction at right angle to axis (Y)

HC52 to HC152, HC53 to HC153

HC103R to HC503R, HA053N to HA33N

HC202, HC352, HC203, HC353

HC452, HC702, HC453, HC703

HA-LF11K2-S8, HA-LF15K2-S8

HC902

The vibration conditions are as shown below.

9.8m/s

2

(1G) or less

19.6m/s

2

(2G) or less

11.7m/s

2

(1.2G) or less

9.8m/s

2

(1G) or less

24.5m/s

2

(2.5G) or less

49.0m/s

2

(5G) or less

29.4m/s

2

(3G) or less

24.5m/s

2

(2.5G) or less

200 Servomotor

100

80

60

50

40

30

20

X

Acceleration

Y

0 1000 2000 3000

Speed (r/min)

3 - 2

3. Characteristics

3-1-3 Shaft characteristics

There is a limit to the load that can be applied on the motor shaft. Make sure that the load applied on the radial direction and thrust direction, when mounted on the machine, is below the tolerable values given below. These loads may affect the motor output torque, so consider them when designing the machine.

Servomotor Tolerable radial load Tolerable thrust load

HA053NS,HA13NS

HA23NS,HA33NS

HA23NT,HA33NT

HC103RT,HC153RT,HC203RT

HC52T,HC102T,HC152T

HC53T,HC103T,HC153T

HC103RS,HC153RS,HC203RS

HC353RS,HC503RS

HC52S,HC102S,HC152S

HC53S,HC103S,HC153S

HC202S,HC352S,HC452S,HC702S

HC203S,HC353S,HC453S,HC703S

HC902S

HA-LF11K2-S8

78.4N

(L=26) 49N

245N (L=30) 147N

392N (L=45) 196N

392N (L=58) 490N

686N (L=45) 196N

980N (L=63) 392N

980N (L=55) 490N

2058N (L=79) 980N

2450N (L=85) 980N

HA-LF15K2-S8 2940N (L=100) 980N

Note: The symbol L in the table refers to the value of L below.

L

Radial load

Thrust load

L : Length from flange installation surface to center of load weight [mm]

CAUTION

1. Use a flexible coupling when connecting with a ball screw, etc., and keep the shaft core deviation to below the tolerable radial load of the shaft.

2. When directly installing the gear on the motor shaft, the radial load increases as the diameter of the gear decreases. This should be carefully considered when designing the machine.

3. When directly installing the pulley on the motor shaft, carefully consider so that the radial load (double the tension) generated from the timing belt tension is less than the values shown in the table above.

4. In machines where thrust loads such as a worm gear are applied, carefully consider providing separate bearings, etc., on the machine side so that loads exceeding the tolerable thrust loads are not applied to the motor.

5. Do not use a rigid coupling as an excessive bending load will be applied on the shaft and could cause the shaft to break.

3 - 3

3. Characteristics

3-1-4 Oil/water standards

(1) The motor protective format (refer to "2-1-1 Specifications list.") uses the IP type, which complies with IE Standard. However, these

Standards are short-term performance specifications. They do not guarantee continuous environmental protection characteristics.

Measures such as covers, etc., must be taken if there is any possibility that oil or water will fall on the motor, and the motor will be constantly wet and permeated by water. Note that the motor’s IP-type is not

Oil or water indicated as corrosion-resistant.

Servomotor

(2) When a gear box is installed on the servomotor, make sure that the oil level height from the center of the shaft is higher than the values given below. Open a breathing hole on the gear box so that the inner pressure does not rise.

Servomotor Oil level (mm)

8

10

HA053N, HA13N

HA23N, HA33N

HC52, HC102, HC152

HC53, HC103, HC153

HC103R, HC153R, HC203R

HC353R, HC503R

HC202, HC352, HC452, HC702

HC203, HC353, HC453, HC703

HC902

HA-LF11K2-S8

HA-LF15K2-S8

20

25

30

34

48

Oil level

Gear

Lip

V-ring

Servomotor

(3) When installing the servomotor horizontally, set the power cable and detector cable to face downward.

When installing vertically or on an inclination, provide a cable trap.

Cable trap

CAUTION

1. The servomotors, including those having IP65 specifications, do not have a completely waterproof (oil-proof) structure. Do not allow oil or water to constantly contact the motor, enter the motor, or accumulate on the motor. Oil can also enter the motor through cutting chip accumulation, so be careful of this also.

2. When the motor is installed facing upwards, take measures on the machine side so that gear oil, etc., does not flow onto the motor shaft.

3. Do not remove the detector from the motor. (The detector installation screw is treated for sealing.)

3 - 4

3. Characteristics

3-1-5 Magnetic brake

CAUTION

1. The axis will not be mechanically held even when the dynamic brakes are used. If the machine could drop when the power fails, use a servomotor with magnetic brakes or provide an external brake mechanism as holding means to prevent dropping.

2. The magnetic brakes are used for holding, and must not be used for normal braking. There may be cases when holding is not possible due to the life or machine structure (when ball screw and servomotor are coupled with a timing belt, etc.). Provide a stop device on the machine side to ensure safety.

3. When operating the brakes, always turn the servo OFF (or ready OFF). When releasing the brakes, always confirm that the servo is ON first. Sequence control considering this condition is possible by using the motor brake control output (CN20) on the servo drive unit.

4. When the vertical axis drop prevention function is used, the drop of the vertical axis during an emergency stop can be suppressed to the minimum.

(1) Motor with magnetic brake

(a) Types

The motor with a magnetic brake is set for each motor. The "B" following the standard motor model stands for the motor with a brake.

(b) Applications

When this type of motor is used for the vertical feed axis in a machining center, etc., slipping and dropping of the spindle head can be prevented even when the hydraulic balancer's hydraulic pressure reaches zero when the power turns OFF. When used with a robot, deviation of the posture when the power is turned OFF can be prevented.

When used for the feed axis of a grinding machine, a double safety measures is formed with the deceleration stop (dynamic brake stop) during emergency stop, and the risks of colliding with the grinding stone and scattering can be prevented.

This motor cannot be used for the purposes other than holding and braking during a power failure (emergency stop). (This cannot be used for normal deceleration, etc.)

(c) Features

1) The magnetic brakes use a DC excitation method, thus:

• The brake mechanism is simple and the reliability is high.

• There is no need to change the brake tap between 50Hz and 60Hz.

• There is no rush current when the excitation occurs, and shock does not occur.

• The brake section is not larger than the motor section.

2) The magnetic brake is built into the motor, and the installation dimensions are the same as the motor without brake.

(d) Considerations to safety

1) When using a timing belt, connecting the motor with magnetic brakes and the load (ball screw, etc.) with a timing belt as shown on the left below could pose a hazard if the belt snaps. Even if the belt's safety coefficient is increased, the belt could snap if the tension is too high or if cutting chips get imbedded. Safety can be maintained by applying the configuration shown on the right below.

Dangerous! Safe!

Top

Motor

Brake

Timing belt

Top

Bottom

Ball screw

Motor

(No brakes)

Timing belt

Bottom

Ball screw

Brake

3 - 5

3. Characteristics

(2) Magnetic brake characteristics

Item

Motor model HC52B

HC102B

HC152B

HC53B

HC103B

HC153B

HC202B

HC352B

HC452B

HC702B

HC902B

HC203B

HC353B

HC453B

HC703B

Type (Note 1)

Rated voltage

Rated current at 20°C (A)

Excitation coil resistance at 20°C (

Ω

)

HC103RB

HC153RB

HC203RB

Spring braking type safety brakes

24VDC

HC353RB

HC503RB

0.80 1.43 0.8 0.96

29 16.8 30 25

Attraction current

Dropping current

Static friction torque

Inertia (Note 2)

Release delay time (Note 3)

Braking delay time (Note 3)

AC OFF

DC OFF

Per braking Tolerable braking work amount

Per hour

Brake play at motor axis

Brake life

(Note 4)

No. of braking operations

Work amount per braking

(A)

(A)

(N·m)

(kg·cm

2

)

(s)

(s)

(s)

(J)

(J)

(degree)

(times)

(J)

Motor model

Item

Type (Note 1)

Rated voltage

Rated current at 20°C (A)

Excitation coil resistance at 20°C (

Ω

)

8.3 43.1 6.8 16.7

0.04 0.1 0.03 0.04

0.12 0.12 0.12 0.12

0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03

400 4,500 400 400

4,000 45,000 4,000 4,000

0.2 to 0.6 0.2 to 0.6 0.2 to 0.6 0.2 to 0.6

20,000 20,000 20,000 20,000

200 1,000 200 200

HA053B

HA13B

HA23NB

HA33NB

HA-LF11K2B-S8 HA-LF15K2B-S8

Spring braking type safety brakes

24VDC

0.5 0.7 1.3 1.9

111 49 19 12.4

Attraction current

Dropping current

Static friction torque

Inertia (Note 2)

Release delay time (Note 3)

Braking delay time (Note 3)

AC OFF

DC OFF

Per braking Tolerable braking work amount

Per hour

(A)

(A)

(N·m)

(kg·cm

2

)

(s)

(s)

(s)

(J)

(J)

0.15 0.2 0.50 0.65

0.06 0.06 0.20 0.25

0.39 1.96 82 160.5

0.02 0.20 11.1 54

0.03 0.05 0.25 0.30

0.20 0.10 0.15 0.20

0.03 0.02 0.04 0.04

Brake play at motor axis

Brake life

(Note 4)

No. of braking operations

Work amount per braking

(degree)

(times)

(J)

0.25 to 2.5 0.2 to 1.5 0.05 to 0.26 0.03 to 0.18

30,000 30,000 20,000 20,000

Notes:

1. There is no manual release mechanism. If handling is required such as during the machine core alignment work, prepare a separate 24VDC power supply, and electrically release a brake.

2. These are the values added to the servomotor without a brake.

3. This is the representative value for the initial attraction gap at 20

°

C.

4. The brake gap will widen through brake lining wear caused by braking. However, the gap cannot be adjusted. Thus, the brake life is considered to be reached when adjustments are required.

5. A leakage flux will be generated at the shaft end of the servomotor with a magnetic brake.

6. When operating in low speed regions, the sound of loose brake lining may be heard. However, this is not a problem in terms of function.

3 - 6

3. Characteristics

(3) Magnetic brake power supply

CAUTION

1. Always install a surge absorber on the brake terminal when using DC OFF.

2. Do not pull out the cannon plug while the brake power is ON. The cannon plug pins could be damaged by sparks.

(a) Brake excitation power supply

1) Prepare a brake excitation power supply that can accurately ensure the attraction current in consideration of the voltage fluctuation and excitation coil temperature.

2) The brake terminal polarity is random. Make sure not to mistake the terminals with other circuits.

(b) Brake excitation circuit

1) AC OFF and 2) DC OFF can be used to turn OFF the brake excitation power supply (to apply the brake).

The braking delay time will be longer, but the excitation circuit will be simple, and the relay cut off capacity can be decreased.

The braking delay time can be shortened, but a surge absorber will be required and the relay cut off capacity will be increased.

<Cautions>

•

Provide sufficient DC cut off capacity at the contact.

•

Always use a surge absorber.

•

When using the cannon plug type, the surge absorber will be further away, so use shielded wires between the motor and surge absorber.

SW

100VAC or

200VAC PS

24VDC

Magnetic brake

100VAC or

200VAC

PS

24VDC

ZD1

ZD2

SW1

VAR1

SW2

VAR2

(a) Example of AC OFF (b) Example of DC OFF

PS

ZD1, ZD2

VAR1, VAR2

: 24VDC stabilized power supply

: Zener diode for power supply protection (1W,24V)

ex. made by Renesas HZ24

: Surge absorber (220V)

Magnetic brake circuits

3 - 7

3. Characteristics

3-1-6 Dynamic brake characteristics

If a servo alarm that cannot control the motor occurs, the dynamic brakes will function to stop the servomotor regardless of the parameter settings.

The dynamic brake uses the motor as a generator, and obtains the deceleration torque by consuming that energy with the dynamic brake resistance. The characteristics of this deceleration torque have a maximum deceleration torque (Tdp) regarding the motor speed as shown in the following drawing. The torque for each motor is shown in the following table.

T dp

Deceleration torque

0 N dp

Motor speed

Deceleration torque characteristics of a dynamic brake

Motor type

HC52

HC102

HC152

HC202

HC352

HC452

HC702

HC902

HC53

HC103

HC153

HC203

HC353

HC453

HC703

HC103R

HC153R

HC203R

HC353R

HC503R

HA053N

HA13N

HA23N

HA33N

HA-LF11K2-S8

HA-LF15K2-S8

Max. deceleration torque of a dynamic brake

Stall torque (N.m) T dp

(N.m) N dp

(r/min)

2.94 4.79 669

5.88 11.19 884

8.82 18.49 1062

13.72 10.56 457

22.50 23.79 716

37.20 47.88 1459

49.00 62.05 1641

58.80 85.36 2109

2.94 5.08 899

5.88 10.72 1045

8.82 18.88 1676

13.72 9.85 728

22.50 21.67 1215

37.20 40.63 2109

49.00 57.91 2531

3.18 3.67 582

4.78 5.44 668

6.37 7.16 973

11.10 10.18 1215

15.90 15.97 1432

1.96 2.30 823

70.60 72.22 1225

91.70 110.19 1494

3 - 8

Motor type

HC52

HC102

HC152

HC202

HC352

HC452

HC702

HC902

HC53

HC103

HC153

HC203

HC353

HC453

HC703

3. Characteristics

(2) Coasting rotation distance during emergency stop

The distance that the motor coasts (angle for rotary axis) when stopping with the dynamic brakes can be approximated with the following expression.

L

MAX

=

F

60

▪ {te + (1 +

J

L

J

M

) ▪ (A ▪ N

2

+ B)}

L

MAX

: Motor coasting distance (angle) [mm, (deg)]

F : Axis feedrate [mm/min, (deg/min)]

J

M

: Motor inertia

[r/m]

[kg.cm

2

]

J

L

: Motor shaft conversion load inertia [kg.cm

2

] te : Brake drive relay delay time

A : Coefficient A (Refer to the table below)

(s) (Normally, 0.03s)

B : Coefficient B (Refer to the table below)

Emergency stop (EMG)

Dynamic brake control output

Actual dynamic brake operation

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Motor speed

Motor speed: N te

Coasting amount

Time

Dynamic brake braking diagram

Coasting amount calculation coefficients table

J

M

(kg·cm

2

)

A B Motor

J

M type

(kg·cm

2

)

6.6 3.59×10

13.6 2.40×10

20.0 1.78×10

42.5 15.36×10

-9

-9

-9

-9

4.83×10

5.63×10

6.02×10

9.64×10

-3

-3

-3

-3

82.0 8.40×10

-9

12.93×10

-3

121.0 3.02×10

-9

19.30×10

-3

160.0 2.74×10

-9

22.16×10

-3

204.0 1.98×10

-9

26.39×10

-3

6.6 2.52×10

13.6 2.12×10

20.0 1.10×10

-9

-9

-9

6.11×10

6.95×10

9.29×10

-3

-3

-3

42.5 10.34×10

-9

16.45×10

-3

82.0 5.43×10

-9

24.08×10

-3

121.0 2.46×10

-9

32.88×10

-3

160.0 1.91×10

-9

36.61×10

-3

HC103R

HC153R

HC203R

HC353R

HC503R

HA053N

HA13N

HA23N

HA33N

HA-LF11K2-S8

HA-LF15K2-S8

A B

1.5 1.23×10

-9

1.24×10

-3

1.9 0.91×10

-9

1.22×10

-3

2.3 0.58×10

-9

1.64×10

-3

8.3 1.17×10

-9

5.19×10

-3

12.0 0.92×10

-9

5.64×10

-3

0.19 0.15×10

0.37 0.16×10

-9

-9

13.01×10

8.18×10

-3

-3

0.98 0.31×10

-9

5.43×10

-3

1.96 0.45×10

-9

3.67×10

-3

105 2.07×10

-9

9.32×10

-3

220 2.33×10

-9

15.62×10

-3

3 - 9

3. Characteristics

3-2 Spindle motor

3-2-1 Environmental conditions

Environment Conditions

Ambient temperature

Ambient humidity

Storage temperature

Storage humidity

Atmosphere

0°C to +40°C (with no freezing)

90%RH or less (with no dew condensation)

–20°C to +65°C (with no freezing)

90%RH or less (with no dew condensation)

Indoors (no direct sunlight); no corrosive gases, inflammable gases, oil mist or dust

Altitude

Operation/storage: 1000m or less above sea level

Transportation: 10000m or less above sea level

3-2-2 Shaft characteristics

There is a limit to the load that can be applied on the motor shaft. Make sure that the load applied on the radial direction, when mounted on the machine, is below the tolerable values given below. These loads may affect the motor output torque, so consider them when designing the machine.

Spindle motor Tolerable radial load

SJ-V3.7-02ZM

SJ-V2.2-01, SJ-V3.7-01

SJ-V7.5-03ZM, SJ-V11-06ZM

SJ-V5.5-01, SJ-V11-08ZM

SJ-PMF01830-00

SJ-V7.5-01, SJ-V11-01

SJ-V22-06ZM, SJ-V30-02ZM, SJ-PMF03530-00

SJ-V11-09, SJ-V15-01, SJ-V15-03, SJ-V18.5-01, SJ-V18.5-03

SJ-V22-01, SJ-V22-05, SJ-V26-01, SJ-30A

SJ-22XW5

SJ-37BP

SJ-22XW8, SJ-45BP

SJ-V55-01

490 N

980 N

1470 N

1960 N

2940 N

3920 N

4900 N

5880 N

Radial load

The load point is at the one-half of the shaft length.

3 - 10

3. Characteristics

3-3 Drive unit characteristics

3-3-1 Environmental conditions

Environment Conditions

Ambient temperature

Ambient humidity

Storage temperature

Storage humidity

Atmosphere

Altitude

Vibration

0°C to +55°C (with no freezing)

90%RH or less (with no dew condensation)

–15°C to +70°C (with no freezing)

90%RH or less (with no dew condensation)

Indoors (no direct sunlight); no corrosive gases, inflammable gases, oil mist or dust

Operation/storage: 1000m or less above sea level

Transportation: 10000m or less above sea level

Operation/storage: 4.9m/s

2

(0.5G) or less

Transportation: 49m/s

2

(5G) or less

(Note) When installing the machine at 1,000m or more above sea level, the heat dissipation characteristics will drop as the altitude increases. The upper limit of the ambient temperature drops 1°C with every 100m increase in altitude. (The ambient temperature at an altitude of 2,000m is between 0 and 45°C.)

3 - 11

3. Characteristics

3-3-2 Heating value

Each heating value is calculated with the following values.

The values for the servo drive unit apply at the stall output. The values for the spindle drive unit apply for the continuous rated output. The values for the power supply unit include the AC reactor's heating value.

Servo drive unit Spindle drive unit Power supply unit

Type

MDS-C1-

Heating value

[W]

Inside panel

Outside panel

Type

MDS-C1-

Heating value

[W]

Inside panel

Outside panel

Type

MDS-C1-

Heating value

[W]

Inside panel

Outside panel

Type

MDS-C1-

Heating value

[W]

Inside panel

Outside panel

V1- 90

V1-110

V1-150

V1- 01

V1- 03

V1- 05

V1- 10

V1- 20

V1- 35

V1- 45S

V1- 45

V1- 70S

V1- 70

21 0 V2-0101

27 0 V2-0301

37 0 V2-0303

53 0 V2-0501

25 66 V2-0503

30 102 V2-0505

34 124 V2-1005

37 148 V2-1010

38 151 V2-2010

50 234 V2-2020

56 275 V2-3510S 44

74 392 V2-3510 42

96 545 V2-3520S 48

V2-3520 45

51 V2-3535

V2-4520

V2-4535

V2-4545S

V2-4545

V2-7035

V2-7045

V2-7070S

V2-7070

52

57

55

64

70

77

65

90

52

62

78

96

37

41

38

41

43

46

0

0

0

0

117

137

0

0

0

0

146

148

165

168

209

214

249

225

295

336

382

300

468

51

76

102

140

140

187

0

0

0

42

280

301

403

522

28

31

35

41

48

48

30

40

49

26

62

65

80

98

SP-185

SP-220

SP-260

SP-300

SP- 04

SP- 075

SP- 15

SP- 22

SP- 37

SP- 55

SP- 75

SP-110

SP-150S

SP-150

CV- 37

CV- 55

CV- 75

CV-110

CV-150

CV-185

CV-220

CV-260

CV-300

CV-370

V2-9090S 65 300

(Note 1) The values for the spindle drive unit are the heating value at the continuous rated output, and the values for the servo drive unit are the heating values at the stall output when operating in the high-gain mode. The heating value when operating the servo drive unit in the standard mode (MDS-B compatible mode) is lower than the MDS-B series heating value. However, with the new design, the standard operation mode will not presumably be used, so the data has been eliminated.

(Note 2) The total heating value for the power supply includes the heating value for the AC reactor.

(Note 3) The total heating value for the unit is the total sum of the heating values for the above corresponding units which are mounted in the actual machine.

Example) When the CV-185, SP-110, V1-35, V2-2020 units are mounted

Unit total heating value (W) =195+181+132+178=686 (W)

(Note 4) When designing the panel for sealed mounting, take the actual load rate into consideration, and calculate the heating value inside the servo drive unit panel with the following expression:

29

33

35

40

46

54

21

23

25

26

126

162

175

220

274

346

34

42

55

99

Heating value inside servo drive unit panel (considering load rate) = Heating value in panel obtained from above table × 0.5

(Note that this excludes the power supply unit and spindle drive unit.)

If the load rate is clearly larger than 0.5, substitute that load rate for (× 0.5) in the above expression.

Example) When the V1-35 servo drive unit is mounted

Heating value in panel (at rated output) = 30(W)

Thus, the heating value in the panel (considering the load rate) is 30 × 0.5 = 15 (W)

3 - 12

3. Characteristics

3-3-3 Overload protection characteristics

The servo drive unit has an electronic thermal relay to protect the servomotor and servo drive unit from overloads. The operation characteristics of the electronic thermal relay are shown below when standard parameters (SV021=60, SV022=150) are set.

If overload operation over the electronic thermal relay protection curve shown below is carried out, overload 1 (alarm 50) will occur. If the maximum current is commanded at 95% or higher continuously for one second or more due to a machine collision, etc., overload 2 (alarm 51) will occur.

10000.00

1000.00

100.00

When rotating

When stopped

10.00

1.00

0.10

0 100 200 300

Motor current (stall current %)

400 500

10000.00

1000.00

When rotating

When stopped

100.00

10.00

1.00

0.10

0 100 400 200 300

Motor current (stall current %)

500

3 - 13

3. Characteristics

10000.00

1000.00

100.00

10.00

1.00

0.10

0

When rotating

When stopped

10000.00

1000.00

100.00

10.00

1.00

0.10

0

10000.00

1000.00

100.00

10.00

1.00

0.10

0

100 200 300

Motor current (stall current %)

400 500

When rotating

When stopped

100 200 300

Motor current (stall current %)

400 500

When rotating

When stopped

100 200 300

Motor current (stall current %)

3 - 14

400 500

3. Characteristics

10000.00

1000.00

100.00

10.00

1.00

0.10

0

10000.00

1000.00

100.00

10.00

1.00

0.10

0

When rotating

When stopped

10000.00

1000.00

100.00

10.00

1.00

0.10

0

100 200 300

Motor current (stall current %)

400 500

When rotating

When stopped

100 200 300

Motor current (stall current %)

400 500

When rotating

When stopped

100 200 300

Motor current (stall current %)

400

3 - 15

500

(10) Motor HC103

10000.00

1000.00

100.00

10.00

1.00

0.10

0

10000.00

1000.00

100.00

10.00

1.00

0.10

0

(11) Motor HC153

10000.00

1000.00

100.00

10.00

1.00

0.10

0

3. Characteristics

When rotating

When stopped

100 200 300

Motor current (stall current %)

400 500

When rotating

When stopped

100 200 300

Motor current (stall current %)

400 500

When rotating

When stopped

100 200 300

Motor current (stall current %)

400

3 - 16

500

(12) Motor HC203

10000.00

1000.00

100.00

10.00

1.00

0.10

0

(13) Motor HC353

10000.00

1000.00

100.00

10.00

1.00

0.10

0

(14) Motor HC453

10000.00

1000.00

100.00

10.00

1.00

0.10

0

3. Characteristics

100 200 300

Motor current (stall current %)

400 500

When rotating

When stopped

100 200 300

Motor current (stall current %)

400

When rotating

When stopped

When rotating

When stopped

500

100 200 300

Motor current (stall current %)

400

3 - 17

500

(15) Motor HC703

10000.00

1000.00

100.00

10.00

1.00

0.10

0

(16) Motor HC103R

10000.00

1000.00

100.00

10.00

1.00

0.10

0

(17) Motor HC153R

10000.00

1000.00

100.00

10.00

1.00

0.10

0

3. Characteristics

100 200 300

Motor current (stall current %)

400 500

When rotating

When stopped

100 200 300

Motor current (stall current %)

400

When rotating

When stopped

When rotating

When stopped

500

100 200 300

Motor current (stall current %)

400 500

3 - 18

(18) Motor HC203R

10000.00

1000.00

100.00

10.00

1.00

0.10

0

(19) Motor HC353R

10000.00

1000.00

100.00

10.00

1.00

0.10

0

(20) Motor HC503R

10000.00

1000.00

100.00

10.00

1.00

0.10

0

3. Characteristics

100 200 300

Motor current (stall current %)

400 500

When rotating

When stopped

100 200 300

Motor current (stall current %)

400

When rotating

When stopped

When rotating

When stopped

500

100 200 300

Motor current (stall current %)

400 500

3 - 19

(21) Motor HA053N

10000.00

1000.00

100.00

10.00

1.00

0.10

0

(22) Motor HA13N

10000.00

1000.00

100.00

10.00

1.00

0.10

0

(23) Motor HA23N

10000.00

1000.00

100.00

10.00

1.00

0.10

0

3. Characteristics

100 200 300

Motor current (stall current %)

400

When rotating

When stopped

When rotating

When stopped

500

100 200 300

Motor current (stall current %)

400 500

When rotating

When stopped

100 200 300

Motor current (stall current %)

400

3 - 20

500

(24) Motor HA33N

10000.00

1000.00

100.00

10.00

1.00

0.10

0

(25) Motor HA-LF11K2-S8

10000.00

1000.00

100.00

10.00

1.00

0.10

0

(26) Motor HA-LF15K2-S8

10000.00

1000.00

100.00

10.00

1.00

0.10

0

3. Characteristics

100 200 300

Motor current (stall current %)

400

100 200 300

Motor current (stall current %)

400

100 200 300

Motor current (stall current %)

400

When rotating

When stopped

When rotating

When stopped

When rotating

When stopped

500

500

500

3 - 21

4. Dedicated Options

4-1 Servo options ..................................................................................................................................... 4-2

4-1-1 Battery and terminator option (mandatory selection) .................................................................. 4-3

4-1-2 Dynamic brake unit (MDS-B-DBU) (mandatory selection for large capacity) ............................. 4-8

4-1-3 Ball screw side detector ............................................................................................................ 4-10

4-1-4 Machine side detector ............................................................................................................... 4-11

4-1-5 Detector conversion unit (MDS-B-HR) ...................................................................................... 4-13

4-1-6 Signal divider unit (MDS-B-SD)................................................................................................. 4-15

4-2 Spindle option................................................................................................................................... 4-17

4-2-1 Magnetic sensor ........................................................................................................................ 4-19

4-2-2 Spindle side detector (OSE-1024-3-15-68, OSE-1024-3-15-68-8) ........................................... 4-21

4-2-3 C-axis detector (OSE90K)......................................................................................................... 4-23

4-2-4 C-axis detector (MBE90K)......................................................................................................... 4-25

4-2-5 C-axis detector (MHE90K) ........................................................................................................ 4-26

4-2-6 Spindle side PLG (MXE128/180/256/512) ................................................................................ 4-27

4-2-7 Detector conversion unit (MDS-B-PJEX) .................................................................................. 4-31

4-3 Cables and connectors .................................................................................................................... 4-33

4-3-1 Cable connection diagram ........................................................................................................ 4-33

4-3-2 List of cables and connectors.................................................................................................... 4-34

4 - 1

4. Dedicated Options

4-1 Servo options

The option units are required depending on the servo system configuration. Check the option units to be required referring the following items.

(1) System configuration in the full closed loop control

Check the servo options required to execute the full closed loop control based on the following table.

System configuration

OSE104-ET, OSE105-ET

OSA104-ET, OSA105-ET

Relative position linear scale

(Oblong wave signal output ）

Motor side detector specifications

Incremental

Incremental

Incremental

Need for detector conversion unit

(MDS-B-HR)

×

×

×

Need for battery unit

(MDS-A-BT)

×

{

×

Servo system specifications

Incremental

Absolute position

Incremental

Relative position linear scale

(SIN wave signal output)

Incremental { ×

Incremental

AT41 (Mitsutoyo)

FME, FML type (Futaba corporation)

POINT

Incremental

Incremental

MP scale (Mitsubishi Heavy Industries) Absolute position

AT342, AT343 (Mitsutoyo)

LC191M, LC491M (HEIDENHAIN)

RCN223, RCN723 (HEIDENHAIN)

Incremental

Incremental

Incremental

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

{

×

×

×

Absolute position

Absolute position

Absolute position

Absolute position

Absolute position

Absolute position

The absolute position system cannot be established in combination with the relative position (incremental) machine side detector and absolute position motor side detector.

(2) System configuration in the synchronous control

(a) For position command synchronous control

The synchronous control is all executed in the NC, and the each servo is controlled as an independent axis. Therefore, preparing special options for the synchronous control is not required on the servo side.

(b) For speed/current command synchronous control

The signal divider unit (MDS-B-SD) may be required because two axes share the FB signal of the motor detector or linear scale. Check whether the signal divider unit is required based on the following table.

System configuration

For control with MDS-C1-V2

(small capacity)

Need for signal divider unit

(MDS-B-SD)

Need for detector conversion unit

(MDS-B-HR)

For control with MDS-C1-V1 × 2 units

(large capacity)

Need for signal divider unit

(MDS-B-SD)

Need for detector conversion unit

(MDS-B-HR)

Semi closed control

(only for motor side detector)

Relative position linear scale

(Oblong wave signal output)

Relative position linear scale

(SIN wave signal output)

AT41 (Mitsutoyo)

FME, FML type (Futaba corporation)

MP scale (Mitsubishi Heavy Industries)

AT342, AT343 (Mitsutoyo)

POINT

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

{

×

×

×

×

×

{

{

×

{

{

{

{

{

×

×

{

×

×

×

×

×

LC191M, LC491M (HEIDENHAIN)

When executing the synchronous control, use the servomotors of which the type and detector specifications are same.

4 - 2

4. Dedicated Options

4-1-1 Battery and terminator option (mandatory selection)

A battery unit or terminator must be connected on each NC communication bus line. Select the unit according to the system specifications.

Always connect the terminator to the last unit connected to the NC communication bus line. If there are many axes and two NC communication bus line systems are in use, connect a terminator per each system.

(a) Outline dimension drawing

•

A-TM

20.9

29.7

[Unit: mm]

4 - 3

4. Dedicated Options

This battery option may be required to establish absolute position system. Select a battery option from the table below depending on the servo system.

Type MDS-A-BT□□ FCU6-BTBOX-36

Unit and battery integration type

Class9 (excluding MDS-A-BT-2)

Unit and battery integration type

Not applicable

Installation type

Hazard class

Number of connectable axes

Battery change

Appearance

2 to 8 axes

Not possible

Up to 6 axes

Possible

(3) (4)

4 - 4

4. Dedicated Options

(a) Battery unit (MDS-A-BT□ )

< Specifications >

Battery option type

Battery unit

MDS-A-BT-2 MDS-A-BT-4 MDS-A-BT-6 MDS-A-BT-8

Lithium battery series ER6V

Nominal voltage

Nominal capacity 4000mAh 8000mAh

3.6V

12000mAh 16000mAh

Battery Hazard class safety Battery shape

Number of batteries used

Lithium alloy content

ER6V x 2 ER6V x 4

Class 9

Set battery

ER6V x 6 ER6V x 8

1.3g 2.6g 3.9g 5.2g

Mercury content

Number of connectable axes

Battery continuous backup time

Battery useful life (From date of unit manufacture)

Data save time in battery replacement

Back up time from battery warning to alarm occurrence

(Note)

Up to 2 axes

1g or less

Up to 4 axes Up to 6 axes

Approx. 30000 hours

7 years

Approx. 100 hours

Up to 8 axes

HF/HP series: approx. 20 hours at time of delivery, approx. 10 hours after 5 years

Weight 600g

(Note) This time is a guideline, so does not guarantee the back up time. Replace the battery with a new battery as soon as a battery warning occurs.

< Outline dimension drawings >

•

MDS-A-BT-2/-4/-6/-8

15 Use an M5 screw for the ø6 mounting hole

17

6

30

R3

4 - 5

100

[Unit: mm]

4. Dedicated Options

(b) Battery unit ( FCU6-BTBOX-36 )

< Specifications >

Battery option type

Battery unit

FCU6-BTBOX-36 （ Note1 ）

Lithium battery series 2CR5

Nominal voltage

Nominal capacity

Battery Hazard class safety Battery shape

Number of batteries used

Lithium alloy content

Mercury content

Number of connectable axes

Battery continuous backup time

Battery useful life

(From date of unit manufacture)

Data save time in battery replacement

Back up time from battery warning to alarm occurrence

(Note3)

6.0V (Lithium battery), 3.6V (Output)

2600mAh

-

Single battery

2CR5 ×

1.96g

2

1g or less

Up to 6 axes

Approx. 5000 hours (when 6 axes are connected)

5 years

Note2

HF/HP series: approx. 20 hours at time of delivery, approx. 10 hours after 5 years

Approx. 30 hours (when 6 axes are connected)

Weight 200g

(Note1) A lithium battery in FCU6-BTBOX-36 is commercially available. The battery for replacement has to be prepared by the user.

(Note2) Use new batteries (nominal capacity 1300mAh or more) within five years from the date of manufacture. The batteries should be replaced once a year.

(Note3) This time is a guideline, so does not guarantee the back up time. Replace the battery with a new battery as soon as a battery warning occurs.

< Outline dimension drawings >

•

FCU6-BTBOX-36

75

4 12.5

57.5

Plus (+) terminal

Minus (-) terminal

2CR5

2CR5

50 Packing area

Square hole

Panel cut drawing

2-M4 screw

[Unit: mm]

4 - 6

4. Dedicated Options

CAUTION

1. On January 1, 2003, new United Nations requirements, "United Nations

Dangerous Goods Regulations Article 12", became effective regarding the transportation of lithium batteries. The lithium batteries are classified as hazardous materials (Class 9) depending on the unit. (Refer to Appendix 4.)

2. The lithium battery must be transported according to the rules set forth by the

International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO), International Air

Transportation Association (IATA), International Maritime Organization

(IMO), and United States Department of Transportation (DOT), etc. The packaging methods, correct transportation methods, and special regulations are specified according to the quantity of lithium alloys. The battery unit exported from Mitsubishi is packaged in a container (UN approved part) satisfying the standards set forth in this UN Advisory.

3. To protect the absolute value, do not shut off the servo drive unit control power supply if the battery voltage becomes low (warning 9F).

4. Contact the Service Center when replacing the MDS-A-BT Series and cell battery.

5. Replace the FCU6-BTBOX-36 battery with a new battery (2CR5) within the recommended service period. This battery is commercially available for use in cameras, etc.

6. The battery life (backup time) is greatly affected by the working ambient temperature. The above data is the theoretical value for when the battery is used 8 hours a day/240 days a year at an ambient temperature of 25°C.

Generally, if the ambient temperature increases, the backup time and useful life will both decrease.

4 - 7

4. Dedicated Options

4-1-2 Dynamic brake unit (MDS-B-DBU) (mandatory selection for large capacity)

The MDS-C1-V1-110/150 units do not have dynamic brakes built in, so install an external dynamic brake unit.

(1) Specifications

Type

MDS-B-DBU-150

Coil specifications

24VDC 160mA

Compatible drive unit

MDS-C1-V1-110/150

Weight (kg)

2

(2) Outline dimension drawings

•

MDS-B-DBU-150

20

FG a b 13

20

5

140

5

U V W

20

200

[Unit: mm]

4 - 8

4. Dedicated Options

(3) Connecting with the servo drive unit

Brake connector

(CN20)

Pin

1

2

3

Name

24VDC

DBU

MBR

Servomotor

CNU20S(AWG14)

1

2

3

Twist wire

External power supply

24VDC GND

To a motor brake

U V W a

Internal circuit diagram b

Dynamic brake unit

(MDS-B-DBU)

Control terminal block (M3)

Terminal

4

5

6

1

2

3

Name

NC a b

13

14

Power terminal block (M3)

Terminal

1

2

3

Name

U

V

W

V

W

U

R (0.2

Ω

)

14

13 b

MC SK a

CAUTION

Correctly wire the dynamic brake unit to the servo drive unit.

Do not use for applications other than emergencies (normal braking, etc.). The internal resistor could heat up, and lead to fires or faults.

POINT

When you use a motor with a brake, please wire (between 1pin and 3pin) for the

CN20 connector.

4 - 9

4. Dedicated Options

4-1-3 Ball screw side detector

(1) Specifications

Type

Relative position detector

Absolute position detector

Type Maximum feedrate Detector output Detector resolution

OSE104-ET 3000r/min Serial 100,000p/rev

OSE105-ET 3000r/min Serial

OSA104-ET 3000r/min Serial 100,000p/rev

OSA105-ET 3000r/min Serial

(2) Outline dimension drawings

•

OSA … -ET/OSE … -ET Series

45°

4-ø4.8

… 85

60

29

7 2

30

14

A 8.72

ø80

A

ø100

Cross section

A-A

Key position

38

MS3102A22-14 (19 pins)

[Unit: mm]

4 - 10

4. Dedicated Options

4-1-4 Machine side detector

All machine side detectors are optional parts, and must be prepared by the user.

(1) Relative position detector

Use a relative position detector for the machine side that satisfies the following "(a)" and "(b)" according to the output signal specifications.

(a) Oblong wave output

Select a relative position detector with an A/B phase difference and Z-phase width at the maximum feedrate that satisfies the following conditions.

Use an A, B, Z-phase signal type with differential output (RS-422 standard product) for the output signal.

Output circuit Phase difference

A, B, Z-phase

A, B, Z-phase

A-phase

B-phase

0.1

µ s or more

Z-phase

0.1

µ s or more

Integer mm

For a scale having multiple Z phases, select the neighboring Z phases whose distance is an integral mm.

(b) Analog wave output (using MDS-B-HR)

When using a relative position detector that the signal is the analog (SIN wave) output, the detector output signal is converted in the detector conversion unit (MDS-B-HR), and then the signal is transmitted to the drive unit in the serial communication. Select a relative position detector with A/B phase SIN wave signal that satisfies the following conditions.

(Output signal)

•

2.5V reference 1Vp-p analog A-phase, B-phase, Z-phase differential output

•

Output signal frequency max 200kHz

Voltage [V]

A phase B phase

3

2.5

2

Time

A/B phase output signal waveform during forward run

4 - 11

4. Dedicated Options

(2) Absolute position detector

The applicable absolute position detectors are as follows.

AT41

FME, FML

CAUTION

Applicable absolute position detectors for the machine side

Mitsutoyo 50m/min

FUTABA

5.1 to 120m/min

Differs according to the resolution.

A, B-phase

Z-phase

Serial data

A, B-phase

Serial data

A, B-phase

Detector resolution

1

µ m/p after multiplying by four

Zero point indexing

10mm spacing

Absolute position 1

µ m/p

0.1 to 10

µ m/p after multiplying by four

1

µ m/p after multiplying by four

Mitsubishi Heavy

Industries

30m/min

Z-phase

Zero point indexing

2mm spacing

MP scale

∗

Motor side detector also needs an absolute position encoder.

AT342

AT343

LC191M

LC491M

RCN723 for rotating axis

RCN223 for rotating axis

0.5

µ m/p

Mitsutoyo 120m/min Serial 0.05

µ m/p

0.1

µ m/p

HEIDENHAIN 120m/min Serial

µ m/p/0.1

µ m/p

HEIDENHAIN 300r/min Serial 8,000,000p/rev

HEIDENHAIN 1500r/min Serial 8,000,000p/rev

Confirm each manufacturer specifications before using the machine side detector.

4 - 12

4. Dedicated Options

4-1-5 Detector conversion unit (MDS-B-HR)

This unit superimposes the scale analog output raw waves, and generates high resolution position data.

Increasing the detector resolution is effective for the servo high-gain. MDS-B-HR-12(P) is used for the synchronous control system that 1-scale 2-drive operation is possible.

MDS-B-HR- (1) (2)

(2) Protective structure

Symbol Protective structure

None

P

IP65

IP67

(1) Signal division function class

Symbol Scale output voltage class

11

12

Output number 1

Output number 2 (with division)

(2) Specifications

Type MDS-B-HR- 11 12 11P 12P

Compatible scale (example)

Signal 2-division function

Analog signal input specifications

Compatible frequency

Scale resolution

Input/output communication style

Working ambient temperature

Working ambient humidity

Atmosphere

Tolerable vibration

Tolerable impact

Tolerable power voltage

Maximum heating value

Weight

Protective structure

×

LS186 / LIDA181 / LIF181 (HEIDENHAIN)

{ × {

A-phase, B-phase, Z-phase (2.5V reference Amplitude 1V

P-P

)

Analog raw waveform max. 200kHz

Analog raw waveform/512 division

High-speed serial communication I/F, RS485 or equivalent

0 to 55°C

90%RH or less (with no dew condensation)

No toxic gases

98.0 m/s

2

(10G)

294.0 m/s

2

(30G)

5VDC

±

5%

2W

0.5kg or less

IP65 IP67

4 - 13

4. Dedicated Options

(3) Unit outline dimension drawings

•

MDS-B-HR

6.5

152 6.5

46

RM15WTR-10S

4-

Ø

5 hole RM15WTR-12S

RM15WTR-8Px2

165

Unit [mm]

(3) Explanation of connectors

Connector name

CON1

CON2

CON3

CON4

Application Remarks

For connection with servo drive unit (2nd system) Not provided for 1-part system specifications

For connection with servo drive unit

For connection with scale

For connection with pole detection unit

(MDS-B-MD)

*Used for linear servo system

Connector pin layout

CON1 CON4

Pin No. Function Pin No. Function Pin No.

Function Pin No. Function

4

5

6

7

1

2

3

8

RQ+ signal

RQ- signal

SD+ signal

SD- signal

1

2

3

4

RQ+ signal

RQ- signal

SD+ signal

SD- signal

P5

P5

GND

GND

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

A+ phase signal

A- phase signal

B+ phase signal

B- phase signal

Z+ phase signal

Z- phase signal

RQ+ signal

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

A phase signal

REF signal

B phase signal

REF signal

P24

MOH signal

P5

RQ- signal

SD+ signal

8

9

SD- signal 10

P5

GND

P5

TH signal

GND

Connector Type

CON1

CON2

CON3

CON4

RM15WTR- 8P

(Hirose Electric)

RM15WTR-12S

(Hirose Electric)

RM15WTR-10S

(Hirose Electric)

2

3

1

8

4

CON1

CON2

7

5

6

8 9 1

7

6

5

11

12

10

4

2

3

CON3

7

8

9

6

5

1

2

10

4

3

CON4

4 - 14

4. Dedicated Options

4-1-6 Signal divider unit (MDS-B-SD)

This unit has a function to divide the position and speed signals fed back from the high-speed serial detector and high-speed serial linear scale. This unit is used to carry out synchronized control of the motor with two MDS-C1-V1 drive units.

(1) Specifications

Type MDS-B-SD

Compatible servo drive unit

Input/output communication style

Working ambient temperature

Working ambient humidity

Atmosphere

Tolerable vibration

Tolerable impact

Tolerable power voltage

Maximum heating value

Weight

Protective structure

MDS-C1-V1…

High-speed serial communication I/F, RS485 or equivalent

0 to 55°C

90%RH or less (with no dew condensation)

No toxic gases

98.0 m/s2 (10G)

294.0 m/s2 (30G)

5VDC

±

10%

4W

0.5kg or less

Protective type (protection method: IP20)

POINT

1. The MDS-B-SD unit divides the feed back signals from a motor side detector

(CN2 system) and from a machine side detector (CN3 system).

2. Always make sure that the CN2 system's CN2A and the CN3 system's CN3A are always connected to the same servo drive unit. The CN2 system's CN2A and the CN3 system's CN3A cannot be connected to different servo drive units.

3. Always provide one MDS-B-SD unit for one current/speed command synchronous control operation.

4 - 15

(2) Outline dimension drawings

•

MDS-B-SD

4. Dedicated Options

Detector

CN2

Master axis

CN2A

Slave axis

CN2B

40

CN3

CN3A

CN3B

135

70

Wiring allowance

6

2-M5-0.8 screw

34 6

Mounting hole Unit: [mm]

4 - 16

4. Dedicated Options

4-2 Spindle option

Select the spindle option to be required for the spindle control based on the following table.

(a) No-variable speed control

(When spindle and motor are directly coupled or coupled with a 1:1 gear ratio)

Spindle control item

Control specifications

Speed control

Orientation control

Normal cutting control

Constant surface speed control (lathe)

Thread cutting (lathe)

1-point orientation control

Multi-point orientation control

Orientation indexing

Standard synchronous tap Synchronous tap control

Spindle synchronous control

C-axis control

Synchronous tap after zero point return

Without phase alignment function

With phase alignment function

Simple C-axis control

(without zero point return)

Simple C-axis control

(with zero point return)

Standard C-axis control

(Note) { : Control possible

×

: Control not possible

×

×

×

×

{

Without spindle option

Motor side

PLG

{

Motor side PLG with

Z-phase

{

{ {

{

{

{

{

{

×

{

×

{

×

×

{

{

{

{

{

×

Magnetic sensor

With spindle option

Spindle side

PLG

(MDS-C1-SPX)

Spindle side detector

This normally is not used for no-variable speed control.

C-axis detector

{

{

{

Not used

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

4 - 17

4. Dedicated Options

(b) Variable speed control

(When using V-belt, or when spindle and motor are connected with a gear ratio other than 1:1)

Without spindle option

With spindle option

Spindle control item

Control specifications

Motor side

PLG

Motor side PLG with

Z-phase

{

Magnetic sensor

Spindle side

PLG

(MDS-C1-SPX)

Spindle side detector

C-axis detector

Speed control Normal cutting control

Constant surface speed control (lathe)

Thread cutting (lathe)

{

U U

{

U

{

{

{

{

{

{

Orientation control

Synchronous tap control

Spindle synchronous control

C-axis control

1-point orientation control

Multi-point orientation control

Orientation indexing

Standard synchronous tap

Synchronous tap after zero point return

Without phase alignment function

With phase alignment function

Simple C-axis control

(without zero point return)

Simple C-axis control

(with zero point return)

Standard C-axis control

(Note) { : Control possible

×

×

×

×

S

×

U

×

Simple C-axis control is not possible when using variable speed control.

×

×

×

×

×

S

×

U

×

×

×

{

×

×

S

S

U

×

×

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

×

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

×

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

U

×

: Control not possible

U : Control not possible when using V-belt

S

: Control not possible when varying the speed with a method other than the gears (when using V-belt or timing belt).

4 - 18

4. Dedicated Options

4-2-1 Magnetic sensor

Prepare the magnetic sensor parts with the following types. When purchasing independently, always prepare with the required configuration part types.

(1) Type

Tolerable

Type Type

Independent type speed [r/min] Drive unit Sensor Magnet

High-speed standard MAGSENSOR BKO-C1730H01.2.6

High-speed small MAGSENSOR BKO-C1730H01.2.9

0 to 12000

0 to 12000

MAGSENSOR BKO-C1730H01.2.41

0 to 25000

MAGSENSOR BKO-C1730H01.2.42

0 to 25000

High-speed ring

MAGSENSOR BKO-C1730H01.2.43

0 to 30000

MAGSENSOR BKO-C1730H01.2.44

0 to 30000

H01

H01

H01

H01

H01

H01

H01

H02

H02

H02

H02

H02

H02

H02

H03

H06

H09

H41

H42

H43

H44

(Note) When preparing with independent types, replace the section following the H in the prepared type with the independent type.

Example: When preparing only the standard magnetic sensor's sensor section, the type will be MAGSENSOR BKO-C1810H02.

(2) Outline dimension drawing: z Drive unit H01

2-ø5.5 hole 25

Connector (sensor side)

For BKO-C1810H01, R04-R08F is used.

For BKO-C1730H01, TRC116-21A10-7F is used.

Connector (controller cable side)

Unit side (TRC116-21A10-7M)

Cable side (TRC116-12A100-7F10.5)

[Unit: mm] z Sensor H02

Reference notch

32

14

1

25 5.5

Cable length 500

+100

-0

18

Connector

For BKO-C1810H02, R04-R-8M is used.

For BKO-C1730H02, TRC116-12A10-7M is used.

[Unit: mm]

4 - 19

z Magnet

Part

No.

Tolerable speed

H03

0 to 6000 r/min

H06

0 to 12000 r/min

4. Dedicated Options

Reference hole

Outline drawings

40

50

4-ø4.3 hole

2.5

7.5

Weight: 40 ± 1.5g

Installation screw: M4

H09

0 to 12000 r/min

H41

0 to 25000 r/min

S N

50

40

30

2-ø4.3 hole

Weight: 14.8 ± 0.7g

Installation screw: M4

N.P

Case E

D

Cover

Spun ring

RINGFEDER

RFN8006 J

×

K

4-F screw

Stainless case

SUS-303

N

S

45°

H42

H43

H44

0 to 25000 r/min

0 to 30000 r/min

0 to 30000 r/min

Sensor head Stop position scale

2-øG

±

0.15øH on circumference

Reference notch

∗

Polarity (N,S) is indicated on the side wall of cover.

Detection head should be installed so that the reference notch of sensor head comes on the case side.

[Unit: mm]

Magnet

Dimensions

Model A

BKO-C1730H41 105

BKO-C1730H42 94

BKO-C1730H43 78

BKO-C1730H44 66

Reference notch

Gap

G hole h6

B C D E

70H7 +0.030

–0

60H7 +0.030

–0

50H7 +0.025

–0

40H7 +0.025

–0

Spindle damping screw

Installation of magnet

Spindle

Case

Cover

F J

×

X L

79 25 17 M5

×

0.8

5 79 60

×

68 1

66 23 15 M5

×

0.8

5 66 50

×

57 1

54 20 13 M4

×

0.7

5 54 40

×

45 1

Weight

(g)

90 28 19 M6

×

1.0

5 90 70

×

79 1 1024

±

4

768

±

4

478

±

4

322

±

4

Cautions on installation of H41 to H44

1. Tolerance to shaft dimension should be "h6" on the part for installing a magnet.

2. 2-øG hole can be used for positioning of spindle and magnet.

3. Magnet shall be installed as shown to the left.

4. Misalignment between sensor head and magnetic center line shall be within

±

2mm.

5. There is an NS indication on the side of the cover.

Install so that the reference notch on the sensor head comes to the case side.

4 - 20

4. Dedicated Options

4-2-2 Spindle side detector (OSE-1024-3-15-68, OSE-1024-3-15-68-8)

When a spindle and motor are connected with a V-belt, or connected with a gear ratio other than 1:1, use this spindle side detector to detect the position and speed of the spindle. Also use this detector when orientation control and synchronous tap control, etc are executed under the above conditions.

(2) Specifications

Detector type

Mechanical Inertia characteristics

Shaft friction torque for rotation

Shaft angle acceleration

Tolerable continuous rotation speed

Maximum rotation speed

Mechanical configuration

Bearing maximum non-lubrication time

Working environment

Shaft amplitude

(position 15mm from end)

Tolerable load

(thrust direction/radial direction)

Weight

Squareness of flange to shaft

Flange matching eccentricity

Ambient temperature range

Storage temperature range

Humidity

Vibration resistance

Impact resistance

OSE-1024-3-15-68 OSE-1024-3-15-68-8

0.1

×

10

-4 kgm

2

or less

0.98Nm or less

10

4

rad/s

2

or less

6000 r/min

7030 r/min

0.1

×

10

-4 kgm

2 or less

0.98Nm or less

10

4

rad/s

2 or less

8000 r/min

8030 r/min

20000h/6000r/min 20000h/8000r/min

0.02mm or less 0.02mm or less

10kg/20kg

Half of value during operation

10kg/20kg

Half of value during operation

1.5kg 1.5kg

0.05mm or less

0.05mm or less

–5°C to +55°C

–20°C to +85°C

95%Ph

5 to 50Hz, total vibration width 1.5mm, each shaft for 30min.

294.20m/s

2

(30G)

(2) Detection

Signal name

A, B phase

Z phase

Number of detection pulses

1024p/rev

1p/rev

Connector pin layout

Pin Function

E

F

G

H

J

A

B

C

D

A phase

Z phase

B phase

-

Case earth

-

-

+5V

-

Pin Function

P

R

S

T

K

L

M

N

0V

-

-

A phase

Z phase

B phase

-

-

4 - 21

4. Dedicated Options

(3) Outline dimension drawings

102 33 68

MS3102A20-29P

3 2

4-

Ø

5.4 hole

2

5

+0.012

0

20

1.15

+0.14

0

Shaft section

Key way magnified figure

Spindle side detector (OSE-1024-3-15-68, OSE-1024-3-15-68-8)

[Unit: mm]

4 - 22

4. Dedicated Options

4-2-3 C-axis detector (OSE90K)

This is a high-resolution spindle side detector for contouring control (C-axis control). This detector has not only a 90,000p/rev signal used for C-axis control but also 1024p/rev signal used for orientation control and spindle speed detection.

(1) Specifications

Mechanical characteristics for rotation

Mechanical configuration

Working environment

Detector type

Inertia

Shaft friction torque

Shaft angle acceleration

Continuous tolerable rotation speed

Maximum rotation speed

Bearing maximum non-lubrication time

Shaft amplitude

(position 15mm from end)

Tolerable load

(thrust direction/radial direction)

Weight

Squareness of flange to shaft

Flange matching eccentricity

Working temperature range

Storage temperature range

Humidity range

Vibration resistance

Impact resistance

OSE90K+1024 BKO-NC6336H01

0.1 × 10

-4 kgm

2

or less

0.98Nm or less

10

5 rad/s

2

or less

6000r/min

7030r/min

20000hr/6000r/min

0.02mm or less

10kg/20kg Half of value during operation

2.0kg

0.05mm or less

0.05mm or less

–5°C to +55°C

–20°C to +85°C

95%Ph

5 to 50Hz, total vibration width 1.5mm, each shaft for

30 min.

294.20m/s

2

(30G)

Signal name

A, B phase

Z phase

C,D phase

Y phase

Number of detection pulses

1024p/rev

1p/rev

90,000p/rev

1p/rev

Connector pin layout

E

F

G

H

J

A

B

C

D

Pin Function Pin

A phase

Z phase

B phase

－

Case earth

C phase

D phase

+5V

0V

P

R

S

T

K

L

M

N

Function

0V

C phase

D phase

A phase

Z phase

B phase

Y phase

Y phase

4 - 23

(3) Outline dimension drawings

4-M4 depth 6

4. Dedicated Options

38 109

MS3102A20-29P

2 8 6.4

2

5

-0.012

-0.042

1.15

+0.14

0

20

1.15

+0.14

0

Shaft section

Key way magnified figure

Spindle C-axis detector (OSE90K

＋

1024)

(Note 1) The max. detector speed must be 6000r/min or less.

(Note 2) The dimensional tolerance that is not specified is

±

0.5mm.

[Unit: mm]

4 - 24

4. Dedicated Options

4-2-4 C-axis detector (MBE90K)

This is a high-resolution spindle side detector for contouring control (C-axis control). This detector has not only a 90,000p/rev or 1024p/rev oblong wave signal but also a SIN wave output that is equivalent to

PLG. So, this detector can be also used for built-in motors.

(1) Specifications

Detector type

Inner diameter of detector gear

SIN wave output

C/D phase electrically tolerable rotation speed

Operating temperature range

Storage temperature range

Humidity

Vibration resistance

Impact resistance

MBE90K-01A MBE90K-02A MBE90K-03A MBE90K-04A MBE90K-05A

ø 80mm

256 w/rev

ø 110mm

1024 w/rev

ø 140mm

512 w/rev

ø 70mm

256 w/rev

ø 95mm

1024 w/rev

100r/min

0°C to +70°C

-20°C to +110°C (Sensor section: +120°C, 12Hr)

5 to 95%Rh

5 to 50Hz, total vibration width 1.5mm (0.5Hr for each shaft), continuous 1G

294m/s

2

(30G), 11ms (10 times for each shaft)

Signal name

A, B phase

Z phase

C,D phase

Y phase

E,F phase

X phase

Number of detection pulses

1024p/rev

1p/rev

90,000p/rev

1p/rev

256/512/1024wave/rev

1p/rev

For other detail specifications, refer to "C-Axis Position Detector MBE90K SPECIFICATION AND

INSTRUCTION MANUAL" (BNP-A2993-41).

4 - 25

4. Dedicated Options

4-2-5 C-axis detector (MHE90K)

This is a high-resolution spindle side detector for contouring control (C-axis control). This detector has not only oblong wave signals with 90,000p/rev and 1024p/rev but also a SIN wave signal output that is equivalent to PLG. So, this detector can be also used for built-in motors. This detector has a ring-type sensor, which eliminates the gap adjustment process.

(1) Specifications

Detector type

Inner diameter of detector

Mechanical maximum rotation speed

SIN wave signal output

Operating temperature range

Storage temperature range

Humidity

Vibration resistance

Impact resistance

MHE90K-01A MHE90K-02A MHE90K-03A MHE90K-04A MHE90K-05A

ø 80mm ø 110mm ø 140mm ø 70mm ø 95mm

6000r/min 4000r/min 3000r/min 6000r/min 4000r/min

180 w/rev

0°C to +70°C (A/D converter and pre-amp section: 0°C to +55°C)

-20°C to +85°C

5 to 95%Rh (with no dew condensation)

10 to 50Hz, total vibration width 1.5mm (2Hr for each shaft), continuous 1G

294m/s

2

(30G), 11ms (10 times for each shaft)

Signal name

A,B phase

Z phase

C,D phase

Y phase

E,F phase

X phase

Number of detection pulses

1024p/rev

1p/rev

90,000p/rev

1p/rev

180wave/rev

1p/rev

For other detail specifications, refer to "C-Axis Position Detector MHE90K SPECIFICATION AND

INSTRUCTION MANUAL" (BNP-A2993-44).

4 - 26

4. Dedicated Options

4-2-6 Spindle side PLG (MXE128/180/256/512)

A detector equivalent to the spindle motor side detector can be installed on the spindle side. Note, however, that a detector conversion unit (MDS-B-PJEX) will be required outside the drive unit.

Consequently, the type of spindle drive unit will be changed to MDS-C1-SPX/SPHX series.

(1) Environmental

Environment Conditions

Ambient temperature

Atmosphere

Sensor section: -10°C to +80°C (With no freezing)

PCB section : -10°C to +75°C (With no freezing)

Indoors (Where unit is not subject to direct sunlight)

With no corrosive gas, inflammable gas, oil mist, dust or conductive fine particles

(2) Specifications

The detector is configured of the encoder section (combination of sensor section and PCB section) and the detection gear section. Six types of combinations with different output signals and mounting dimensions are available. The user is responsible for assembly and adjustment of the detector.

Type

MXE128-G40-04

MXE128-G40-08

MXE180-G55-04

MXE180-G55-08

MXE256-G80-04

MXE256-G80-08

MXE512-G140-04

MXE512-G140-08

MXE180R-G55-04

MXE180R-G55-08

MXE256R-G80-04

MXE256R-G80-08

No. of AB phase pulses

128

180

256

512

180

256

Z phase

Provided

Provided

Provided

Provided

Provided

Provided

Detector gears

Outer diameter

(mm)

ø 52

ø 72.8

ø 103.2

ø 205.6

ø 72.8

ø 103.2

Inner diameter

(mm)

ø 40

ø 55

ø 80

ø 140

ø 55

ø 80

Detector

Length of lead between sensor and intermediate connector (mm)

800

400

800

400

800

400

800

400

800

400

800

400

Reference speed at signal confirmation

(r/min)

3600

2560

1800

900

2560

1800

<Reference> The conventional part's type

Encoder section : TS1860N2*** has been changed to TS1860N1***.

Gear section : TS1450N2*** has been changed to TS1450N***.

Precautions

1. The length of the standard lead wire connected between the sensor and intermediate connector is

400mm. An 800mm type is available as an option. To prevent the adverse effect of noise, install the

PCB section as close to the sensor section, and keep the length of the lead wire between the sensor and PCB as short as possible. Separate this wire from the power wire when possible.

2. Mount the detector gears on the same axis as the final axis.

3. Mount the PCB section where it will not be subject to water or cutting oil, etc. (For example, install a box, etc., design so that oil and water, etc., cannot enter even from the wiring ports, and then install the PCB in that box.)

In consideration of adjustments and maintenance, use a structure that enables adjustments and replacements.

4. Provide a structure that does not allow foreign matter (iron chips, etc.) enter into the sensor detector surface or detection gear teeth.

4 - 27

(3) Outline dimension drawings

Fig. 1 MXE128-G40…

40

29

2- 5.8

4. Dedicated Options

85

70

Bonding at shaded section

200±10 27.4

Serial No.

indication

R35.5

Detection gear

Type

MXE128-G40-04

MXE128-G40-08

Detector part type

TS1860N2275

TS1860N2276

Fig. 2 MXE180-G55…

40

29 2- 5.8

PCB

Intermediate connector

Shield treatment

PCB protection cover

2- 5.8

Detector gear part type

MU1450N2137

Output connector (AMP)

Cap #350782-1

Pin #350690-1

Accessories

Plug #350720-1 1 pc.

Socket #350689-1 9 pcs.

[Unit: mm]

85

70

Bonding at shaded section

200±10 27.4

Serial No.

indication

R45

2- 4.1

Detection gear

Shield treatment

PCB protection cover

PCB

Intermediate connector

2- 5.8

64

Type

MXE180-G55-04

MXE180-G55-08

Detector part type

TS1860N2777

TS1860N2775

Detector gear part type

MU1450N2730

4 - 28

Output connector (AMP)

Cap #350782-1

Pin #350690-1

Accessories

Plug #350720-1 1 pc.

Socket #350689-1 9 pcs.

[Unit: mm]

Fig. 3 MXE256-G80…

40

29

2- 5.8

4. Dedicated Options

85

70

Bonding at shaded section

200±10 27.4

Serial No. indication

R61

90

Shield treatment

PCB protection cover

2-M5×0.8 screw

Detection gear

PCB

Intermediate connector

2- 5.8

Type Detector part type

MXE256-G80-04

MXE256-G80-08

Fig. 4 MXE512-G140…

40

29

TS1860N2171

TS1860N2174

2- 5.8

Detector gear part type

MU1450N2236

Output connector (AMP)

Cap #350782-1

Pin #350690-1

Accessories

Plug #350720-1 1 pc.

Socket #350689-1 9 pcs.

[Unit: mm]

85

70

Bonding at shaded section

200±10 27.4

Serial No. indication

R112.5

Type

MXE512-G140-04

MXE512-G140-08

180

Detector part type

TS1860N2571

TS1860N2572

PCB

2- 5.8

Intermediate connector

Shield treatment

PCB protection cover

2-M8 screw

Detection gear

Detector gear part type

MU1450N2534

Output connector (AMP)

Cap #350782-1

Pin #350690-1

Accessories

Plug #350720-1 1 pc.

Socket #350689-1 9 pcs.

[Unit: mm]

4 - 29

Fig. 5 MXE180R-G55…

62

40

60°

4. Dedicated Options

85

70

Bonding at shaded section

200±10 27.4

Serial No. indication

104

120°

3- 6.6

Detection gear

Installation plate

PCB 2- 5.8

Intermediate connector

Shield treatment

PCB protection cover

Output connector (AMP)

Cap #350782-1

Pin #350690-1

Accessories

Plug #350720-1 1 pc.

Socket #350689-1 9 pcs.

[Unit: mm]

Type

MXE180R-G55-04

MXE180R-G55-08

Detector part type

TS1860N2770

TS1860N2776

Fig. 6 MXE256R-G80…

Sensor installation seat

40

60°

Detector gear part type

MU1450N2730

85

70

Bonding at shaded section

200±10 27.4

Serial No. indication

136

120°

Type

MXE256R-G80-04

MXE256R-G80-08

90

2-M5×0.8 screw

Detection gear

3- 6.6

Installation plate

Detector part type

TS1860N2183

TS1860N2187

PCB

Intermediate connector

Shield treatment

PCB protection cover

2- 5.8

Output connector (AMP)

Cap #350782-1

Pin #350690-1

Accessories

Plug #350720-1 1 pc.

Socket #350689-1 9 pcs.

[Unit: mm]

Detector gear part type

MU1450N2236

4 - 30

4. Dedicated Options

4-2-7 Detector conversion unit (MDS-B-PJEX)

When a spindle side PLG is used for detecting the position and speed on the spindle, a detector conversion unit (MDS-B-PJEX) is required. At the same time, use MDS-C1-SPX/SPHX series for a spindle drive unit.

(1) Specifications

Type MDS-B-PJEX

Compatible spindle drive unit

Compatible detector

Analog signal input specifications

(CN5)

Compatible frequency

Scale resolution

Input/output communication style

Working ambient temperature

Working ambient humidity

Atmosphere

Tolerable vibration

Tolerable impact

Tolerable power voltage

Maximum heating value

Weight

Protective structure

MDS-C1-SPX / MDS-C1-SPHX

MXE128/180/256/512-G …… ……

A-phase, B-phase, Z-phase

Same as motor side PLG detector specifications

Analog raw waveform max. 150kHz

Analog raw waveform/2048 division

High-speed serial communication I/F, RS485 or equivalent

0 to 55°C

90%RH or less (with no dew condensation)

No toxic gases

98.0m/s

2

(10G)

294.0m/s

2

(30G)

24VDC

±

10%

4W

0.5kg or less

Protective type (protection method: IP20)

(Note 1) The power for the MDS-B-PJEX (24VDC stabilized power 15W) must be prepared by the user.

(Note 2) If a spindle motor whose maximum rotation speed is 10,000r/min or more is driven, use

MDS-C1-SPHX series.

4 - 31

(2) Outline dimension drawings

•

MDS-B-PJEX

4. Dedicated Options

40 135

CN5

CN7

CN2A

CN9

CN6

CN8

CN3A

70

Wiring allowance

6

2-M5-0.8 screw

34 6

Mounting hole

+24V power input

CR30

Unit: [mm]

4 - 32

4. Dedicated Options

4-3 Cables and connectors

4-3-1 Cable connection diagram

The cables and connectors that can be ordered from Mitsubishi Electric Corp. as option parts are shown below. Cables can only be ordered in the designated lengths shown on the following pages. Purchase a connector set, etc., to create special length cables.

Servo drive unit

(MDS-C1-V1/2)

Spindle drive unit

(MDS-C1-SP)

Power supply unit

(MDS-C1-CV)

Battery unit

(MDS-A-BT)

Terminator

(A-TM)

From NC

(1) (1) NC bus cable (1)

(1)

CN2

(3) Brake connector

CN5

CN6

CN3 CN7

Detector conversion unit

(MDS-B-PJEX)

(5) Spindle detector cable

<MDS-B-PJEX unit cable>

Spindle motor

(5) Spindle detector cable Spindle side detector/magnetic sensor

<Spindle side detector/magnetic sensor cable>

C-axis detector

(5) Spindle detector cable

<C-axis detector cable>

(5) Spindle detector cable

<Motor side PLG / Spindle side PLG cable>

Signal divider unit (MDS-B-SD)

(Note) The linear scale must be prepared by the user.

Linear scale

(2) Servo detector cable

<MDS-B-SD unit cable>

Linear scale cable

(This cable must be prepared by the user.)

Detector conversion unit

(MDS-B-HR)

(2) Servo detector cable

<MDS-B-HR unit cable>

Linear scale cable for MDS-B-HR

(This cable must be prepared by

the user.)

(2) Servo detector cable

<Ball screw side detector cable>

Ball screw side detector

(3) Brake connector

(4) Power connector

(2) Servo detector cable

<Servo motor side detector cable>

4 - 33

Servomotor

4. Dedicated Options

4-3-2 List of cables and connectors

(1) NC bus cable and connector

For

CN1A

CN1B

NC bus cable SH21

Length:

0.35, 0.5, 0.7, 1,

1.5, 2, 2.5, 3,

3.5, 4, 4.5, 5,

Drive unit side connector

(3M)

Connector : 10120-6000EL

Shell kit : 10320-3210-000

6, 7, 8, 9,

10, 15, 20, 30 m

FCUA-CS000 For

CN1A

CN1B

NC bus cable connector set

(Note) The connector manufacturer is subject to change without notice.

Drive unit side connector

(3M)

Connector : 10120-3000VE

Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008

Item Model Contents

Drive unit side connector

(3M)

Connector : 10120-6000EL

Shell kit : 10320-3210-000

Drive unit side connector

(3M)

Connector : 10120-3000VE

Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008

4 - 34

4. Dedicated Options

(2) Servo detector cable and connector

Item Model Contents

For CN2 Motor side detector cable

For CN3 Ball screw side detector cable

CNV12-

Drive unit side connector

Blank : One-touch lock

S : Screw lock

Environment

Blank :

For general environment

P : IP65 compatible

Detector side connector

2: Straight cannon

3: Angle cannon

Axis No.

0: Not indicated

1: No. 1 axis

to

4: No. 4 axis

Length:

1.5,

-

3.5,

6,

4, 4.5, 5,

7, 8, 9,

10, 11, 12, 13,

14, 15, 17, 20 m

CNV13-

2, 2.5, 3,

-

Drive unit side connector

Blank : One-touch lock

S : Screw lock

Environment

Blank :

For general environment

P : IP65 compatible

Servo drive unit side connector

(3M)

•

Detector connector straight specification

Connector : 10120-3000VE

(One-touch type lock)

Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008

(Screw-type lock)

Shell kit : 10320-52A0-008

Servomotor detector side/

Ball screw side detector side connector (DDK)

For general environment

Straight plug : MS3106B22-14S

Clamp : MS3057-12A

IP65 compatible

Plug :

MS3106A22-14S(D190)

Straight back shell:

•

Detector connector angle specification

Connector : 10120-3000VE

(One-touch type lock)

Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008

( Screw-type lock )

Shell kit : 10320-52A0-008

CE02-22BS-S

Clamp : CE3057-12A-3

For general environment

Angle plug : MS3108B22-14S

Clamp : MS3057-12A

IP65 compatible

Plug :

MS3106A22-14S(D190)

Angle back shell:

CE02-22BA-S

Clamp : CE3057-12A-3

Detector side connector

2: Straight cannon

3: Angle cannon

Axis No.

0: Not indicated

1: No. 1 axis

to

4: No. 4 axis

Length:

1.5,

3.5,

2, 2.5, 3,

4, 4.5, 5,

6, 7, 8, 9,

10, 11, 12, 13,

14, 15, 17, 20 m

(Note) The connector manufacturer is subject to change without notice.

4 - 35

4. Dedicated Options

For

MDS-B-

HR unit

Item Model Contents

MDS-B-HR unit cable CNL3 -

Drive unit side connector

Blank : One-touch lock

S : Screw lock

HR unit connector

H1:CON1

H2:CON2

Servo drive unit side connector

(3M)

Connector : 10120-3000VE

(One-touch type lock)

Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008

(Screw-type lock)

Shell kit : 10320-52A0-008

MDS-B-HR unit side connector

(Hirose Electric)

Plug

Clamp

: RM15WTP-8S

: RM15WTP-CP(10)

For

MDS-B-

SD unit

MDS-B-SD unit cable

Length:

2, 5, 10, 20, 30 m

SH21

Length:

0.35, 0.5, 0.7, 1,

1.5,

3.5,

6,

2, 2.5,

4, 4.5,

7, 8,

3,

5,

9,

10, 15, 20, 30 m

FCUA-CS000

Servo drive unit side connector

(3M)

Connector : 10120-6000EL

MDS-B-SD unit connector set

(Note) The connector manufacturer is subject to change without notice.

Servo drive unit side connector

(3M)

Connector : 10120-3000VE

Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008

MDS-B-SD unit side connector

(3M)

Connector : 10120-6000EL

Shell kit : 10320-3210-000 Shell kit : 10320-3210-000

MDS-B-SD unit side connector

(3M)

Connector : 10120-3000VE

Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008

4 - 36

4. Dedicated Options

Item Model Contents

For CN2 Detector connector set for

HC -A42/E42,

HC -A51/E51,

HA -A42/E42,

HA -A51/E51

IP67 compatible

Straight ENCP22-14S3

Compliant cable range

ø6.8 to ø10

Servo drive unit side connector

(3M)

Connector : 10120-3000VE

Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008

Angle Servo drive unit side connector

Compliant cable range

ø6.8 to ø10

(3M)

Connector : 10120-3000VE

Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008

Servomotor detector side connector (DDK)

Plug : MS3106A22-14S(D190)

Straight back shell:

CE02-22BS-S

Clamp : CE3057-12A-3

Servomotor detector side connector (DDK)

Plug : MS3106A22-14S(D190)

Angle back shell: CE-22BA-S

Clamp : CE3057-12A-3

For FCUA-CS080 general environment

Servo drive unit side connector

(3M)

Connector : 10120-3000VE

Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008

Angle Servo drive unit side connector

(3M)

Connector : 10120-3000VE

Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008

Servomotor detector side connector (DDK)

Plug : MS3106B22-14S

Clamp : MS3057-12A

Servomotor detector side connector (DDK)

Plug : MS3108B22-14S

Clamp : MS3057-12A

(Note) The connector manufacturer is subject to change without notice.

4 - 37

4. Dedicated Options

For motor brake

For

CN20

Item Model Contents

Brake connector for

HC202B,HC352B,

HC452B,HC702B

HC902B

HC203B,HC353B

HC453B,HC703B

HA053NB,HA13NB

HA23NB,HA33NB

IP67 compatible

Straight BRKP10SL-4S

Compliant cable range

ø5 to ø8.3

Servomotor side brake connector

Plug : MS3106A10SL-4S(D190)

(DDK)

Clamp : YSO10-5-8

(Daiwa Dengyo)

Compliant cable range

ø5 to ø8.3

Servomotor side brake connector

Plug : MS3106A10SL-4S(D190)

(DDK)

Clamp : YLO10-5-8

(Daiwa Dengyo)

For general environment

Straight FCUA-CN804

Angle FCUA-CN808

Connector for motor brake control output CNU20S(AWG14)

Servomotor side brake connector

(Japan Aviation Electronics)

Plug : MS3106B10SL-4S

Clamp : MS3057-4A

Servomotor side brake connector

Servo drive unit side connector

(Japan Aviation Electronics)

Plug : MS3108B10SL-4S

Clamp : MS3057-4A

(DDK)

Connector : DK-3200S-03R

Contact : DK-3REC2LLP1-100

(Note) The connector manufacturer is subject to change without notice.

4 - 38

4. Dedicated Options

For motor power

Item Model Contents

Power connector for

HA053N,HA13N,

HA23N,HA33N

IP67 and

EN compatible

Straight PWCE18-12S

Compliant cable range

ø8.5 to ø11

For FCUA-CN801 general environment

Angle

PWCE18-12L

Compliant cable range

ø8.5 to ø11

FCUA-CN805

Servomotor side power connector (DDK)

Plug : CE05-6A18-12SD-B-BSS

Clamp : CE3057-10A-2(D265)

Servomotor side power connector (DDK)

Plug : CE05-8A18-12SD-B-BAS

Clamp : CE3057-10A-2(D265)

Servomotor side power connector (DDK)

Plug : MS3106B18-12S

Clamp : MS3057-10A

Servomotor side power connector (DDK)

Plug : MS3108B18-12S

Clamp : MS3057-10A

Power connector for

HC52 to 152,

HC53 to 153,

HC103R to 203R

IP67 and

EN compatible

Straight PWCE22-23S

Compliant cable range

ø9.5 to ø13

Servomotor side power connector (DDK)

Plug : CE05-6A22-23SD-B-BSS

Clamp : CE3057-12A-2(D265)

Compliant cable range

ø9.5 to ø13

Servomotor side power connector (DDK)

Plug : CE05-8A22-23SD-B-BAS

Clamp : CE3057-12A-2(D265)

For FCUA-CN802 general environment

Servomotor side power connector (DDK)

Plug : MS3106B22-23S

Clamp : MS3057-12A

Angle FCUA-CN806 Servomotor side power connector (DDK)

Plug : MS3108B22-23S

Clamp : MS3057-12A

(Note) The connector manufacturer is subject to change without notice.

4 - 39

4. Dedicated Options

For motor power

Power connector for

HC202,HC352,HC452

HC203,HC353

Item Model Contents

HC353R,HC503R

IP67 and

EN compatible

Straight PWCE24-10S

Compliant cable range

ø13 to ø15.5

Servomotor side power connector (DDK)

Plug : CE05-6A24-10SD-B-BSS

Clamp : CE3057-16A-2(D265)

Compliant cable range

ø13 to ø15.5

Servomotor side power connector (DDK)

Plug : CE05-8A24-10SD-B-BAS

Clamp : CE3057-16A-2(D265)

For FCUA-CN803 general environment

Servomotor side power connector (DDK)

Plug : MS3106B24-10S

Clamp : MS3057-16A

Angle FCUA-CN807 Servomotor side power connector (DDK)

Plug : MS3108B24-10S

Clamp : MS3057-16A

Power connector for

HC702,HC902

HC453,HC703

IP67 and

EN compatible

Straight PWCE32-17S

Compliant cable range

ø22 to ø23.8

Servomotor side power connector (DDK)

Plug : CE05-6A32-17SD-B-BSS

Clamp : CE3057-20A-1(D265)

Compliant cable range

ø22 to ø23.8

Servomotor side power connector (DDK)

Plug : CE05-8A32-17SD-B-BAS

Clamp : CE3057-20A-1(D265)

Straight FCUA-CN811 For general environment

Servomotor side power connector (DDK)

Plug : MS3106B32-17S

Clamp : MS3057-20A

Angle FCUA-CN815 Servomotor side power connector (DDK)

Plug : MS3108B32-17S

Clamp : MS3057-20A

(Note) The connector manufacturer is subject to change without notice.

4 - 40

4. Dedicated Options

(5) Spindle detector cable

Item Model Contents

For CN5 Motor side PLG cable/Spindle side PLG cable

CNP5- -

Connector type

2: Connector

E: Crimped terminal

Axis No. (1 to 8 axis)

1: No. 1 axis to

8: No. 8 axis

Spindle drive unit side connector (3M)

Connector : 10120-3000VE

Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008

Spindle motor side connector

For 2-type

(Tyco Electronics AMP)

Plug : 350720-1

Pin : 350689-1

For E-type (J.S.T.)

Crimped terminal: V1.25-4

2-type

System No.

None : 1st system

2 : 2nd system

P : PLC axis

E-type

For CN6 Magnetic sensor cable

Length:

2, 5, 10, 20, 30 m

CNP6M-

-

Connector type

2: Connector

E: Crimped terminal

Spindle drive unit side connector (3M)

Connector : 10120-3000VE

Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008

Magnetic sensor side connector

For 2-type (Tajimi Musen)

Plug: TRC116-12A10-7F10.5

For E-type (J.S.T.)

Crimped terminal: V1.25-4

Axis No. (1 to 8 axis)

1: No. 1 axis to

8: No. 8 axis

2-type

System No.

None : 1st system

2 : 2nd system

P : PLC axis

E-type

Spindle side detector cable

Length:

2, 5, 10, 20, 30 m

CNP6A - -

Connector type

2: Straight cannon

3: Angle cannon

E: Crimped terminal

Spindle drive unit side connector (3M)

Connector : 10120-3000VE

Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008

Axis No. (1 to 8 axis)

1: No. 1 axis to

8: No. 8 axis

System No.

2 : 2nd system

P : PLC axis

Spindle side detector side connector

For 2-type (DDK)

Plug : MS3106A20-29S

Clamp : MS3057-12A

For 3-type (DDK)

Plug : MS3108A20-29S

Clamp : MS3057-12A

For E-type (J.S.T.)

Crimped terminal: V1.25-4

2-type

Length:

2, 5, 10, 20, 30 m

(Note) The connector manufacturer is subject to change without notice.

3-type

E-type

4 - 41

4. Dedicated Options

For CN7

Item Model Contents

C-axis detector (OSE90K) cable

CNP7A - -

Connector type

2: Straight cannon

3: Angle cannon

E: Crimped terminal

Axis No. (1 to 8 axis)

1: No. 1 axis to

8: No. 8 axis

System No.

Spindle drive unit side connector (3M)

Connector : 10120-3000VE

Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008

C-axis detector side connector

For 2-type (DDK)

Plug : MS3106A20-29S

Clamp : MS3057-12A

For 3-type (DDK)

Plug : MS3108A20-29S

Clamp : MS3057-12A

For E-type (J.S.T.)

Crimped terminal: V1.25-4

2-type

2 : 2nd system

P : PLC axis

C-axis detector (MBE90K) cable

3-type

Length:

2, 5, 10, 20, 30 m

CNP7B - -

Connector type

2: Connector

E: Crimped terminal

Spindle drive unit side connector (3M)

Connector : 10120-3000VE

Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008

E-type

C-axis detector side connector

For 2-type (Du pont)

Housing : 69176-020

Pin : 48235-000

For E-type (J.S.T.)

Crimped terminal: V1.25-4

Axis No. (1 to 8 axis)

1: No. 1 axis to

8: No. 8 axis

2-type

C-axis detector (MHE90K) cable

System No.

None : 1st system

2 : 2nd system

P : PLC axis

E-type

Length:

2, 5, 10, 20, 30 m

CNP7H - -

Connector type

2: Connector

E: Crimped terminal

Spindle drive unit side connector (3M)

Connector : 10120-3000VE

Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008

C-axis detector side connector

For 2-type(DDK)

Housing : JAC-15P

Pin : J-SP1140

For E-type (J.S.T.)

Crimped terminal: V1.25-4

Axis No. (1 to 8 axis)

1: No. 1 axis to

8: No. 8 axis

2-type

E-type System No.

None : 1st system

2 : 2nd system

P : PLC axis

Length:

2, 5, 10, 20, 30 m

(Note) The connector manufacturer is subject to change without notice.

4 - 42

4. Dedicated Options

For CN6

CN7

Item Model Contents

C-axis detector (OSE90K with 1024p output) cable

CNP67A -

Connector type

2: Straight cannon

3: Angle cannon

E: Crimped terminal

Axis No. (1 to 8 axis)

1: No. 1 axis to

8: No. 8 axis

System No.

None : 1st system

2 : 2nd system

P : PLC axis

Spindle drive unit side connector (3M)

Connector : 10120-3000VE

Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008

C-axis detector side connector

For 2-type (DDK)

Plug : MS3106A20-29S

Clamp : MS3057-12A

For 3-type (DDK)

Plug : MS3108A20-29S

Clamp : MS3057-12A

For E-type (J.S.T.)

Crimped terminal: V1.25-4

2-type

For

MDS-B-

PJEX unit

MDS-B-PJEX unit cable

Length:

2, 5, 10, 20, 30 m

SH21

Length:

0.35, 0.5, 0.7, 1,

1.5, 2, 2.5, 3,

3.5, 4, 4.5, 5,

6, 7, 8, 9,

10, 15, 20, 30 m

FCUA-CS000

Spindle drive unit side connector (3M)

Connector : 10120-6000EL

Shell kit : 10320-3210-000

MDS-B-PJEX unit connector set Spindle drive unit side connector (3M)

Connector : 10120-3000VE

Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008

MDS-B-PJEX unit power cable FCUA-R220

Length:

1, 2, 3, 5,

7, 10, 15, 17 m

MDS-B-PJEX unit side connector (Japan AMP)

Connector : 2-178288-3

MDS-B-PJEX unit power connector set FCUA-CN220

(Note) The connector manufacturer is subject to change without notice.

MDS-B-PJEX unit side connector (Japan AMP)

Connector : 2-178288-3

Contact : 1-175218-5

3-type

E-type

MDS-B-PJEX unit side connector (3M)

Connector : 10120-6000EL

Shell kit : 10320-3210-000

MDS-B-PJEX unit side connector (3M)

Connector : 10120-3000VE

Shell kit : 10320-52F0-008

DC24V(+) power side connector (J.S.T.)

Crimped terminal: V1.25-3

4 - 43

5. Peripheral Devices

5-1 Selection of wire ................................................................................................................................. 5-2

5-1-1 Example of wires by unit ............................................................................................................. 5-2

5-2 Selection the AC reactor, contactor and no-fuse breaker.................................................................. 5-5

5-2-1 Standard selection....................................................................................................................... 5-5

5-2-2 Selection when a contactor is shared ......................................................................................... 5-6

5-3 Earth leakage breaker........................................................................................................................ 5-7

5-4 Branch-circuit protection .................................................................................................................... 5-8

5-4-1 Circuit protector ........................................................................................................................... 5-8

5-4-2 Fuse protection............................................................................................................................ 5-8

5-5 Noise filter .......................................................................................................................................... 5-9

5-6 Surge absorber ................................................................................................................................ 5-10

5-7 Speedometer and load meter........................................................................................................... 5-11

5-8 Cable for peripheral control.............................................................................................................. 5-12

5-8-1 Cable for external emergency stop ........................................................................................... 5-12

5-8-2 Cable for servomotor magnetic brake ....................................................................................... 5-13

5 - 1

5. Peripheral Devices

5-1 Selection of wire

5-1-1 Example of wires by unit

Selected wires must be able to tolerate rated current of the unit’s terminal to which the wire is connected.

How to calculate tolerable current of an insulated wire or cable is shown in “Tolerable current of electric cable” (1) of Japanese Cable Makers’ Association Standard (JCS)-168-E (1995), its electric equipment technical standards or JEAC regulates tolerable current, etc. wire.

When exporting wires, select them according to the related standards of the country or area to export.

In the UL standards, certification conditions are to use wires of 60

o

C and 75

o

C product. (UL508C)

Wire’s tolerable current is different depending on conditions such as its material, structure, ambient temperature, etc. Check the tolerable current described in the specification of the wire to use.

Example of wire selections according to each standard is as follows.

(1) 600V vinyl insulated wire (IV wire) 60 o

C product

(Example according to IEC/EN60204-1, UL508C)

Unit type

Power supply unit

Spindle drive unit

Servo drive unit

(1-axis)

Servo drive unit

(2-axis)

Terminal name

MDS-C1-CV-37

MDS-C1-CV-55

MDS-C1-CV-75

MDS-C1-CV-110

MDS-C1-CV-150

MDS-C1-CV-185

MDS-C1-CV-220

MDS-C1-CV-260

MDS-C1-CV-300

MDS-C1-CV-370

MDS-C1-SP □ -04

MDS-C1-SP □ -075

MDS-C1-SP □ -15

MDS-C1-SP □ -22

MDS-C1-SP □ -37

MDS-C1-SP □ -55

MDS-C1-SP □ -75

MDS-C1-SP □ -110

MDS-C1-SP □ -150(S)

MDS-C1-SP □ -185

MDS-C1-SP □ -220

MDS-C1-SP □ -260

MDS-C1-SP □ -300

MDS-C1-V1-01

MDS-C1-V1-03

MDS-C1-V1-05

MDS-C1-V1-10

MDS-C1-V1-20

MDS-C1-V1-35

MDS-C1-V1-45(S)

MDS-C1-V1-70(S)

MDS-C1-V1-90

MDS-C1-V1-110

MDS-C1-V1-150

MDS-C1-V2□□□□

TE1 TE2 TE3

(L1, L2, L3, ) (L+, L-) (L11, L21, L12, L22, MC1) mm

2

AWG mm

2

AWG mm

2

AWG

3.5 12

3.5 12

5.5 10

14 6

22 4

30 3

38 2

50 -

60 -

- -

Same as TE1

2 14

2 14

3.5 12

3.5 12

3.5 12

3.5 12 Match with TE2 of

1.25 to 2 16 to 14

1.25 to 2 16 to 14

8 8

14 6

22 4

30 3 unit

38 2

60 -

1.25 16

1.25 16

2 14

2 14

3.5 12 Match with TE2 of

1.25 to 2 16 to 14 unit 5.5 10

8 8

8 8

14 6

30 3

Select wire size for each axes based on wire size of 1-axis drive type.

Match with TE2 of selected power supply unit

1.25 to 2 16 to 14

5 - 2

5. Peripheral Devices

(2) 600V double (heat proof) vinyl insulated wire (HIV wire) 75

o

C product

(Example according to IEC/EN60204-1, UL508C)

Unit type

Power supply unit

Spindle drive unit

Servo drive unit

(1-axis)

Servo drive unit

(2-axis)

Terminal name

MDS-C1-CV-37

MDS-C1-CV-55

MDS-C1-CV-75

MDS-C1-CV-110

MDS-C1-CV-150

MDS-C1-CV-185

MDS-C1-CV-220

MDS-C1-CV-260

MDS-C1-CV-300

MDS-C1-CV-370

MDS-C1-SP □ -04

MDS-C1-SP □ -075

MDS-C1-SP □ -15

MDS-C1-SP □ -22

MDS-C1-SP □ -37

MDS-C1-SP □ -55

MDS-C1-SP □ -75

MDS-C1-SP □ -110

MDS-C1-SP □ -150(S)

MDS-C1-SP □ -185

MDS-C1-SP □ -220

MDS-C1-SP □ -260

MDS-C1-SP □ -300

MDS-C1-V1-01

MDS-C1-V1-03

MDS-C1-V1-05

MDS-C1-V1-10

MDS-C1-V1-20

MDS-C1-V1-35

MDS-C1-V1-45(S)

MDS-C1-V1-70(S)

MDS-C1-V1-90

MDS-C1-V1-110

MDS-C1-V1-150

MDS-C1-V2□□□□

TE1 TE2 TE3

(L1, L2, L3, ) mm

2

AWG mm

2

(L+, L-) (L11, L21, L12, L22, MC1)

AWG mm

2

AWG

2 14

3.5 12

5.5 10

14 6

14 6

22 4

30 3

38 2

38 2

50 -

Same as TE1

2 14

2 14

2 14

2 14

2 14

1.25 to 2 16 to 14

5.5 10

14 6

14 6

22 4

30 3

38 2

1.25 16

1.25 16

2 14

2 14 unit

3.5 12

5.5 10

8 8

14 6

22 4

Select wire size for each axes based on wire size of 1-axis drive type. unit

Match with TE2 of selected power supply unit

1.25 to 2

1.25 to 2

1.25 to 2

16 to 14

16 to 14

16 to 14

5 - 3

5. Peripheral Devices

(3) 600V bridge polyethylene insulated wire (IC) 105 o

C product

(Example according to JEAC8001)

Unit type

Power supply unit

Spindle drive unit

Servo drive unit

(1-axis)

Servo drive unit

(2-axis)

Terminal name

MDS-C1-CV-37

MDS-C1-CV-55

MDS-C1-CV-75

MDS-C1-CV-110

MDS-C1-CV-150

MDS-C1-CV-185

MDS-C1-CV-220

MDS-C1-CV-260

MDS-C1-CV-300

MDS-C1-CV-370

MDS-C1-SP □ -04

MDS-C1-SP □ -075

MDS-C1-SP □ -15

MDS-C1-SP □ -22

MDS-C1-SP □ -37

MDS-C1-SP □ -55

MDS-C1-SP □ -75

MDS-C1-SP □ -110

MDS-C1-SP □ -150(S)

MDS-C1-SP □ -185

MDS-C1-SP □ -220

MDS-C1-SP □ -260

MDS-C1-SP □ -300

MDS-C1-V1-01

MDS-C1-V1-03

MDS-C1-V1-05

MDS-C1-V1-10

MDS-C1-V1-20

MDS-C1-V1-35

MDS-C1-V1-45(S)

MDS-C1-V1-70(S)

MDS-C1-V1-90

MDS-C1-V1-110

MDS-C1-V1-150

MDS-C1-V2□□□□

TE1 TE2 TE3

(L1, L2, L3, ) mm

2

AWG mm

(L+, L-) (L11, L21, L12, L22, MC1)

2

AWG mm

2

AWG

2 14 2 14

3.5 12 3.5 12

5.5 10 14 6

14 6 22 4

14 6 22 4

22 4 30 3

38 2 38 2

38 2 50 -

2 14

2 14

2 14

2 14

2 14

5.5 10

14 6

14 6

22 4

30 3

38 2

1.25 16

1.25 16

2 14

2 14 unit

3.5 12

5.5 10

8 8

14 6

22 4

Select wire size for each axes based on wire size of 1-axis drive type. unit

Match with TE2 of selected power supply unit

1.25 to 2

1.25 to 2

1.25 to 2

16 to 14

16 to 14

16 to 14

16 to 14

CAUTION

1. Selection conditions follow IEC/EN60204-1, UL508C, JEAC8001.

•

Ambient temperature is maximum 40°C.

•

Cable installed on walls without ducts or conduits.

To use the wire under conditions other than above, check the standards you are supposed to follow.

2. The maximum wiring length to the motor is 30m.

If the wiring distance between the drive unit and motor is 20m or longer, use a thick wire so that the cable voltage drop is 2% or less.

3. Always wire the grounding wire.

5 - 4

5. Peripheral Devices

5-2 Selection the AC reactor, contactor and no-fuse breaker

5-2-1 Standard selection

Install an AC reactor, contactor and no-fuse breaker (NFB) per one power supply unit. Refer to the table below and select them according to each power supply unit capacity.

Selection of AC reactor, contactor and no-fuse breaker (NFB)

Power supply unit capacity

AC reactor

Recommended contactor

(Special order part)

Recommended main circuit NFB

(Special order part)

3.7 to 7.5kW

NF50CS3P-40A0

5

11kW 15 to 18.5kW 22 to 30kW 37kW

B-AL-7.5K B-AL-11K B-AL-18.5K B-AL-30K B-AL-37K

S-N25 200V S-N35 200V

NF50CS3P-50A05

S-N50 200V S-N80 200V S-N150 200V

NF100CS3P-100A05 NF225CS3P-150A05 NF225CS3P-175A05

Recommended motor fan NFB

(Special order part)

An NFB or CP (circuit protector) can be used as the motor fan breaker.

Select the NFB or CP using a value approximately double the motor fan rated current value shown below.

Contact the NFB or CP manufacturer for details on the recommended wire size, etc.

Spindle motor frame size

Motor fan rated current

71 90

0.1A 0.2A

112

0.2A

132

0.2A

160

0.6A

180

0.6A

Servomotor capacity

Motor fan rated current

HA-LF11K2 HA-LF15K2

0.3A 0.3A

* A rush current that is approximately double the above rated current flows when the motor starts.

(Note 1) In the above table, a special order part refers to a part that cannot be ordered from Mitsubishi, and which must be prepared by the user.

(Note 2) To comply with the EC Directives, use contactors and NFB that comply with the EN/IEC

Standards.

CAUTION

If a breaker is shared by several power supply units, the breaker may not activate when a short-circuit fault occurs in a small capacity unit. This is dangerous, so never share the breakers.

5 - 5

200VAC

5. Peripheral Devices

5-2-2 Selection when a contactor is shared

If two or more power supply units share one contactor, select the contactor as explained below. Note, however, that one AC reactor and no-fuse breaker are required per one power supply unit.

(1) Selection

Calculate the total input current of the power supply units that share one contactor by referring to the following table. Select the contactor whose capacity is equal to or less than the rated conductivity current.

Power supply unit input current

Power supply unit CV-37 CV-55 CV-75 CV-110 CV-150 CV-185 CV-220 CV-260 CV-300 CV-370

Input current

(2) Connection diagram when a contactor is shared

Install one AC reactor and no-fuse breaker per each power supply unit.

NC control section

C1-V1 C1-V2

C1-CV (No. 2) C1-SP C1-CV (No. 1) A-BT

(4)

(5)

MC1

L1, L2, L3

L+, L–

L11, L21

(6)

MC1

L1, L2, L3

L+, L–

L11, L21

For control power

200VAC

MC

AC reactor

Contactor

5 - 6

NFB1

AC reactor

5. Peripheral Devices

5-3 Earth leakage breaker

When installing an earth leakage breaker, select the breaker on the following basis to prevent the breaker from malfunctioning by the higher frequency earth leakage current generated in the servo or spindle drive unit.

(1) Selection

Obtaining the earth leakage current for all drive units referring to the following table, select an earth leakage breaker within the “rated non-operation sensitivity current”.

Usually use an earth leakage breaker for inverter products that function at a leakage current within the commercial frequency range (50 to 60Hz).

If a product sensitive to higher frequencies is used, the breaker could malfunction at a level less than the maximum earth leakage current value.

Earth leakage current for each unit

Unit Earth leakage current Maximum earth leakage current

MDS-C1-SP-04 to 300

MDS-C1-V1-01 to 150

6mA 15mA

1mA 2mA

MDS-C1-V2-0101 to 9090S 1mA 4mA (for two axes)

(Note1) Maximum earth leakage current: Value that considers wiring length and grounding, etc.

(Commercial frequency 50/60Hz)

(Note2) The earth leakage current in the power supply unit side is included in the drive unit side.

(2) Measurement of earth leakage current

When actually measuring the earth leakage current, use a product that is not easily affected by the higher frequency earth leakage current. The measurement range should be 50 to 60Hz.

POINT

1. The earth leakage current tends to increase as the motor capacity increases.

2. A higher frequency earth leakage current will always be generated because the inverter circuit in the drive unit switches the transistor at high speed. Always ground to reduce the higher frequency earth leakage current as much as possible.

3. An earth leakage current containing higher frequency may reach approx. several hundreds of mA. According to IEC479-2, this level is not hazardous to the human body.

5 - 7

5. Peripheral Devices

5-4 Branch-circuit protection

5-4-1 Circuit protector

This breaker is used to switch the control power and to provide overload and short-circuit protection.

When connecting a circuit protector or breaker to the power input (TE3 terminals L11 and L21) for the control circuit, use a product that does not trip (incorrectly activate) by a rush current when the power is turned ON. A circuit protector with inertial delay and an operation delayed type breaker are available to prevent unnecessary tripping. Select the product to be used according to the machine specifications.

The rush current and rush conductivity time differ according to the power impedance and power ON timing, so select a product that does not trip even under the conditions listed in the following table.

Rush current: Ip=35

36.8%

I [A]

Time constant: T=6

Rush conductivity time:

Time to reach 36.8% of rush current; equivalent to breaker operation characteristics operation time. t [ms]

POINT

When collectively protecting the control circuit power for multiple units, select a circuit protector or breaker that satisfies the total sum of the rush current Ip.

The largest value is used for the rush conductivity time T.

5-4-2 Fuse protection

The fuse of branch-circuit protection must use UL class CC, J or T. In the selection, please consider rush current and rush conductive time.

Selection of branch-circuit protection fuse

Connected total of unit

Fuse (Class CC)

Rated [V] Current [A]

Wire Size

AWG

1 – 4

5 – 8

600

20

35

16 to 14

CAUTION

For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only with same type 600

V, 20 or 35 A (UL CLASS CC) fuse.

5 - 8

5. Peripheral Devices

5-5 Noise filter

(1) Selection

Use an EMC noise filter if the noise conducted to the power line must be reduced. Select an EMC noise filter taking the power supply unit's input rated voltage and input rated current into consideration.

(2) Noise filter mounting position

Install the noise filter to the power supply unit’s power input as the diagram below indicates.

Power distribution panel

Power supply unit

Breaker

AC reactor Contactor

Power supply

Noise filter

R

S

T

MDS-C1-CV

(Note) The noise filter must be prepared by the user.

Recommended devices: Okaya Electric Industries 3SUP-HL-ER-6B Series

Soshin Electric HF3000C-TMA Series

Contact: Okaya Electric Industries Co., Ltd. Telephone: 03-3424-8120

(+81-3-3424-8120) http://www.okayaelec.co.jp

Soshin Electric Co., Ltd. Telephone: 03-3775-9112

(+81-3-3775-9112) http://www.soshin.co.jp

(Note) The above devices may be changed at the manufacturer's discretion.

Contact each manufacturer for more information.

5 - 9

5. Peripheral Devices

5-6 Surge absorber

When controlling a magnetic brake of a servomotor in DC OFF circuit, a surge absorber must be installed to protect the relay contacts and brakes. Commonly a varistor is used.

(1) Selection of varistor

When a varistor is installed in parallel with the coil, the surge voltage can be adsorbed as heat to protect a circuit. Commonly a 120V product is applied. When the brake operation time is delayed, use a 220V product. Always confirm the operation with an actual machine.

(2) Specifications

Select a varistor with the following or equivalent specifications. To prevent short-circuiting, attach a flame resistant insulation tube, etc., onto the leads as shown in the following outline dimension drawing.

Varistor specifications

Varistor type

Varistor voltage rating

(range)

(V)

Tolerable circuit voltage

Rating

Surge current withstand level

Energy withstand level

(A)

AC (V) DC (V) 1 time 2 times 10/1000us

(J)

Power

Max. limit voltage

Electrostatic

2ms (W) (V) capacity

(reference value)

(pF)

ERZV10D121

TNR10V121K

ERZV10D221

TNR10V221K

POINT

120

(108 to 132)

220

(198 to 242)

75 100 3500 2500 20 14.5 0.4 200 1400

140 180 3500 2500 39 27.5 0.4 360

(Note 1) Selection condition: When ON/OFF frequency is 10 times/min or less, and exciting current is 2A or less

(Note 2) ERZV10D121 and ERZV10D221 are manufactured by Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.

TNR10V121K and TNR10V221K are manufactured by MARCON Electronics Co., Ltd.

Contact: Matsushita Electronic Components Co., Ltd : http://www.panasonic.co.jp/ maco/

MARCON Electronics Co., Ltd. Telephone : (Kanto)03-3471-7041 (+81-3-3471-7041)

(Kinki) 06-6364-2381 (+81-3-6364-2381)

(Chubu) 052-581-2595 (+81-52-581-2595)

(3) Outline dimension drawing

• ERZV10D121, ERZV10D221

20.0

11.5

[Unit: mm]

Insulation tube

410

Normally use a product with 120V varistor voltage. If there is no allowance for the brake operation time, use the 220V product. A varistor whose voltage exceeds 220V cannot be used, as such varistor will exceed the specifications of the relay in the unit.

5 - 10

5. Peripheral Devices

5-7 Speedometer and load meter

Speedometer and load meter can be output from the D/A output which is for measuring control data.

When speedometer is output, +10V DC is output at the motor’s maximum speed regardless of the motor’s rotation direction. The following specifications are recommended for the display.

10 (a) Type YM-8G type DC voltage type (Mitsubishi)

(b) Rating 10VDC full scale

(c) Internal impedance approx. 10k

Ω

0

Maximum rotation speed

Motor rotation speed (r/min)

Speedometer output specification

(2) Load meter output

The load meter indicates the percentage of the load in respect to the motor's rated output. The relation of the motor output capacity [kW] and load meter display [%] is as follows.

0

Overload (for one minute) zone

50%ED (15-minute)

(30-minute) zone

Continuous rating zone

1500 6000

Motor rotation speed (r/min)

Load meter output specification

8000

Load meter 120%

Load meter 100%

Load meter X 100%

The following specifications are recommended for the display.

(a) Type YM-8G type DC voltage type (Mitsubishi)

(b) Rating 10VDC full scale

(c) Internal impedance approx. 10k

Ω

(d) Scale indicating alarm at 100% or above (see right figure)

0

20

40

60

80

%

Load meter display

100

Red zone

120

5 - 11

5-8 Cable for peripheral control

5. Peripheral Devices

5-8-1 Cable for external emergency stop

Prepare the cable below for external emergency stop function (dual emergency stop function). The cable for external emergency stop must be prepared by the user.

External emergency stop connector

Bottom view of MDS-C1-CV

No. Item

101

102

Connector

Contact

101 102

Type

2-178288-3

1-175218-2

Manufacturer

Tyco Electronics AMP

Tyco Electronics AMP

Wire size:0.5 to 1.25SQ

Drive unit side

3

1

CN23

+

-

5 - 12

5. Peripheral Devices

5-8-2 Cable for servomotor magnetic brake

Prepare the cable according to the servo system specifications.

(1) Magnetic brake control for 9kW or less servomotor

Use CN20 connector output to control a motor magnetic brake. Refer to the section "3-1-5 Magnetic brake" for the connection details.

Common

EMG-2

1

2

3

Motor brake

CNU20S(AWG14)

Drive unit side

Connection of CN20 connector

(2) Magnetic brake and dynamic brake control for 11kW or 15kW servomotor

Use a dynamic brake output as well as a motor magnetic brake output for using a dynamic brake unit (MDS-B-DBU-150). Refer to the sections "3-1-5 Magnetic brake" and "4-1-2 Dynamic brake unit" for the connection details.

EMG-1

EMG-2

1

2

3

CNU20S(AWG14)

Drive unit side

Common

Dynamic brake

Motor brake

Connection of CN20 connector when a dynamic brake unit is used

5 - 13

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

Appendix 1-1 Servomotor outline dimension drawings ..........................................................................A1-2

Appendix 1-1-1 HC Series ..................................................................................................................A1-2

Appendix 1-1-2 HA Series ..................................................................................................................A1-8

Appendix 1-2 Outline dimension drawings of spindle motor ................................................................A1-12

Appendix 1-2-1 SJ Series .................................................................................................................A1-12

Appendix 1-2-2 SJ-V Series .............................................................................................................A1-15

Appendix 1-2-3 SJ-VS Series ...........................................................................................................A1-25

Appendix 1-2-4 SJ-PMF Series (IPM motor) ....................................................................................A1-27

Appendix 1-3 Unit outline dimension drawings ....................................................................................A1-28

Appendix 1-3-1 Servo/spindle drive unit...........................................................................................A1-28

Appendix 1-3-2 Power supply unit ....................................................................................................A1-37

Appendix 1-3-3 AC rector .................................................................................................................A1-41

A1 - 1

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

Appendix 1-1 Servomotor outline dimension drawings

Appendix 1-1-1 HC Series

•

HC52 (B) S (W)

•

HC52 (B) T (W)

•

HC53 (B) S (W)

•

HC53 (B) T (W)

•

HC102 (B) S (W)

•

HC102(B) T (W)

•

HC103 (B) S (W)

•

HC103 (B) T (W)

•

HC152 (B) S (W)

•

HC152(B) T (W)

•

HC153 (B) S (W)

•

HC153 (B) T (W)

L 55

130

44

12 3

45°

[Unit: mm]

50

Ø

14

5

Ø 16

5

KL

21.5

Detector connector

MS3102A22-14P

Power connector

CE05-2A22-23P

Oil seal

S30457B

41

4 -

Ø

9mounting hole

Use a hexagon socket bolt.

44

L

12

58

3

18 28 12

25

A

10

130

45°

A Ø

14

5

Ø 16

5

KL

21.5

Detector connector

MS3102A22-14P

Pow er connector

CE05-2A22-23P

Tightening torque

23 to 30 N.m

U nut M10 1.25

Plain washer 10

Taper 1/10

Oil seal

S30457B 5

0

-0.03

41

4 -

Ø

9mounting hole

Use a hexagon socket bolt.

Servomotor type IP65 specifications

Cross s ecti on A-A

IP67 specifications

(With W)

L (Note 1) KL 2000r/min 3000r/min L (Note 1) KL

HC52 (B)

HC102 (B)

HC53 (B) 125 (158)

HC103 (B) 150 (183)

52

77

135 (168)

160 (193)

52

77

HC152 (B) HC153 (B) 175 (208) 102 185 (218) 102

(Note 1) The dimensions given in parentheses apply for the servomotor with magnetic brakes.

(Note 2) Use a friction coupling (Spun ring, etc.) to connect with the load.

(Note 3) Attach the cannon connector facing downward to improve the splash-proof performance.

A1 - 2

•

HC202S (W)

•

HC203S (W)

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

•

HC352S (W)

•

HC353S (W)

44

L

•

HC452S (W)

18

3

79 176

[Unit: mm]

45°

75

Ø

20

0

Ø

23

0

Oil seal

S40608B

21.5

KL

Detector connector

MS3102A22-14P

Power connector

CE05-2A24-10P

Servomotor type

2000r/min 3000r/min

L KL

4Ø 13.5

Mounting hole

46

Use a hexagon socket bolt

HC202S HC203S 150 69

HC352S HC353S 192 111

HC452S – 234 153

(Note 1) Use a friction coupling (Spun ring, etc.) to connect with the load.

(Note 2) Attach the cannon connector facing downward to improve the splash-proof performance.

(Note 3) The same dimensions apply for the IP67 specifications (with W).

•

HC202BS (W)

•

HC203BS (W)

•

•

HC352BS (W)

HC353BS (W)

•

HC452BS (W)

L 79

44 1

8

3

176

[Unit: mm]

45°

75 Ø

20

0

21.5

KL

Oil seal

S40608B

73.5

Detector

connector

MS3102A22-14P

Power connector

CE05-2A24-10P

Brake connector

MS3102A10SL-4P

4-13.5

Mounting hole

46

Use a hexagon socket bolt

Servomotor type

2000r/min 3000r/min

L KL

HC202BS HC203BS 198 69

HC352BS HC353BS 240 111

HC452BS – 282 153

(Note 1) Use a friction coupling (Spun ring, etc.) to connect with the load.

(Note 2) Attach the cannon connector facing downward to improve the splash-proof performance.

(Note 3) The same dimensions apply for the IP67 specifications (with W).

Ø

23

0

A1 - 3

•

HC702S (W)

•

HC453S (W)

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

•

HC703S (W)

44

L

18 3

79 176

[Unit: mm]

45°

Ø

20

0

75

Note2

Note2

Note2

KL

Note2

21.5

Oil seal

S40608B

4Ø 13.5 Mounting hole

Use a hexagon socket bolt

Detector connector

MS3102A22-14P

Power connector

CE05-2A32-17P

Servomotor type

2000r/min 3000r/min

L KL

58

Ø

23

0

HC702S HC703S 297 211

(Note 1) Use a friction coupling (Spun ring, etc.) to connect with the load.

(Note 2) This applies for the HC702S and HC703S. The HC453S does not have the suspension bolt screw hole (M8).

(Note 3) Attach the cannon connector facing downward to improve the splash-proof performance.

(Note 4) The same dimensions apply for the IP67 specifications (with W).

•

HC702BS (W)

•

HC453BS (W)

•

HC703BS(W)

L

79

176

18

44 3

[Unit: mm]

45°

75

Note2

Note2

21.5

Note2

KL

Note2

73.5

Detector connector

MS3102A22-14P

Power connector

CE05-2A32-17P

Brake connector

MS3102A10SL-4P

Oil seal

S40608B

4-Ø13.5 Mounting hole

Use a hexagon socket bolt

Ø

20

0

Servomotor type

2000r/min 3000r/min

L KL

58

Ø

23

0

HC702BS HC703BS 345 211

(Note 1) Use a friction coupling (Spun ring, etc.) to connect with the load.

(Note 2) This applies for the HC702BS and HC703BS. The HC453BS does not have the suspension bolt screw hole (M8).

(Note 3) Attach the cannon connector facing downward to improve the splash-proof performance.

(Note 4) The same dimensions apply for the IP67 specifications (with W).

A1 - 4

•

HC902S (W)

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

44

364

20 25

3

85 204

[Unit: mm]

45°

80

Note2

Note2

Note2

278

Note2

Oil seal

S45629B

Ø

21

5

21.5

Detector connector

MS3102A22-14P

Power connector

CE05-2A32-17P

4Ø 15 Mounting hole

Use a hexagon socket bolt

(Note 1) Use a friction coupling (Spun ring, etc.) to connect with the load.

(Note 2) This is the suspension bolt screw hole (M8).

(Note 3) Attach the cannon connector facing downward to improve the splash-proof performance.

(Note 4) The same dimensions apply for the IP67 specifications (with W).

•

HC902BS (W)

412 85

44 20 25 3

60

204

Ø 250

[Unit: mm]

45°

80

No t e 2

No t e 2

21.5

Note2

278

Note2

Oil seal

S45629B

73.5

Detector connector

MS3102A22-14P

Power connector

CE05-2A32-17P

4Ø 15 Mounti ng hole

Use a hexagon socket bolt

Brake connector

MS3102A10SL-4P

(Note 1) Use a friction coupling (Spun ring, etc.) to connect with the load.

(Note 2) This is the suspension bolt screw hole (M8).

(Note 3) Attach the cannon connector facing downward to improve the splash-proof performance.

(Note 4) The same dimensions apply for the IP67 specifications (with W).

Ø2

15

60

Ø

25

0

A1 - 5

•

HC103R (B) S

•

HC153R (B) S

•

HC203R (B) S

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

•

HC103R (B) T

•

HC153R (B) T

•

HC203R (B) T

44

L

10 3

45

40

100

Ø

11

5

Ø 13

5

[Unit: mm]

45°

4-

Ø

9 Mounting hole

Use a hexagon socket bolt

Oil seal

S30457B

21.5

Detec tor connector

MS3102A22-14P

KL

Power connector

CE05-2A22-23P

10

18

3

58

28 12

25

A

10

A

41

100

Ø

11

5

Ø 13

5

45°

4-

Ø

9 Mounting hole

Use a hexagon socket bolt

0

5

Plain washer 10 41

Cros s sect ion A-A

Taper 1/10

Oil seal

S30457B

Tightening torque 23 to 30 N

U nut M10 1.25

· m

Servomotor type L (Note 1) KL

HC103R (B)

HC153R (B)

HC203R (B)

152 (189)

177 (214)

202 (239)

71

96

121

(Note 1) The dimensions given in parentheses apply for the servomotor with magnetic brakes.

(Note 2 ) Use a friction coupling (Spun ring, etc.) to connect with the load.

(Note 3) Attach the cannon connector facing downward to improve the splash-proof performance.

A1 - 6

•

HC353R (B) S

•

HC503R (B) S

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

44

L

12

63

3

58

130

[Unit: mm]

45°

Note3

Note

3

Note3

Ø

14

5

Ø

165

KL Oil seal

S30457B

21.5

Detector connector

MS3102A22-14P

Power connector

CE05-2A24-10P

4 Ø 9 Mounting hole

Use a hexagon socket bolt

Servomotor type L (Note 1) KL

HC353R (B) S

HC503R (B) S

222 (258)

279 (315)

148

205

(Note 1) The dimensions given in parentheses apply for the servomotor with magnetic brakes.

(Note 2) Use a friction coupling (Spun ring, etc.) to connect with the load.

(Note 3 ) This is for the magnetic brakes.

(Note 4) Attach the cannon connector facing downward to improve the splash-proof performance.

46

A1 - 7

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

Appendix 1-1-2 HA Series

•

HA053NS

•

HA13NS

0.015

0.03 S

73

A

6

0.04 S

3

26

85

64

20

S

0.5

Ø

7

6

[Unit: mm]

21 B

Oil seal

GM10204B

45°

4Ø 4.5 Mounting hole

Use a hexagon socket bolt

Detector connector

MS3102A22-14P

Power connector

MS3102A18-12P

Servomotor type A B

HA053NS

HA13NS

139 43

156 60

(Note 1) Use a friction coupling (Spun ring, etc.) to connect with the load.

(Note 2 ) Attach the cannon connector facing downward to improve the splash-proof performance.

(Note 3) The servomotor with magnetic brakes is a special specification part. Contact the respective sales office or dealer for details.

A1 - 8

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

•

HA23NT

•

HA33NT

8

37

0.05 S

23

15 8

14

3

12 6.3

•

HA23NS

•

HA33NS

0.04 S

45 A

8

0.05 S

3

30

0.02

0.04 S

86

[Unit: mm]

45°

25

A

S

Ø

11

2

A S

Ø

10

0

0.5

0.5

Power connector

CE05-2A18-12P

Oil seal

S15357B

Oil seal

S15357B

4

0

-0.03

Cross section A-A

21

Tightening torque 5 to 6 N · m

U nut M6 1.0 Plain washer 6

Detector connector

MS3102A22-14P

Taper 1/10

0.02

B

Servomotor type A B

HA23N

HA33N

125 81

155 111

(Note 1) Use a friction coupling (Spun ring, etc.) to connect with the load.

(Note 2) Attach the cannon connector facing downward to improve the splash-proof performance.

•

HA23NBT

•

HA33NBT

•

•

HA23NBS

HA33NBS

0.05 S

37

23

0.04 S

0.05 S

8

14

3

15 8

12 6.3

45 A

8

30

3

4-

Ø

6.6 Mounting hole

Use a hexagon socket bolt

0.02

0.04 S

[Unit: mm]

86

45°

25

A

S

Ø

11

2

A

S

Ø

10

0

Oil seal

S15357B 4

0.5

0

-0.03

0.5

Oil seal

S15357B

38

B

Cross section A-A

Tightening torque 5 to 6 N · m

U nut M6 1.0 Plain washer 6

Taper 1/10

21

0.02

Brake connector

MS3102A10SL-4P

Detector connector

MS3102A22-14P

Power connector

CE05-2A18-12P

Servomotor type A B

HA23NB

HA33NB

162 81

192 111

(Note 1) Use a friction coupling (Spun ring, etc.) to connect with the load.

(Note 2) Attach the cannon connector facing downward to improve the splash-proof performance.

4-

Ø

6.6 Mounting hole

Use a hexagon socket bolt

A1 - 9

•

HA-LF11K2-S8

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

6

11

206

146 27

6

MS3102A22-14P

480

426

262

(M10)

Exhaust

排気

20

85

3

80

□200

45°

六角穴付ボルトを

使用してください。

φ21

5

φ25

0

19.8

5.2

rotation direction

S50689B

(Note 1) Use a friction coupling (Spun ring, etc.) to connect with the load.

(Note 2) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with M10×20 or smaller bolts.

•

HA-LF11K2B-S8

6

11

206

146 27

6

MS3102A22-14P

550

498

(M10)

334

MS3102A10SL-4P

85

93

20 3

□200

55

80

45°

Exhaust

排気

4 -φ14.5 取付穴

六角穴付ボルトを

φ21

5

φ25

0

19.8

5.2

direction

S45629B

A B

(Note 1) Use a friction coupling (Spun ring, etc.) to connect with the load.

(Note 2) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with M10×20 or smaller bolts.

[Unit: mm]

[単位： mm]

A1 - 10

•

HA-LF15K2-S8

6 250

180

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

MS3102A22-14P

6

27

(M12)

209

200

495 110

25 5

□250

45 °

100

φ

300

20.4

6.6

37

6 rotation direction

S709513B

(Note 1) Use a friction coupling (Spun ring, etc.) to connect with the load.

(Note 2) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with M10×20 or smaller bolts.

•

HA-LF15K2B-S8

6 250

180

MS3102A22-14P

6

27

(M12)

209

200

610

MS3102A10SL-4P

110

111.5

25 5

六角穴付ボルトを

使用してください

□250

45 °

φ

26

5

100

φ

300

20.4

6.6

37

6 Cooling fan

冷却ファン direction

S60829B

A B

ブレーキ用コネクタ配置

MS3102A10SL-4P

(Note 1) Use a friction coupling (Spun ring, etc.) to connect with the load.

(Note 2) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with M10×20 or smaller bolts.

φ

26

5

A1 - 11

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

Appendix 1-2 Outline dimension drawings of spindle motor

Appendix 1-2-1 SJ Series

•

SJ-30A with standard flange

Terminal box 850

740

665.5

110

7 310

20

φ51

189

60 5

7

4-φ19

Exhaust air

Cooling fan

110

90

A

10.5

A

43

8

φ

30

0

φ

32

5

35°

Cooling air inlet

16

[Unit: mm]

A 55m6 A

Cross section

A-A

(Note 1) Provide a clearance of 30mm or more between the cooling fan and wall.

(Note 2) The shaft can also be mounted upward.

(Note 3) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with bolts.

•

SJ-30A with standard legs

Terminal box

850

505

430.5

345

230 110

90 10.5

6 312

189

6

Exhaust air

Cooling fan

127

304

127 108

A

A

Cooling air inlet

16

4-Ø15

55

127

310

127

A 55m6 A

Cross section

A-A

(Note 1) Provide a clearance of 30mm or more between the cooling fan and wall.

(Note 2) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with bolts.

A1 - 12

[Unit: mm]

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

•

SJ-37BP, SJ-22XW5 with standard flange

Terminal box

909

769

701.5

530

φ51

68 5

140

25

7 350

224

Exhaust air

A

140

110 15

A

50

9

φ

35

0

φ

37

5

35°

Cooling air inlet

Cooling fan

18

7

4-φ19

A

60m6

Cross section

A-A

A

(Note 1) Provide a clearance of 30mm or more between the cooling fan and wall.

(Note 2) The shaft can also be mounted upward.

(Note 3) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with bolts.

•

SJ-37BP, SJ-22XW5 with standard legs

Terminal box

909

400.5

508.5

441

247.5

140 6 352

224

[Unit: mm]

6

Exhaust air

110

A

15

Cooling air inlet

A

Cooling fan

139.5

338

139.5

121 70

139.5

139.5

350

18

A 60m6 A

Cross section

A-A

(Note 1) Provide a clearance of 30mm or more between the cooling fan and wall.

(Note 2) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with bolts.

A1 - 13

[Unit: mm]

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

•

SJ-45BP, SJ-22XW8 with standard flange

Terminal box

932

792

733

φ63

73

140

30

5

7 378

278

Exhaust air

140

110

A

15

A

Cooling fan

Cooling air inlet

7

4-φ19

58

1

φ

40

0

φ

42

5

35°

φ425

18

A 60m6

Cross section

A-A

A

(Note 1) Provide a clearance of 30mm or more between the cooling fan and wall.

(Note 2) The shaft can also be mounted upward.

(Note 3) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with bolts.

•

SJ-45BP, SJ-22XW8 with standard legs

Terminal box

932

272.5

425.5

140 6 506.5

447.5

φ63

380

278

[Unit: mm]

6

Exhaust air

Cooling fan

152.5

385

152.5

133

110

A

15

Cooling air inlet

A

4-φ19

85

159

400

18

159

A 60m6 A

Cross section

A-A

[Unit: mm]

(Note 1) Provide a clearance of 30mm or more between the cooling fan and wall.

(Note 2) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with bolts.

A1 - 14

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

Appendix 1-2-2 SJ-V Series

•

SJ-V2.2-01, SJ-V3.7-02ZM with standard flange

φ35

Terminal box

360

300

265

60

130

48

12

5

Flange

□174

168

4-φ12

45

Ａ

8

Exhaust air

Ａ

φ

18

5

φ

19

0

Cooling fan

8

Cooling air inlet

5

2-M6 Screw

16

φ28j6

Ａ

Ａ

Cross section

A-A

(Note 1) Provide a clearance of 30mm or more between the cooling fan and wall.

(Note 2) The shaft can also be mounted upward.

(Note 3) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with bolts.

•

SJ-V2.2-01, SJ-V3.7-02ZM with standard legs

φ35

□176

φ

220

5

[Unit: mm]

Terminal box 300

360

265

130

60

5 176

168

5

45 8

Exhaust air

Cooling fan

75

105

56

41

Ａ

Ａ

Cooling air inlet

8

4-φ10 35

70

180

70

2-M6 Screw

16

φ28j6

Ａ Ａ

Cross section

A-A

(Note 1) Provide a clearance of 30mm or more between the cooling fan and wall.

(Note 2) The shaft can also be mounted upward.

(Note 3) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with bolts.

A1 - 15

[Unit: mm]

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

•

SJ-V3.7-01 with standard flange

φ35

390

330

295

60

Terminal box

160

48

12

5

Flange

□174

168 4-φ12

Exhaust air

45

Ａ

8

Ａ

φ

18

5

φ

19

0

Cooling fan

5

φ22

0

Cooling air inlet

8

5 □176

16

2-M6

φ28j6

Ａ Ａ

Cross section

A-A

Screw

(Note 1) Provide a clearance of 30mm or more between the cooling fan and wall.

(Note 2) The shaft can also be mounted upward.

(Note 3) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with bolts.

•

SJ-V3.7-01 with standard legs

φ35

Terminal box

390

330

295

160

60

45 8

5 176

168

5

[Unit: mm]

Exhaust air

Cooling fan

Ａ

Cooling air inlet

100

130

56

41

Ａ

8

4-φ10 35

70

180

70

16

2-M6

φ28j6

Ａ Ａ

Cross section

A-A

Screw

(Note 1) Provide a clearance of 30mm or more between the cooling fan and wall.

(Note 2) The shaft can also be mounted upward.

(Note 3) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with bolts.

A1 - 16

[Unit: mm]

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

•

SJ-V5.5-01 with standard flange

Terminal box

485

425

390

60

255

φ44

48

12　

5

Flange

□174

168

4-φ12

Exhaust air

45

Ａ

7.5

Ａ

φ

18

5

φ1

90

φ

220

Cooling fan Cooling air inlet

7

5 □176

φ28h6

φ

22

3-M4 Screw

Ａ Ａ

Cross section

A-A

(Note 1) Provide a clearance of 30mm or more between the cooling fan and wall.

(Note 2) The shaft can also be mounted upward.

(Note 3) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with bolts.

•

SJ-V5.5-01 with standard legs

φ44

Terminal box

425

485

255

390

60

45 7.5

5 176

168

5

5

[Unit: mm]

Exhaust air

Cooling fan

159

190

56

41

Ａ

Ａ

Cooling air inlet

4-φ10

7

35

70

180

70

φ

22

φ28h6

Ａ Ａ

Cross section

A-A

3-M4 Screw

(Note 1) Provide a clearance of 30mm or more between the cooling fan and wall.

(Note 2) The shaft can also be mounted upward.

(Note 3) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with bolts.

A1 - 17

[Unit: mm]

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

•

SJ-V7.5-01, SJ-V7.5-03ZM, SJ-V11-06ZM with standard flange

φ44

Terminal box

520

440

403

80

238

47 5

13

Flange

□204

198

4-φ15

Exhaust air

Cooling fan

63

Ａ

8

Ａ

φ

215

φ

22

5 φ25

0

Cooling air inlet

10

5 □208 5

φ

22

φ32h6

Ａ Ａ

Cross section

A-A

3-M5 Screw

(Note 1) Provide a clearance of 30mm or more between the cooling fan and wall.

(Note 2) The shaft can also be mounted upward.

(Note 3) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with bolts.

•

SJ-V7.5-01, SJ-V7.5-03ZM, SJ-V11-06ZM with standard legs

φ44

Terminal box

520

440

403

238

80

5 208

198

5

63 8

[Unit: mm]

Ａ

Exhaust air

Cooling air inlet

Ａ

Cooling fan

4-φ12

140

180

70

50

10

φ22

3-M5 Screw

φ32h6

Ａ Ａ

Cross section

A-A

45

95

230

95

(Note 1) Provide a clearance of 30mm or more between the cooling fan and wall.

(Note 2) The shaft can also be mounted upward.

(Note 3) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with bolts.

A1 - 18

[Unit: mm]

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

•

SJ-V11-01, SJ-V11-08ZM with standard flange

φ44

Terminal box

490

453

600

288

110

65 5

13

Flange

□204

198

4-φ15

Exhaust air

80 10

Ａ

Ａ φ2

15

φ

22

5

Cooling fan

Cooling air inlet

14

5 □208

φ

40

φ48h6

Ａ Ａ

Cross section

A-A

3-M5 Screw

(Note 1) Provide a clearance of 30mm or more between the cooling fan and wall.

(Note 2) The shaft can also be mounted upward.

(Note 3) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with bolts.

•

SJ-V11-01, SJ-V11-08ZM with standard legs

φ44

Terminal box

490

453

600

110

288 5 208

198

80 10

5

φ25

0

5

[Unit: mm]

Exhaust air

Cooling fan

140

180

Ａ

Cooling air inlet

Ａ

70

50

14

4-φ12

45

95

230

95

φ4

0

3-M5 Screw

φ48h6

Ａ Ａ

Cross section

A-A

(Note 1) Provide a clearance of 30mm or more between the cooling fan and wall.

(Note 2) The shaft can also be mounted upward.

(Note 3) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with bolts.

A1 - 19

[Unit: mm]

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

•

SJ-V15-01, SJ-V18.5-01, SJ-V11-09, SJ-V15-03, SJ-V22-06ZM with standard flange

φ44

Terminal box

579.5

469.5

434.5

259.5

65

110

20

5

266

□250

Flange

198

4-φ15

Exhaust air

80 10

Ａ

Ａ

φ

26

5

φ

27

5

φ30

0

Cooling fan

Cooling air inlet

14

5 □262 5

φ

40

3-M5 Screw

φ48h6

Ａ Ａ

Cross section

A-A

[Unit: mm]

(Note 1) Provide a clearance of 30mm or more between the cooling fan and wall.

(Note 2) The shaft can also be mounted upward.

(Note 3) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with bolts.

•

SJ-V15-01, SJ-V18.5-01, SJ-V11-09, SJ-V15-03, SJ-V22-06ZM with standard legs

φ44

Terminal box

579.5

469.5

434.5

259.5

110

80 10

5 262

198

5

Exhaust air

Cooling fan

Ａ

Ａ

Cooling air inlet

178

250

108

60

14

4-φ15

50

127

295

127

φ

40

3-M5 Screw

φ48h6

Ａ Ａ

Cross section

A-A

(Note 1) Provide a clearance of 30mm or more between the cooling fan and wall.

(Note 2) The shaft can also be mounted upward.

(Note 3) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with bolts.

[Unit: mm]

A1 - 20

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

•

SJ-V30-02ZM with standard flange

φ51

Terminal box

649.5

539.5

499.5

329.5

110

20

266

□250 Flange

238

65 5

4-φ15

Exhaust air

80

Ａ

10

Ａ φ

26

5 φ

27

5

φ30

0

Cooling fan

Cooling air inlet

5 □262 5

14

φ

40

φ48h6

Ａ Ａ

Cross section

A-A

3-M5 Screw

(Note 1) Provide a clearance of 30mm or more between the cooling fan and wall.

(Note 2) The shaft can also be mounted upward.

(Note 3) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with bolts.

•

SJ-V30-02ZM with standard legs

φ51

Terminal box

649.5

539.5

499.5

329.5

110

80 10

5 262

238

5

[Unit: mm]

Exhaust air

Cooling fan

178

250

Ａ

Ａ

Cooling air inlet

108

60

14

4-φ15

50

127

295

127

φ

40

φ48h6

Ａ Ａ

Cross section

A-A

3-M5 Screw

(Note 1) Provide a clearance of 30mm or more between the cooling fan and wall.

(Note 2) The shaft can also be mounted upward.

(Note 3) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with bolts.

A1 - 21

[Unit: mm]

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

•

SJ-V22-01, SJ-V18.5-03, SJ-V22-05 with standard flange

Terminal box

φ51

649.5

539.5

499.5

110

329.5

20

266

□250 Flange

238

65 5

4-φ15

Exhaust air

90

Ａ

10.5

Ａ φ

26

5 φ

27

5

φ30

0

Cooling fan

Cooling air inlet

5 □262 5

16

φ4

5

φ55m6

Ａ Ａ

Cross section

A-A

3-M5 Screw

(Note 1) Provide a clearance of 30mm or more between the cooling fan and wall.

(Note 2) The shaft can also be mounted upward.

(Note 3) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with bolts.

•

SJ-V22-01, SJ-V18.5-03, SJ-V22-05 with standard legs

φ51

Terminal box

649.5

539.5

499.5

329.5

110

90 10.5

5 262

238

5

[Unit: mm]

Exhaust air

Cooling fan

178

275

Ａ

Ａ

Cooling air inlet

108

60

4-φ15

16

50

127

295

127

φ

45

φ55m6

Ａ Ａ

Cross section

A-A

3-M5 Screw

(Note 1) Provide a clearance of 30mm or more between the cooling fan and wall.

(Note 2) The shaft can also be mounted upward.

(Note 3) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with bolts.

[Unit: mm]

A1 - 22

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

•

SJ-V26-01 with standard flange

φ51

Terminal box

695.5

585.5

545.5

375.5

110

20

Flange

□250

238

65 5

4-φ15

Exhaust air

90

Ａ

10.5

Ａ φ

26

5

φ

27

5

φ30

0

Cooling fan

Cooling air inlet

16

5 □262

φ

45

φ55m6

Ａ Ａ

Cross section

A-A

3-M5 Screw

(Note 1) Provide a clearance of 30mm or more between the cooling fan and wall.

(Note 2) The shaft can also be mounted upward.

(Note 3) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with bolts.

•

SJ-V26-01 with standard legs

φ51

Terminal box

695.5

585.5

545.5

110

375.5

5 262

238

5

90 10.5

5

[Unit: mm]

Exhaust air

Cooling fan

178

275

Ａ

Ａ

Cooling air inlet

108

60

4-φ15

16

50

127

295

127

φ

45

φ55m6

Ａ Ａ

Cross section

A-A

3-M5 Screw

(Note 1) Provide a clearance of 30mm or more between the cooling fan and wall.

(Note 2) The shaft can also be mounted upward.

(Note 3) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with bolts.

[Unit: mm]

A1 - 23

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

•

SJ-V55-01 with standard flange

φ63

Terminal box

864

724

672

402

140

75

30

5

□480

348 4-φ24

110

Ａ

15

Exhaust air

Cooling fan

Ａ

Cooling air inlet

20

φ5

00

φ

51

0 φ550

35°

2-M10

φ

65

φ75m6

Ａ Ａ

Cross section

A-A

3-M6 Screw

(Note 1) Provide a clearance of 30mm or more between the cooling fan and wall.

(Note 2) The shaft can also be mounted upward.

(Note 3) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with bolts.

•

SJ-V55-01 with standard legs

φ63

Terminal box 864

724

672

140

402

110 15

6 426

348

6

[Unit: mm]

Ａ

Exhaust air

Cooling air inlet

Ａ

Cooling fan

286

366

149

109

4-φ19

20

80

178

435

178

φ

65

φ75m6

Ａ Ａ

Cross section

A-A

3-M6 Screw

(Note 1) Provide a clearance of 30mm or more between the cooling fan and wall.

(Note 2) The shaft can also be mounted upward.

(Note 3) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with bolts.

[Unit: mm]

A1 - 24

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

Appendix 1-2-3 SJ-VS Series

•

SJ-VS7.5-03ZM with standard flange

φ44

Terminal box

32

210

453

405.5

230.5

47

80

5

13

□204

198

4-φ15

Ｂ

Cooling fan Exhaust air

504

Cooling air inlet

340

Ａ

5

φ

21

5

φ

27

5

160

□208

35°

5

φ

250

Ｂ

Ａ

(Note 1) Provide a clearance of 30mm or more between the cooling fan and wall.

(Note 2) The shaft can also be mounted upward.

(Note 3) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with bolts.

•

SJ-VS22-06ZM with standard flange

φ44

[Unit: mm]

Terminal box

32

210

479

411.5

241.5

65

110

5

20

□250

238

4-φ15

Ｂ

Cooling fan Exhaust air

545

Cooling air inlet

351

Ａ

5

φ

26

5 φ

27

5

190

□262

35°

5

φ

300

Ｂ

Ａ

(Note 1) Provide a clearance of 30mm or more between the cooling fan and wall.

(Note 2) The shaft can also be mounted upward.

(Note 3) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with bolts.

[Unit: mm]

A1 - 25

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

•

SJ-VS30-02ZM with standard flange

φ51

Terminal box

32

210

549

481.5

311.5

65

110

5

20

□250

238

4-φ15

Ｂ

Cooling fan Exhaust air

615

Cooling air inlet

421

Ａ

5

φ

26

5

φ

27

5

35°

190

□ 262 5

φ

300

Ｂ

Ａ

(Note 1) Provide a clearance of 30mm or more between the cooling fan and wall.

(Note 2) The shaft can also be mounted upward.

(Note 3) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with bolts.

[Unit: mm]

A1 - 26

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

Appendix 1-2-4 SJ-PMF Series (IPM motor)

•

SJ-PMF01830-00 with standard flange

Terminal box

2×4-M5

8

466

398

361

60

205 193

45

°

φ35

49

12

5

45 8

Ａ

□ 62

Exhaust air

Ａ

φ1

45

Cooling fan Cooling air inlet

4-φ9

8

164

146

Flange

□130

□134

φ140

φ

16

5

2-M5 Screw

φ28j6

Ａ Ａ

Cross section

A-A

(Note 1) Provide a clearance of 30mm or more between the cooling fan and wall.

(Note 2) The shaft can also be mounted upward.

(Note 3) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with bolts.

•

SJ-PMF03530-00 with standard flange

Terminal box

464

384

342

80 Eyebolts 2-M8

2×4-M5

45

°

φ65

φ

35

200 a

67 b

184

97

50

15

5

63 8 a

198

180

56 b

[Unit: mm]

Ａ

Exhaust air

Ａ

Cooling fan

Cooling air inlet

10

φ1

85

Flange

□174

φ

19

0

φ

220

2-M8 Screw

4-φ12

φ32h6

Ａ Ａ

Cross section

A-A

(Note 1) Provide a clearance of 30mm or more between the cooling fan and wall.

(Note 2) The shaft can also be mounted upward.

(Note 3) If the suspension bolts are removed during operation, plug the screw holes with bolts.

A1 - 27

[Unit: mm]

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

Appendix 1-3 Unit outline dimension drawings

Appendix 1-3-1 Servo/spindle drive unit

MDS-C1-V1-01

MDS-C1-V1-03

MDS-C1-V1-05

MDS-C1-V1-10

MDS-C1-V2-0101

MDS-C1-V2-0301

MDS-C1-V2-0303

MDS-C1-V2-0501

MDS-C1-V2-0503

MDS-C1-V2-0505

MDS-C1-V2-1005

MDS-C1-V2-1010

MDS-C1-SP-04

MDS-C1-SP-075

MDS-C1-SP-15

ø6 hole

70

(Wiring allowance)

22

2-M6 screw

2-M4 screw

16

30

60

6

(State with terminal block cover removed) 20

Terminal block cover

•

For MDS-C1-V1 and MDS-C1-SP

180

200

Intake

(Note 2)

(Note 1)

4-M4 screw

•

For MDS-C1-V2

7-M4 screw

4-M4 screw

4-M4 screw

2-M5 screw hole

Panel mounting hole machining drawing

[Unit : mm]

(Note 1) The square hole does not need to be machined.

(Note 2) The MDS-C1-V1-01/03 and MDS-C1-SP-04/075 do not have built-in fans.

A1 - 28

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

MDS-C1-V1-20

MDS-C1-V2-2010

MDS-C1-V2-2020

MDS-C1-V1-35 MDS-C1-V2-3510S

MDS-C1-V1-45S MDS-C1-V2-3520S

MDS-C1-SP-22

MDS-C1-SP-37

ø6 hole

70

(Wiring allowance)

Intake

(Note 2)

22

2-M6 screw

2-M4 screw

Intake

16

30

60

6

(State with terminal block cover removed)

Terminal block cover

20

Square hole

(Note 1)

•

For MDS-C1-V1 and MDS-C1-SP

3-M4 screw

Note that the MDS-C1-V1-45S uses an 3-M5 screw

•

For MDS-C1-V2

6-M4 screw

180

260

2-M4 screw

3-M4 screw

60 15

Required wind passage space

2-M5 screw hole 52

Panel mounting hole machining drawing

(Note 1) Attach packing around the square hole for sealing.

(Note 2) The MDS-C1-V1-20 does not have a fan at the top.

A1 - 29

[Unit : mm]

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

MDS-C1-V1-45

ø6 hole

MDS-C1-V1-70S

70

(Wiring allowance)

Intake

22

2-M6 screw

2-M4 screw 16

45

90

6

(State with terminal block

cover removed)

Terminal block cover

20

Intake

180

260

60 15

Required wind passage space

3-M5 screw

2-M5 screw

Square hole

(Note 1)

2-M5 screw hole 82

Panel mounting hole machining drawing (Note 1) Attach packing around the square hole for sealing.

A1 - 30

[Unit : mm]

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

MDS-C1-V2-3510

MDS-C1-V2-3520

MDS-C1-V2-3535

MDS-C1-V2-4520

MDS-C1-V2-4535

MDS-C1-V2-4545S MDS-C1-V2-7070S

ø6 hole

70

(Wiring allowance)

Intake

22

2-M6 screw

2-M4 screw 16

45

90

6

(State with terminal block

cover removed)

Terminal block cover

20

Intake

180

260

60 15

Required wind passage space

6-M4 screw

3-M4 screw

Square hole

(Note 1)

2-M5 screw hole 82

Panel mounting hole machining drawing (Note 1) Attach packing around the square hole for sealing.

A1 - 31

[Unit : mm]

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

MDS-C1-SP-55

MDS-C1-SP-75

MDS-C1-SP-110

ø6 hole

MDS-C1-SP-150S

70

(Wiring allowance)

Intake

22

2-M6 screw

2-M4 screw 16

45

90

6

(State with terminal block

cover removed)

Terminal block cover

20

Intake

180

260

60 15

Required wind passage space

3-M5 screw

2-M5 screw

Square hole

(Note 1)

2-M5 screw hole 82

Panel mounting hole machining drawing (Note 1) Attach packing around the square hole for sealing.

A1 - 32

[Unit : mm]

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

MDS-C1-V1-70

MDS-C1-V1-90

ø6 hole

MDS-C1-SP-150

MDS-C1-SP-185

70

(Wiring allowance)

Intake

52

2-M6 screw

2-M4 screw 46

60

120

6

(State with terminal block

cover removed)

Terminal block cover

20

Intake

180

260

60 15

Required wind passage space

3-M5 screw

2-M5 screw

Square hole

(Note 1)

2-M5 screw hole 112

Panel mounting hole machining drawing (Note 1) Attach packing around the square hole for sealing.

A1 - 33

[Unit : mm]

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

MDS-C1-V2-4545

ø6 hole

MDS-C1-V2-7035

MDS-C1-V2-7045

70

(Wiring allowance)

Intake

52

2-M6 screw

2-M4 screw 46

60

120

6

(State with terminal block

cover removed)

Terminal block cover

20

Intake

180

260

60 15

Required wind passage space

6-M4 screw

3-M4 screw

Square hole

(Note 1)

2-M5 screw hole 112

Panel mounting hole machining drawing (Note 1) Attach packing around the square hole for sealing.

A1 - 34

[Unit : mm]

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

MDS-C1-SP-220

2-ø6 hole

MDS-C1-V2-7070

MDS-C1-V2-9090S

70

(Wiring allowance)

Intake

52

2-M6 screw

2-M4 screw

Intake

46

45

6

60

150

6

(State with terminal block

cover removed)

60

Terminal block cover

20

•

For MDS-C1-V2

6-M4 screw

Square hole

(Note 1)

•

For MDS-C1-SP

3-M4 screw

180

260

60 15

Required wind passage space

3-M8 screw

4-M5 screw hole 142

Panel mounting hole machining drawing

2-M8 screw

(Note 1) Attach packing around the square hole for sealing.

A1 - 35

[Unit : mm]

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

MDS-C1-V1-110

MDS-C1-V1-150

2-ø6 hole

MDS-C1-SP-260

MDS-C1-SP-300

70

(Wiring allowance)

Exhaust

52

2-M6 screw

2-M4 screw 46

45

6

60

150

6

60

(State with terminal block

cover removed)

Terminal block cover

20 180

263

Intake

63 12

Heat dissipation allowance

3-M8 screw

Square hole

(Note 1)

2-M8 screw

4-M5 screw hole 142

Panel mounting hole machining drawing (Note 1) Attach packing around the square hole for sealing.

A1 - 36

[Unit : mm]

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

Appendix 1-3-2 Power supply unit

ø6 hole

MDS-C1-CV-37

MDS-C1-CV-55

MDS-C1-CV-75

70

(Wiring allowance)

22

2-M6 screw

3-M4 screw

16

30

60

6

(State with terminal block

cover removed)

Terminal block cover

20 180

220

Intake

(Note 2)

20 15

Heat dissipation allowance

3-M4 screw

2-M4 screw

Square hole

(Note 1)

2-M5 screw hole 52

Panel mounting hole machining drawing

(Note 1) Attach packing around the square hole for sealing

(Note 2) The MDS-C1-CV-37 does not have a built-in fan.

A1 - 37

[Unit : mm]

ø6 hole

MDS-C1-CV-110

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

70

(Wiring allowance)

(Note 2)

22

2-M6 screw

3-M4 screw

16

45

90

6

(State with terminal block

cover removed)

Terminal block cover

20

Intake

180

260

60 15

Required wind passage space

3-M5 screw

2-M5 screw

Square hole

(Note 1)

2-M5 screw hole 82

Panel mounting hole machining drawing

(Note 1) Attach packing around the square hole for sealing

(Note 2) The MDS-C1-CV-110 does not have a fan at the top.

A1 - 38

[Unit : mm]

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

ø6 hole

MDS-C1-CV-150

MDS-C1-CV-185

70

(Wiring allowance)

(Note 2)

22

2-M6 screw

3-M4 screw

16

60

120

6

(State with terminal block

cover removed)

Terminal block cover

20

Intake

180

260

60 15

Required wind passage space

3-M5 screw

2-M5 screw

Square hole

(Note 1)

2-M5 screw hole 112

Panel mounting hole machining drawing

(Note 1) Attach packing around the square hole for sealing.

(Note 2) The MDS-C1-CV-150/185 does not have a fan at the top.

A1 - 39

[Unit : mm]

MDS-C1-CV-220

MDS-C1-CV-260

MDS-C1-CV-300

MDS-C1-CV-370

2-ø6 hole

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

70

(Wiring allowance)

Intake

42

2-M6 screw

3-M4 screw

45

6

60

150

6 36

60

(State with terminal block

cover removed)

Terminal block cover

20

Intake

180

260

60 15

Required wind passage space

3-M8 screw

Square hole

(Note 1)

2-M8 screw

4-M5 screw hole 142

Panel mounting hole machining drawing (Note 1) Attach packing around the square hole for sealing.

A1 - 40

[Unit : mm]

Appendix 1-3-3 AC rector

•

B-AL-7.5K

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

6-M5 screw

FG grounding position

L11

L12

MAIN

DRIVE

L21

L22

L31

L32

PE grounding position

(with grounding mark)

Terminal cover

55

± 1

4-8×15 slot

165

± 2

•

B-AL-11K

6-M5 screw

FG grounding position

L11

L12

MAIN

DRIVE

L21

L22

L31

L32

PE grounding position

(with grounding mark)

Terminal cover

55

± 1

4-8×15 slot

[Unit: mm]

165

± 2

A1 - 41

[Unit: mm]

•

B-AL-18.5K

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

6-M6 screw

FG grounding position

MAIN

L11

L12

DRIVE

L21

L22

L31

L32

PE grounding position

(with grounding mark)

Terminal cover

55

± 1

4-8×15 slot

165

± 2

•

B-AL-30K

6-M6 screw

FG grounding position

L11

L12

MAIN

DRIVE

L21

L22

L31

L32

PE grounding position

(with grounding mark)

Terminal cover

55

± 1

4-8×15 slot

[Unit: mm]

165

± 2

A1 - 42

[Unit: mm]

•

B-AL-37K

Appendix 1. Outline Dimension Drawings

6-M6 screw

FG grounding position

MAIN

L11

L12

DRIVE

L21

L22

L31

L32

PE grounding position

(with grounding mark)

Terminal cover

70

± 1

4-8×15 slot

220

± 2

[Unit: mm]

A1 - 43

Appendix 2. Cable and Connector Specifications

Appendix 2-1 Selection of cable.............................................................................................................A2-2

Appendix 2-1-1 Cable wire and assembly ..........................................................................................A2-2

Appendix 2-1-2 Flexible conduits........................................................................................................A2-4

Appendix 2-2 Cable connection diagram ...............................................................................................A2-6

Appendix 2-3 Connector outline dimension drawings..........................................................................A2-12

A2 - 1

Appendix 2. Cable and Connector Specifications

Appendix 2-1 Selection of cable

Appendix 2-1-1 Cable wire and assembly

The following shows the specifications and processing of the wire used in each cable. Manufacture the cable using the following recommended wire or equivalent parts.

Recommended wire model

(Cannot be directly ordered from

Mitsubishi

Finished outside diameter

Sheath material

No. of pairs

Electric Corp.)

Wire characteristics

Configuration

Conductor resistance

Withstand voltage

Insulation resistance

Heat resistant temperature

UL20276 AWG28

10pair

6.1mm PVC 10

7 strands/

0.13mm

222

Ω

/km or less

AC350/ 1min

1M

Ω

/km or more

80°C

Applica- tion

NC unit communi- cation cable

A14B2343 (Note 1) 7.2mm PVC 6

40 strands/

0.08mm

TS-91026 (Note 2) 11.6mm PVC

2

(0.3 mm

2

)

10

(0.2 mm

2

)

60 strands/

0.08mm

40 strands/

0.08mm

(Note 1) Junko Co. (Dealer: Toa Denki)

(Note 2) BANDO ELECTRIC WIRE (http: //www.bew.co.jp)

105

Ω

/km or less

63 or less

95

Ω

Ω

/km

/km or less

AC500/ 1min

1500M

Ω

/k m or more

AC750V/

1min

60M

Ω

/km or more

105°C

60°C

Detector cable

Detector cable

(Cable length:

20m or more)

(2) Cable assembly

Assemble the cable as shown in the following drawing, with the cable shield wire securely connected to the ground plate of the connector.

Core wire Core wire

Shield (external conductor)

Sheath

Shield

(external conductor)

Sheath

Ground plate

A2 - 2

Appendix 2. Cable and Connector Specifications

(3) Cable protection tube (noise countermeasure)

If influence from noise is unavoidable, or further noise resistance is required, selecting a flexible tube and running the signal cable through this tube is effective. This is also an effective countermeasure for preventing the cable sheath from being cut or becoming worn.

A cable clamp (MS3057) is not installed on the detector side, so be particularly careful of broken wires in applications involving bending and vibration.

Supplier Tube

Drive unit side

Connector

Installation screws

Nippon Flex

Control Corp.

DAIWA DENGYO

CO., LTD

FBA-4

(FePb wire braid sheath)

Hi-flex

PT #17 (FePb sheath)

RBC-104 (straight)

RBC-204 (45

°

)

RBC-304 (90

°

)

PSG-104 (straight)

PLG-17 (90

°

)

PS-17 (straight)

G16

G16

G16

Screw diameter ø26.4

Screw diameter ø26.4

PF1/2

Sankei Works

Purika Tube

PA-2 #17 (FePb sheath)

BC-17 (straight) Wire tube screws : 15

(Note) None of the parts in this table can be ordered from Mitsubishi Electric Corp.

Motor detector side

RCC-104-CA2022

PDC20-17

PDC20-17

A2 - 3

Appendix 2. Cable and Connector Specifications

Appendix 2-1-2 Flexible conduits

Basically, splash proofing can be ensured if cab-tire cable and connectors with IP65 or higher specifications are used. However, to further improve the oil resistance (chemical resistance to oil), weather resistance (resistance to the environment when used outdoors, etc.), durability, tensile strength, flattening strength, etc., run the cable through a flexible conduit when wiring.

The following shows an example of a flexible conduit. Contact the connector maker for more information.

(1) Method for connecting to a connector with back shell

Connector with back shell

Connector for conduit

Flexible conduit

Cable

Model

Appli- cation

For power

Applicable motors

HA053N, HA13N

HA23N, HA33N

HC52, HC102, HC152

HC53, HC103, HC153

HC103R, HC153R,

HC203R

HC453, HC703

Connector (straight)

CE05-6A18-12SD-B-BSS CE05-8A18-12SD-B-BAS

CE05-6A22-23SD-B-BSS

Connector (angle)

CE05-8A22-23SD-B-BAS

HC202, HC352, HC452

HC203, HC353

HC353R, HC503R

CE05-6A24-10SD-B-BSS CE05-8A24-10SD-B-BAS

CE05-6A32-17SD-B-BSS CE05-8A32-17SD-B-BAS

Connector for conduit

RCC-103CA18

RCC-104CA18

RCC-104CA2022

RCC-106CA2022

RCC-106CA2428

RCC-108CA2428

RCC108CA32

RCC110CA32

Flexible conduit

VF-03

(Min. inside diameter: 10.6)

VF-04

(Min. inside diameter: 14)

VF-04

(Min. inside diameter: 14)

VF-06

(Min. inside diameter: 19)

VF-06

(Min. inside diameter: 19)

VF-08

(Min. inside diameter: 24.4)

VF-08

(Min. inside diameter: 24.4)

VF-10

(Min. inside diameter: 33.0)

(Note) None of the parts in this table can be ordered from Mitsubishi Electric Corp.

A2 - 4

Appendix 2. Cable and Connector Specifications

Back shell

Connector for conduit Flexible conduit

Cable

Connector

Model

Appli- cation

Applicable motors

Connector/back shell (straight)

Connector/back shell (angle)

Connector for conduit

Flexible conduit

For brake

For detector

HA053NB to HA33NB

HC202B to HC902B

HC203B to HC703B

HA053N to HA33N

HC52 to HC902, HC53 to HC703

HC103R to HC503R

HA-LF11K2-S8, HA-LF15K2-S8

Select according to section "(2) Method for connecting to the connector main body".

Connector

MS3106A22-14S

(D190)

Back shell

CE02-22BS-S

Connector

MS3106A22-14S

(D190)

Back shell

CE-22BA-S

RCC-104CA2022

RCC-106CA2022

VF-04

(Min. Inside diameter: 14)

VF-06

(Min. Inside diameter: 19)

(Note) None of the parts in this table can be ordered from Mitsubishi Electric Corp.

(2) Method for connecting to the connector main body

Connector for conduit Flexible conduit

Cable

Connector

Applicable motors

Model

Appli- cation

For power

HA053N, HA13N

HA23N, HA33N

HC52, HC102, HC152

HC53, HC103, HC153

HC103R, HC153R, HC203R

HC202, HC352, HC452

HC203, HC353

HC353R, HC503R

Connector (straight)

CE05-6A18-12SD-B

CE05-6A22-23SD-B

CE05-6A24-10SD-B

Connector for conduit

MSA-12-18

MAA-12-18

MSA-16-18

MAA-16-18

MSA-16-22

MAA-16-22

MSA-22-22

MAA-22-22

MSA-22-24

MAA-22-24

MSA-28-24

MAA-28-24

(Straight)

(Angle)

(Straight)

(Angle)

(Straight)

(Angle)

(Straight)

(Angle)

(Straight)

(Angle)

(Straight)

(Angle)

For brake

For detector

HC453, HC703

HA053NB to HA33NB

HC202B to HC902B

HC203B to HC703B

HA053N to HA33N

HC52 to HC902,

HC53 to HC703

HC103R to HC503R

HA-LF11K2-S8,

HA-LF15K2-S8

CE05-6A32-17SD-B

MS3106A10SL-4S (D190)

MS3106A22-14S (D190)

Please contact to a maker.

MSA-10-10

MAA-10-10

MSA-16-22

MAA-16-22

MSA-22-22

MAA-22-22

(Note) None of the parts in this table can be ordered from Mitsubishi Electric Corp.

(Straight)

(Angle)

(Straight)

(Angle)

(Straight)

(Angle)

Flexible conduit

FCV12

(Min. inside diameter: 12.3)

FCV16

(Min. inside diameter: 15.8)

FCV16

(Min. inside diameter: 15.8)

FCV22

(Min. inside diameter: 20.8)

FCV22

(Min. inside diameter: 20.8)

FCV28

(Min. inside diameter: 26.4)

FCV36

(Min. inside diameter: 35.0)

FCV10

(Min. inside diameter: 10.0)

FCV16

(Min. inside diameter: 15.8)

FCV22

(Min. inside diameter: 20.8)

A2 - 5

Appendix 2. Cable and Connector Specifications

Appendix 2-2 Cable connection diagram

CAUTION

1. Do not mistake the connection when manufacturing the detector cable.

Failure to observe this could lead to faults, runaway or fires.

2. Do not connect anything to pins unless otherwise particularly specified when manufacturing a cable. (Leave OPEN)

3. Contact Mitsubishi when manufacturing a cable longer than 30m.

(1) NC bus cable

<SH21 cable connection diagram>

Drive unit side connector

Connector: 10120-3000VE

Shell kit: 10320-52F0-008

14

5

15

6

16

7

17

8

1

11

2

12

3

13

4

18

9

19

10

20

PE

7

17

8

18

5

15

6

16

9

19

10

20

3

13

4

14

1

11

2

12

Drive unit side connector

Connector: 10120-3000VE

Shell kit: 10320-52F0-008

PE FG

A2 - 6

Appendix 2. Cable and Connector Specifications

(2) Servo detector cable

<CNV12/CNV13 cable connection diagram> The connection differs according to the cable length.

Servo drive unit side connector

Connector: 10120-3000VE

(One-touch type lock)

Shell kit: 10320-52F0-008

(Screw-type lock)

Shell kit: 10320-52A0-008

10

20

1

11

6

16

7

17

9

19

PE

<For 20m or less>

H

J

K

L

E

Servomotor detector side/

Ball screw side detector side connector

<For general environment> <IP65 compatible>

Plug: MS3106B22-14S (Straight) Plug:

MS3108B22-14S (Angle) MS3106A22-14S(D190)

Clamp: MS3057-12A Straight back shell:

CE02-22BS-S (Straight)

CE-22BA-S (Angle)

Clamp: CE3057-12A-3

SD

SD*

RQ

RQ*

BAT

S

R

N

LG

FG

P5(+5V)

1

11

PE

6

16

7

17

9

19

10

20

H

J

K

L

E

S

R

N

SD

SD*

RQ

RQ*

BAT

P5(+5V)

LG

FG

<For 20m to 30m>

A2 - 7

Appendix 2. Cable and Connector Specifications

<CNL3H1,CNL3H2,CNL3H1-S,CNL3H2-S cable connection diagram>

Servo drive unit side connector

Connector:10120-3000VE

(One-touch type lock)

Shell kit:10320-52F0-008

(Screw-type lock)

Shell kit: 10320-52A0-008

6

16

7

17

10

19

20

1

11

PE

MDS-B-HR unit side connector

Plug: RM15WTP-8S

Clamp: RM15WTP-CP(10)

3

4

1

2

5

6

7

8

PE

SD

SD*

RQ

RQ*

P5(+5V)

P5(+5V)

LG

LG

FG

A2 - 8

Appendix 2. Cable and Connector Specifications

(3) Spindle detector cable

<CNP5 cable connection diagram>

(CN5) Spindle drive unit side connector

Connector: 10120-3000VE

Shell kit: 10320-52F0-008

PA

RA

PB

RB

PZ

P15(+15V)

N15(-15V)

LG

6

16

7

17

8

5

15

1

Spindle motor side connector

Housing: 350720-1

Pin: 350689-1

1

2

3

4

5

8

6

9

MOH

RG

3

13

V1.25-4

100mm

<CNP6M cable connection diagram>

(CN6) Spindle drive unit side connector

Connector: 10120-3000VE

Shell kit: 10320-52F0-008

MAG 6

MAGR

LS

LSR

P15(+15V)

LG

16

7

17

5

15

Magnetic sensor side connector

Connector: TRC116-12A10-7F10.5

A

D

F

E

C

B

B

P

H

K

A

N

C

R

Spindle side detector side connector

Plug: MS3106B20-29S (Straight)

MS3108B20-29S (Angle)

Clamp: MS3057-12A

<CNP6A cable connection diagram>

(CN6) Spindle drive unit side connector

Connector: 10120-3000VE

Shell kit: 10320-52F0-008

MA

MA

*

MB

MB

*

MZ

MZ

*

P5(+5V)

LG

P5(+5V)

LG

P5(+5V)

LG

4

14

10

1

2

12

3

13

19

11

20

15

CAUTION

The shield of the spindle detector cable is not connected to the "FG" (earth). Do not connect the cable shield to the earth by clamping the cable, etc.

A2 - 9

Appendix 2. Cable and Connector Specifications

<CNP7A cable connection diagram>

(CN7) Spindle drive unit side connector

Connector: 10120-3000VE

Shell kit: 10320-52F0-008

CA

CA

*

CB

CB

*

CZ

CZ

*

P5(+5V)

LG

P5(+5V)

LG

P5(+5V)

LG

2

12

3

13

4

14

10

1

19

11

20

15

M

S

T

H

K

F

L

G

C-axis detector side connector

Plug: MS3106B20-29S (Straight)

MS3108B20-29S (Angle)

Clamp: MS3057-12A

E

B24-9

<CNP7B cable connection diagram>

(CN7) Spindle drive unit side connector

Connector: 10120-3000VE

Shell kit: 10320-52F0-008

CA

CA

*

CB

CB

*

CZ

CZ

*

P5(+5V)

LG

P5(+5V)

LG

P5(+5V)

LG

4

14

10

1

2

12

3

13

19

11

20

15

B24-9

C-axis detector side connector

Housing: 69176-020

Pin: 48235-000

18

17

9

8

19

20

12

3

13

7

1

11

2

<CNP7H cable connection diagram>

(CN7) Spindle drive unit side connector

Connector: 10120-3000VE

Shell kit: 10320-52F0-008

CA

CA

*

CB

CB

*

CZ

CZ

*

LG

LG

LG

4

14

1

11

15

2

12

3

13

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

C-axis detector side connector

Housing: JAC-15P

Pin: J-SP1140

A2 - 10

Appendix 2. Cable and Connector Specifications

<CNP67A cable connection diagram>

(CN7) Spindle drive unit side connector

Connector: 10120-3000VE

Shell kit: 10320-52F0-008

CA

CA

*

CB

CB

*

CZ

CZ

*

P5(+5V)

LG

P5(+5V)

LG

P5(+5V)

LG

4

14

10

1

2

12

3

13

19

11

20

15

C-axis detector side connector

Plug: MS3106B20-29S (Straight)

MS3108B20-29S (Angle)

Clamp: MS3057-12A

S

T

H

K

F

L

G

M

(CN6) Spindle drive unit side connector

Connector: 10120-3000VE

Shell kit: 10320-52F0-008

MA

MA

*

MB

MB

*

MZ

MZ

*

2

12

3

13

4

14

PE

<FCUA-R220 cable connection diagram>

(CN7) MDS-B-PJEX unit side connector

Connector: 2-178288-3

Contact: 1-175218-5

FG

GND

+24V

3

2

1

B24-9

B

P

E

A

N

C

R

24VDC (+) power side connector

Crimped terminal: V1.25-3

FG

GND

+24V

A2 - 11

Appendix 2. Cable and Connector Specifications

Appendix 2-3 Connector outline dimension drawings

Connector for CN2 Servo drive unit

Manufacturer: 3M (Ltd.)

<Type>

Connector: 10120-3000VE

Shell kit: 10320-52F0-008

[Unit: mm]

12.0

22.0

14.0

Manufacturer: 3M (Ltd.)

<Type>

Connector: 10120-3000VE

Shell kit: 10320-52A0-008

[Unit: mm]

33.3

12.7

12.0

22.0

14.0

Manufacturer: 3M (Ltd.)

<Type>

Connector: 10120-6000EL

Shell kit: 10320-3210-000

Because this connector is an integrated molding part of the cable, it is not an option setting in the connector set.

The terminal connector

(A-TM) also has the same outline.

[Unit: mm]

A2 - 12

33.3

12.7

20.9

29.7

Appendix 2. Cable and Connector Specifications

Connectors for detector and motor power (IP67 and EN standard compatible)

Straight plug

Manufacturer: DDK (Ltd.)

W

D or less

7.85 or more

A

Type A

CE05-6A18-12SD-B-BSS 1

1

/

8

-18UNEF-2B

CE05-6A22-23SD-B-BSS 1

3

/

8

-18UNEF-2B

CE05-6A24-10SD-B-BSS 1

1

/

2

-18UNEF-2B

B +0

–0.38

34.13

40.48

43.63

CE05-6A32-17SD-B-BSS 2-18UNS-2B 56.33

Angle plug

Manufacturer: DDK (Ltd.)

C±0.8

D or less

32.1

38.3

42.0

54.2

W

57 1-20UNEF-2A

61 1

3

/

16

-18UNEF-2A

68 1

7

/

16

-18UNEF-2A

1

3

/

4

-18UNS-2A

D or less

A

Type A

W

B

+0

–0.38

CE05-8A18-12SD-B-BAS 1

1

/

8

-18UNEF-2B

CE05-8A22-23SD-B-BAS 1

3

/

8

-18UNEF-2B

CE05-8A24-10SD-B-BAS 1

1

/

2

-18UNEF-2B

34.13

40.48

43.63

CE05-8A32-17SD-B-BAS 2-18UNS-2B 56.33

Cable clamp

Manufacturer: DDK (Ltd.)

V screw

1.6

D or less W

[Unit:

R±0.7 U±0.7 (S) ±1

Y or more

69.5 1-20UNEF-2A 13.2 30.2 43.4 7.5

75.5 1

3

/

16

-18UNEF-2A 16.3 33.3 49.6 7.5

86.3 1

7

/

16

-18UNEF-2A 18.2 36.5 54.7 7.5

1

3

/

4

-18UNS-2A 24.6 44.5 61.9 8.5

C

A

(D)

øE

(Cable clamp inside diameter)

H

(Moveable range of one side)

Type

Shell size

Total length

Outside dia.

Effective screw length

Installation screw

V

Bushing

Compliant cable

A B C D H

CE3057-10A-2 (D265) 18 23.8 30.1 10.3 41.3

15.9

11 31.7

3.2

1-20UNEF-2B CE3420-10-2 ø8.5 to ø11

CE3057-12A-2 (D265) 20

CE3057-12A-3 (D265) 22

23.8 35 10.3 41.3

19

13

10

37.3

4 1

3

/

16

-18UNEF-2B

CE3420-12-2 ø9.5 to ø13

CE3420-12-3 ø6.8 to ø10

CE3057-16A-2 (D265) 24 26.2 42.1 10.3 41.3

23.8

15.5

42.9

4.8

1

7

/

16

-18UNEF-2B CE3420-16-2 ø13 to ø15.5

CE3057-20A-1 (D265) 32 27.8 51.6 11.9 43.0

31.7

23.8

51.6

6.3

1

3

/

4

-18UNS-2B CE3420-20-1 ø22 to ø23.8

A2 - 13

Appendix 2. Cable and Connector Specifications

Connectors for detector, motor power and brake (IP67 and EN standard compatible)

Straight plug

Manufacturer: DDK (Ltd.)

Gasket

J

± 0.12

A

D E

±0.3

Type

Straight back shell

Manufacturer: DDK (Ltd.)

A

MS3106A10SL-4S (D190)

5

/

8

-24UNEF-2B 22.22

MS3106A22-14S (D190) 1

3

/

8

-18UNEF-2B 40.48

H or less C

±0.5

C±0.5

D J±0.12

23.3

9

/

16

-24UNEF-2A 7.5 12.5 13.49

34.11

1

1

/

4

-18UNEF-2A 12.15 29.9 18.26

L

W screw

E±0.3 G

+0.05

–0.25

B

[Unit:

V screw

O-ring

7.85 or more

(Effective screw length)

D

(Spanner grip)

[Unit:

Type L A B C D V W

CE02-22BS-S

Angle back shell

Manufacturer: DDK (Ltd.)

Type: CE-22BA-S

35 36.5 10.9 17.8 32.4 /

4

-18UNEF-2B 1

3

/

16

-18UNEF-2A

[Unit: mm]

50.5

or less

39.6

or less

1

1

/

4

-18UNEF-2B screw

O-ring

1

3

/

16

-18UNEF-2A screw

A2 - 14

Appendix 2. Cable and Connector Specifications

Connectors for detector, motor power and brake (for general environment)

Straight plug

Manufacturer: DDK (Ltd.)

W or more

L or less

J ±0.12

A

V

[Unit: mm]

Type

Coupling screw

Length of coupling section

Total length

Connection nut outside

Cable clamp installation

Effective screw

Max. width diameter

+0 screw length

øQ V Y or less

MS3106B18-12S 1

1

/

8

-18UNEF

MS3106B22-14S

1

3

/

8

-18UNEF 18.26 55.57 40.48 /

16

-18UNEF 9.53 50

MS3106B22-23S

MS3106B24-10S 1

1

/

2

-18UNEF 43.63

16

-18UNEF 9.53 53

MS3106B32-17S 2-18UNS 56.33

4

-18UNS 11.13 66

Angle plug

Manufacturer: DDK (Ltd.)

L or less

J ±0.12

A

V

[Unit: mm]

Type

Coupling screw

A

Length of coupling section

J±0.12

Total length

L or less

Connectio n nut outside diameter

øQ

+0

–0.38 R±0.5 U±0.5

Cable clamp installation screw

V

Effective screw length

W or more

MS3108B18-12S 1

1

/

8

-18UNEF

MS3108B22-14S

MS3108B22-23S

18.26 68.27 34.13 20.5 30.2 1-20UNEF

1

3

1

3

/

8

-18UNEF 18.26 76.98 40.48 24.1 33.3

F

/

16

-18UNE

9.53

9.53

MS3108B24-10S 1

1

/

2

-18UNEF

1

7

/

16

-18UNE

F

9.53

MS3108B32-17S 2-18UNS 18.26 95.25 56.33 32.8 44.4 1

3

/

4

-18UNS 11.13

Straight plug [Unit: mm]

Manufacturer: Japan Aviation

Electronics (Ltd.)

Type: MS3106B10SL-4S

5

/

8

-24UNEF-2A

13.5

±0.3

5

/

8

-24UNEF-2B

Effective screw length

(Including relief of 2.77 or less)

9.5

or more

38.9

or less

A2 - 15

Appendix 2. Cable and Connector Specifications

Connectors for detector, motor power and brake (for general environment)

Angle plug

Manufacturer:

Japan Aviation

Electronics (Ltd.)

Type: MS3108B10SL-4S

13.5

±0.3

5

/

8

-24UNEF-2B

[Unit: mm]

Cable clamp

Manufacturer: DDK (Ltd.)

5

/

8

-24UNEF-2A

1.6

C

A ±0.7

V

36.9± 0.8

46.0 or less

øE (Bushing inside diameter)

øD (Cable clamp inside diameter)

F (Moveable range)

Type

MS3057-4A

MS3057-10A

MS3057-12A

MS3057-16A

MS3057-20A

Shell size

10SL, 12S

20, 22

24, 28

Total length

Outside diameter

Effective screw length

A±0.7 øB±0.7 C

20.6 20.6

23.8

26.2

35.0

42.1

10.3

10.3

Installation screw

øD øE F G±0.7

19.0 15.9

23.8 19.1

V

5

/

8

-24UNEF

3.2 31.7 1-20UNEF

4.0 37.3 1

3

/

16

-18UNEF

4.8 42.9 1

7

/

16

-18UNEF

1

3

/

4

-18UNEF

[Unit: mm]

Bushing

AN3420-4

AN3420-10

AN3420-12

AN3420-16

AN3420-20

A2 - 16

Appendix 3. Selection

Appendix 3-1 Selecting the servomotor series.......................................................................................A3-2

Appendix 3-1-1 Motor series characteristics ......................................................................................A3-2

Appendix 3-1-2 Servomotor precision ................................................................................................A3-3

Appendix 3-2 Selection of servomotor capacity .....................................................................................A3-4

Appendix 3-2-1 Load inertia ratio........................................................................................................A3-4

Appendix 3-2-2 Short time characteristics..........................................................................................A3-4

Appendix 3-2-3 Continuous characteristics ........................................................................................A3-5

Appendix 3-3 Example of servo selection ..............................................................................................A3-7

Appendix 3-3-1 Motor selection calculation........................................................................................A3-7

Appendix 3-3-2 Servo selection results ............................................................................................A3-10

Appendix 3-3-3 Motor shaft conversion load torque.........................................................................A3-11

Appendix 3-3-4 Expressions for load inertia calculation...................................................................A3-12

Appendix 3-4 Selecting the power supply ............................................................................................A3-13

Appendix 3-4-1 Selecting according to the continuous rated capacity.............................................A3-13

Appendix 3-4-2 Selection with maximum momentary capacity ........................................................A3-15

Appendix 3-4-3 Selection example ...................................................................................................A3-16

A3 - 1

Appendix 3. Selection

Appendix 3-1 Selecting the servomotor series

Appendix 3-1-1 Motor series characteristics

The servomotor series is categorized according to purpose, motor inertia size, and detector resolution.

Select the motor series that matches the purpose of the machine to be installed.

Motor series characteristics

Motor series

HC †

Capacity (rated speed)

0.5 to 9.0kW (2000r/min)

0.5 to 7.0kW (3000r/min)

HC † R 1.0 to 5.0kW (3000r/min)

Detector resolution

1,000,000 p/rev

/100,000 p/rev

1,000,000 p/rev

/100,000 p/rev

HA † N 0.05 to 0.45kW (3000r/min) 1,000,000 p/rev

/100,000 p/rev

HA-LF 11 to 15kW (2000r/min) 1,000,000 p/rev

/100,000 p/rev

Features

This is a motor for NC machine tool feed axes. It has smooth torque characteristics and is compatible with high resolution detectors. It has the same shaft shape and flange size as conventional HA motors (HA † N), but with shorter L dimensions, designing machine becomes easier. It is drip-proofed against cutting oil entering the unit, and it clears IP65 specifications for environmental resistance performance as a standard.

This is the standard HC motor made into a low inertia motor. It has a high output, compact design, and is suitable for high speed driving of light loads such as loaders. The detector has been made compatible with the feed axis. It is drip-proofed against cutting oil entering the unit, and it clears IP65 specifications for environmental resistance performance as a standard.

This is a motor for conventional NC machine tool feed axes. This motor is used for the small capacity feed axes of which no HC motor capacity being set.

This is a motor for NC machine tool large capacity feed axes.

Select the HA-LF Series when the HC motor capacity range is exceeded.

A3 - 2

Appendix 3. Selection

Appendix 3-1-2 Servomotor precision

The control precision of the servomotor is determined by the detector resolution, motor characteristics and parameter adjustment. This section examines the following four types of servomotor control precision when the servo parameters are adjusted. When selecting a servo, confirm that these types of precision satisfy the machine specifications before determining the servomotor series. precision:

This value is determined by the motor detector precision, and is the value obtained by dividing the movement amount (

∆

S) per motor rotation by the detector resolution (RNG).

(2) Positioning precision :

∆ε p

This is the precision outline that affects the machine targeted for positioning, and expresses the machine's positioning precision.

When the motor is a single unit, this is determined by the detector resolution and matches with the theoretic precision

∆ε p. When the motor is actually installed on a machine, the positioning precision

∆ε p becomes 1 to 2 times the theoretic precision

∆ε

. This is due to the effect on the motor control by the machine rigidity, etc. Furthermore, the value to which the error from the motor shaft to the machine is added becomes the actual machine positioning precision. If accurate positioning precision is required at the machine, use the MDS-C1-V1/V2 series servo drive unit that allows the scale feedback to be input.

(3) Surface precision during machining :

∆ε v

This is the precision outline that affects the machine tools, etc., which are important factors in the machine operation path and interpolation functions. It also affects the surface roughness of the machining surface. The machining surface roughness is affected by elements caused by the detector resolution, the motor's electrical characteristics (torque ripple, etc.) and mechanical characteristics (cogging torque, etc.). In the NC unit feed axis motor (HC ڤ , HA ڤ N) those torque characteristics are excellent, and higher precision machining is possible than that of other motors.

Because the effects of torque ripple and cogging torque are relatively small in motors with large amounts of inertia, the motor with the larger inertia, among the two identical capacity motors, will be more advantageous for surface precision. Due to the effects of differences in characteristics of the motor itself, the surface precision during machining will differ greatly according to the motor series.

(4) Absolute position repeatability precision:

∆ε a

This is the precision outline that affects the absolute position system machine, and expresses the precision in repeatability of the position before the power was shut off and the position when the power is turned on again. With the single motor unit, the precision is 1 to 2 times the theoretic precision

∆ε

. Note that the absolute position repeatability

∆ε a is the difference between when the power was turned off last and returned on. This error is not cumulated.

A3 - 3

Appendix 3. Selection

Appendix 3-2 Selection of servomotor capacity

The following three elements are used to determine the servomotor capacity.

1. Load inertia ratio

2. Short time characteristics (acceleration/deceleration torque)

3. Continuous characteristics (continuous effective load torque)

Carry out appropriate measures, such as changing the motor series or increasing the motor capacity, if any of the above conditions is not fulfilled.

Appendix 3-2-1 Load inertia ratio

Each servomotor has an appropriate load inertia ratio (load inertia/motor inertia). The control becomes unstable when the load inertia ratio is too large, and the servo parameter adjustment becomes difficult.

It becomes difficult to improve the surface precision in the feed axis, and the positioning time cannot be shortened in the positioning axis because the settling time is longer.

If the load inertia ratio exceeds the recommended value in the servomotor specifications list, increase the motor capacity or change to a motor series with a larger inertia. Note that the recommended value for the load inertia ratio is strictly one guideline. This does not mean that controlling of the load with inertia exceeding the recommended value is impossible.

POINT

1. When selecting feed axis servomotors for NC unit machine tools, place importance on the surface precision during machining. To do this, always select a servomotor with a load inertia ratio within the recommended value.

Select the lowest value possible within that range.

2. Judge the load inertia ratio for the motor with brakes using the motor inertia of motors without brakes as a reference.

Appendix 3-2-2 Short time characteristics

In addition to the continuous operation range, the servomotor has the short time operation range that can only be used for short times such as acceleration/deceleration. This range is expressed at the maximum torque. The maximum torque differs for each motor even at the same capacity, so confirm the specifications in section "2-1 Servomotor".

The maximum torque affects the acceleration/deceleration time constant that can be driven. The linear acceleration/deceleration time constant ta can be approximated from the machine specifications using expression (a). Determine the maximum motor torque required from this expression, and select the motor capacity.

ta =

(J

L

+ J

M

)

×

N

95.5

×

(0.8

×

T

MAX

−

T

L

)

(ms) .................................................. (a)

N : Motor reach speed

J

L

: Motor shaft conversion load inertia

J

M

: Motor inertia

(r/min)

(kg.cm

2

)

(kg.cm

2

)

T

MAX

: Maximum motor torque (N.m)

T

L

: Motor shaft conversion load (friction, unbalance) torque (N.m)

A3 - 4

Appendix 3. Selection

Appendix 3-2-3 Continuous characteristics

A typical operation pattern is assumed, and the motor's continuous effective load torque (Trms) is calculated from the motor shaft conversion and load torque. If numbers <1> to <8> in the following drawing were considered a one cycle operation pattern, the continuous effective load torque is obtained from the root mean square of the torque during each operation, as shown in the expression (b).

<1> <2> <3> <4> <5> <6> <7> <8>

Motor speed

0

T 1

T 7

T 2

T 4

Motor torque

0

Time

T 3 T 6 T 8 t 1 t 2 t 3 t 4

T 5 t 5 t 6 t 7 t 8 t 0

Fig. 1 Continuous operation pattern

Trms = T1

2

·t1 + T2

2

·t2 + T3

2

·t3 + T4

2

·t4 + T5

2

·t5 + T6

2

·t6 + T7

2

·t7 + T8

2

·t8

t0

.................... (b)

Select a motor so that the continuous effective load torque Trms is 80% or less of the motor stall torque

Tst.

Trms ≤ 0.8 . Tst .................................................. (c)

The amount of acceleration torque (Ta) shown in tables 11-6 and 11-7 is the torque to accelerate the load inertia in a frictionless state. It can be calculated by the expression (d). (For linear acceleration/ deceleration)

Ta =

(J

L

+ J

M

)

×

N

95.5

×

ta

(N.m) .................................................. (d)

N : Motor reach speed

J

J

L

M

: Motor shaft conversion load inertia

: Motor inertia ta : Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant

(r/min)

(kg.cm

2

)

(kg.cm

2

)

(ms)

For an unbalance axis, select a motor so that the motor shaft conversion load torque (friction torque + unbalance torque) is 60% or less of the stall.

T

L

≤ 0.6 . Tst .................................................. (e)

A3 - 5

Appendix 3. Selection

(1) Horizontal axis load torque

When operations <1> to <8> are for a horizontal axis, calculate so that the following torques are required in each period.

Load torques of horizontal axes

Period Load torque calculation method

<1>

(Amount of acceleration torque) +

(Kinetic friction torque)

<2> (Kinetic friction torque)

<3>

(Amount of deceleration torque) +

(Kinetic friction torque)

<4> (Static friction torque)

<5>

−

(Amount of acceleration torque)

−

(Kinetic friction torque)

<6>

−

(Kinetic friction torque)

<7>

−

(Amount of deceleration torque)

−

(Kinetic friction torque)

<8>

−

(Static friction torque)

Explanation

Normally the acceleration/deceleration time constant is calculated so that this torque is 80% of the maximum torque of the motor.

–

The absolute value of the acceleration torque amount is same as the one of the deceleration torque amount. The signs for the amount of acceleration torque and amount of deceleration torque are reversed.

Calculate so that the static friction torque is always required during a stop.

The signs are reversed with period <1> when the kinetic friction does not change according to movement direction.

The signs are reversed with period <2> when the kinetic friction does not change according to movement direction.

The signs are reversed with period <3> when the kinetic friction does not change according to movement direction.

Calculate so that the static friction torque is always required during a stop.

(2) Unbalance axis load torque

When operations <1> to <8> are for an unbalance axis, calculate so that the following torques are required in each period. Note that the forward speed shall be an upward movement.

Load torques of unbalance axes

Period

<1>

(Amount of acceleration torque) + (Kinetic friction torque) + (Unbalance torque)

<2> (Kinetic friction torque) + (Unbalance torque)

<3>

Load torque calculation method

(Amount of deceleration torque) + (Kinetic friction torque) + (Unbalance torque)

<4> (Static friction torque) + (Unbalance torque)

<5>

−

(Amount of acceleration torque)

−

(Kinetic friction torque) + (Unbalance torque)

<6>

−

(Kinetic friction torque) + (Unbalance torque)

<7>

−

(Amount of deceleration torque)

−

(Kinetic friction torque) + (Unbalance torque)

<8>

−

(Static friction torque) + (Unbalance torque)

Explanation

Normally the acceleration/deceleration time constant is calculated so that this torque is 80% of the maximum torque of the motor.

–

The absolute value of the acceleration torque amount is same as the one of the deceleration torque amount.

The signs for the amount of acceleration torque and amount of deceleration torque are reversed.

The holding torque during a stop becomes fairly large.

(Upward stop)

–

The generated torque may be in the reverse of the movement direction, depending on the size of the unbalance torque.

–

The holding torque becomes smaller than the upward stop. (Downward stop)

POINT

During a stop, the static friction torque may constantly be applied. The static friction torque and unbalance torque may be applied during an unbalance axis upward stop, and the torque during a stop may become extremely large.

Therefore, caution is advised.

A3 - 6

Appendix 3. Selection

Appendix 3-3 Example of servo selection

A servomotor is selected using a machining center with the following specifications as an example.

Specification item Unit X axis Y axis Z axis

Axis type

Movement direction

Table support method

Table movement friction coefficient

Ball screw diameter

Ball screw length

Ball screw lead

Deceleration ratio

Primary side gear inertia

Secondary side gear inertia

Motor/ball screw connection section inertia

Weight of moving object installed on the machine (table, etc.)

Weight of standard-added-moving object

(workpiece, etc.)

Rapid traverse rate

Target acceleration/deceleration time constant

% mm mm mm kg.cm

2 kg.cm

2 kg.cm

2 kg kg mm/min ms

Linear Linear Linear

Horizontal Horizontal Vertical

Rolling Rolling Rolling

5 5 2

40 40 40

900 800 1000

10 10 10

1 1 2/3

− −

1.6

− −

8.1

2.0 2.0

−

500 400 400

100 100 10

30000 30000 20000

120 120 120

Rapid traverse positioning frequency times/mi n

20 20 20

Motor brake Without Without With

Appendix 3-3-1 Motor selection calculation

The selection calculation is carried out in order using the Z axis as an example. Secondary side gear

8.1kg·cm

2

Deceleration ratio = 2/3

Primary side gear

1.6kg·cm

2

(1) Obtaining the load inertia

Calculate the motor shaft conversion load inertia separately for the rotation load and linear movement load. Furthermore, calculate the rotation load inertia separately for the primary and secondary side.

•

Primary side rotation load inertia: J

R1

This is the primary side gear inertia.

J

R1

= 1.6 (kg.cm

2

)

10kg

400kg

Servomotor

Ball screw

ø40, 1000mm

Fig. 11-3 Z axis configuration

•

Secondary side rotation load inertia: J

R2

This is the sum of the ball screw inertia J

B

and secondary side gear inertia. The ball screw is generally calculated as a cylinder made of steel. Refer to section "Appendix 3-3-4 Expressions for load inertia calculation".

π

·

ρ

· L

J

R2

= J

B

+ 8.1 =

32

D

4

+ 8.1 =

= 19.6 + 8.1 = 27.7 (kg.cm

2

)

π ×

7.80

×

10

− 3 ×

100

32

×

4

4

+ 8.1

•

Total rotation load inertia: J

R

This is the sum of the primary side load inertia and secondary side load inertia. To convert the secondary side load inertia to the motor shaft (primary side), multiply by the square of the deceleration ratio.

J

R

= J

R1

+ (

2

3

)

2 ×

J

R2

= 1.6 +

4

9

×

27.7 = 1.6 + 12.3 = 13.9 (kg.cm

2

)

A3 - 7

Appendix 3. Selection

•

Linear movement load inertia: J

T

The inertia is calculated when a standard workpiece, tool, etc., is attached. The conversion to the motor shaft by the deceleration ratio is included in the movement increment per motor rotation.

Refer to section "Appendix 3-3-4 Expressions for load inertia calculation".

J

T

= W . (

∆

S

20

π

)

2

= (400 + 10) . (

10

×

2

20

π ×

3

)

2

= 4.6 (kg.cm

2

)

•

Load inertia: J

L

This is the sum of the total rotation load inertia and the linear movement inertia.

J

L

= 13.9 + 4.6 = 18.5 (kg.cm

2

)

When looking at the load inertia components, the linear movement weight tends to increase.

However, the rotation load generally accounts for most of the inertia. The load inertia does not change much even if the workpiece weight changes greatly in the table axis.

(2) Obtaining unbalance torque

The unbalance torque is obtained from the moving object weight. Here, the drive system efficiency is calculated as 1.

Refer to section "Appendix 3-3-3 Motor shaft conversion load torque".

T

U

=

(W

1

−

W

2

) · g ·

∆

S

2

×

10

3 π

·

η

=

(410 −

0)

×

9.8

×

10

×

2

2

×

10

3 π ×

1

×

3

= 4.3 (N.m)

(3) Obtaining friction torque

The friction torque is obtained from the moving object weight and friction coefficient. Here, the drive system efficiency is calculated as 1. Refer to section "Appendix 3-3-3 Motor shaft conversion load torque".

T

F

=

F ·

∆

S

2

×

10

3 π

·

η

=

µ

· W · g ·

∆

S

2

×

10

3 π

·

η

=

0.02

×

410

×

9.8

×

10

×

2

2

×

10

3 π ×

1

×

3

= 0.09 (N.m)

(4) Selecting the appropriate motor from the load inertia ratio

Because it is a machine tool, the HC Motor Series is required for the control precision, and a motor maximum speed of 3000r/min. or more is required because of the rapid traverse speed and gear ratio. Furthermore, the motor to be selected is limited to HC 3B Series because a motor with a brake is required. Note that even when the motor has brakes, use the motor inertia for a motor without brakes to judge the load inertia ratio.

The state is determined to be appropriate if the load inertia is within 3-fold of the recommended load inertia for HC53B or larger capacity as shown below.

Motor type

HC53B

HC103B

HC153B

Motor inertia

(kg.cm

2

)

Load inertia

(kg.cm

2

)

Load inertia magnification

Judgment

6.6 18.5 2.80

13.7 18.5 1.35

20.0 18.5 0.93

{

{

{

A3 - 8

Appendix 3. Selection

(5) Selecting the appropriate motor from the short time characteristics

(acceleration/deceleration time constant)

The acceleration/deceleration time constant is calculated using expression (a), and is judged whether it satisfies the target acceleration/deceleration time constant of 120ms.

HC53B : ta =

(J

L

+ J

M

)

×

N

95.5

×

(0.8

×

T

MAX

−

T

U

−

T

F

)

=

(18.5 + 8.6)

×

3000

95.5

×

(0.8

×

8.82

−

4.3

−

0.09)

= 320.5 (ms)

HC103B : ta =

(J

L

+ J

M

)

×

N

95.5

×

(0.8

×

T

MAX

−

T

U

−

T

F

)

=

(18.5 + 15.7)

×

3000

95.5

×

(0.8

×

16.7

−

4.3

−

0.09)

= 119.9 (ms)

HC153B : ta =

(J

L

+ J

M

)

×

N

95.5

×

(0.8

×

T

MAX

−

T

U

−

T

F

)

=

(18.5 + 22.0)

×

3000

95.5

×

(0.8

×

28.4

−

4.3

−

0.09)

= 69.4 (ms)

The motors that satisfy the conditions from the calculation results above are the HC103B and

HC153B as shown below.

Motor type

Maximum torque

(N.m)

Total inertia

(kg.cm

2

)

Acceleration/ deceleration time constant

[ms]

Judgment

HC53B

HC103B

8.82 27.1 320.5 ×

16.7 34.2 119.9 {

28.4 40.5 69.4 { HC153B

(6) Selecting the appropriate motor from the continuous characteristics

Generally, the state is calculated following the typical operation pattern. Because the Z axis is the vertical axis here, the motor will be judged by the stopped torque during an upward stop.

The unbalance axis torque during a stop should be 60% or less of the stall torque (rated torque for general-purpose motor). As shown in the following table, the only motor that satisfies this reference is

HC153B. From the judgment in steps (4) to (6) it is the appropriate motor with Z axis.

Motor type

HC53B

HC103B

HC153B

Stall torque

(N.m)

2.94

Torque during stop

T

U

+T

F

(kg.cm

2

)

Load rate

(%)

Judgment

4.39 149.1

Explanation

× An overload alarm occurs just by holding.

There is no allowance for an acceleration/

× deceleration operation.

The torque during stop should be 60% or less.

A3 - 9

Appendix 3. Selection

Appendix 3-3-2 Servo selection results

As a result of calculating the servo selection, the servo specifications for the Z axis of this machining center have been determined.

Servo drive unit

Servomotor

Item Type

MDS-C1-V1-20

HC153B

†

The † in the motor type will be decided based on separate machine specifications such as motor shaft shape and absolute position system.

The following table shows the servo selections for all axes.

Item

Axis type

Movement direction

Table support method

Table movement friction coefficient

Ball screw diameter

Ball screw length

Ball screw lead

Deceleration ratio

Primary side gear inertia

Secondary side gear inertia

Motor/ball screw connection section inertia

Weight of moving object installed on the machine (table, etc.)

Weight of standard-added-moving object

(workpiece, etc.)

Rapid traverse rate

Target acceleration/deceleration time constant

Unit

% mm mm mm kg.cm

2 kg.cm

2 kg.cm

2 kg kg mm/min ms

X axis Y axis Z axis

Linear Linear Linear

Horizontal Horizontal Vertical

Rolling Rolling Rolling

5 5 2

40 40 40

900 800 1000

10 10 10

−

−

−

−

1.6

8.1

2.0 2.0

−

500 400 400

100 100 10

30000 30000 20000

120 120 120

Rapid traverse positioning frequency times/mi n kg.cm

2

20 20 20

Without Without With

19.6 17.7 13.9

Motor brake

Motor shaft conversion rotation load inertia

Motor shaft conversion linear movement load inertia

Motor shaft conversion total load inertia

Motor inertia

Motor shaft conversion load inertia magnification

Motor shaft conversion unbalance torque

Motor shaft conversion friction torque

Motor shaft conversion total load torque

Motor speed during rapid traverse

Rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration time constant

Maximum torque during motor stop

Maximum load rate during motor stop

Servo drive unit type

Servomotor type kg.cm

2 kg.cm

2 kg.cm

2

-fold ms

N.m

%

N.m

N.m

N.m r/min

15.2 12.7 4.6

34.8 30.4 18.5

13.7 13.7 22.0

2.54 2.22 0.84

0.0 0.0 4.3

0.47 0.39 0.09

0.47 0.39 4.39

3000 3000 3000

118.3 106.7 69.4

0.47 0.39 4.39

8.0 6.6 49.8

MDS-C1-V1-10 MDS-C1-V1-10 MDS-C1-V1-20

HC103 † HC103 † HC153B †

A3 - 10

Appendix 3. Selection

Appendix 3-3-3 Motor shaft conversion load torque

The calculation method for a representative load torque is shown.

Type Mechanism

Linear movement

Rotary movement

Vertical movement

Servomotor

Z

1

1/n

Z

1

η

Z

2

Servomotor

T

LO

F c

W

Z

2

Servomotor

W

1

Load

W

2

F

0

Counterweight

T

L

2

×

F

10

3 πη

.

(

V

N

) =

2

×

10

3 π η

T

L

: Load torque

F : Force in axial direction of the machine that moves linearly

η

V

: Drive system efficiency

: Speed of object that moves linearly

N : Motor speed

∆

S : Object movement amount per motor

(N.m)

(N)

(mm/min)

(r/min) rotation (mm)

Z1, Z2 : Deceleration ratio

F in the above expression is obtained from the expression below when the table is moved as shown on the left.

F = Fc +

µ

(W . g + F

0

)

Fc : Force applied on axial direction of moving section (N)

F

0

: Tightening force on inner surface of table guide (N)

W : Total weight of moving section g : Gravitational acceleration = 9.8

µ

: coefficient

(kg)

(m/s

2

)

T

L

T

L

Z

Z

2

1

η

LO

+ T

: Load torque

F

1 n

1

η LO

+ T

F

T

LO

: Load torque on load shaft

T

F

η

: Motor shaft conversion load friction torque

: Drive system efficiency

Z

1

, Z

2 n

: Deceleration ratio

: Deceleration rate

(N.m)

(N.m)

(N.m)

When rising

T

L

= T

U

+ T

F

When lowering

T

L

= –T

U

·

η 2

+ T

F

T

L

: Load torque

T

U

: Unbalanced torque

T

F

: Friction torque on moving section

(W

1

−

W

2

) · g

T

U

πη

T

F

=

V

· (

µ

· (W

1

+ W

2

) · g ·

∆

S

2

×

10

3 πη

) =

(W

1

– W

2

) · g ·

∆

S

2

×

10

3 πη

W

1

: Load weight

W

2

: Counterweight weight

η

: Drive system efficiency g : Gravitational acceleration = 9.8

(N.m)

(N.m)

(N.m)

(kg)

(kg)

(m/s

2

)

V : Speed of object that moves linearly (mm/min)

N : Motor speed (r/min)

∆

S : Object movement amount per motor rotation (mm)

µ

: Friction coefficient

A3 - 11

Appendix 3. Selection

Appendix 3-3-4 Expressions for load inertia calculation

The calculation method for a representative load inertia is shown.

Type Mechanism

Rotary shaft is cylinder center

D1.

D2.

J

L

π

·

ρ

· L

32

J

L

: Load inertia [kg.cm

ρ

: Density of cylinder material [kg.cm

2

]

3

]

L : Length of cylinder

D

1

1

4

– D

2

4

W

) = . (D

8

1

2

– D

2

2

[cm]

: Outer diameter of cylinder [cm]

)

Reference data

Material densities

Iron

.....

×

10

–3

Aluminum

.....

×

10

–3

[kg/cm

3

]

[kg/cm

3

]

D

2

: Inner diameter of cylinder [cm]

W : Weight of cylinder [kg]

Copper

.....

×

10

–3

[kg/cm

3

]

Cylinder

Rotary shaft

When rotary shaft and cylinder shaft are deviated

R

Column a

Rotary shaft a

D b b

J

L

W

2

+ 8R

2

)

8

J

L

: Load inertia

W : Weight of cylinder

D : Outer diameter of cylinder

R : Distance between rotary axis and

[kg.cm

2

]

[kg]

[cm]

[cm]

J

L a

2

+ b

2

3

2

)

J

L

: inertia

W : Weight of cylinder a.b.R : Left diagram

[kg.cm

2

]

[kg]

[cm]

Rotary shaft

R

Object that moves linearly Servomotor

N

V

W

J

L

2

1

π

N

V

10

2

∆

S

20

π

2

J

L

: inertia [kg.cm

2

]

W : Weight of object that moves linearly [kg]

V : Speed of object that moves linearly

∆

S

[r/min]

[mm/min]

: Object movement amount per motor rotation [mm]

Suspended object

Converted load

W

N

3

J

21

Servomotor

D

Load B

J

B

J

11

N

1

J

22

N

1

J

31

Load A

J

A

N

2

J

L

D

2

2

+ J

P

J

L

: Load inertia

W : Object weight

D : Diameter of pulley

J

P

: Inertia of pulley

[kg.cm

[kg]

[cm]

2

]

[kg.cm

2

]

J

L

= J

11

+ (J

21

+ J

22

+ J

A

N

2

N

1

J

J

L

A

:

,J

B

2

+ (J

31

+ J

B

N

3

2

N

1 inertia

: Inertia of load A, B

J

11

~J

31

: Inertia

N

1

~N

3

: Each shaft’s speed

[kg.cm

[kg.cm

[kg.cm

[r/min]

2

2

2

]

]

]

A3 - 12

Appendix 3. Selection

Appendix 3-4 Selecting the power supply

When selecting the power supply capacity, select the capacity that satisfies both the "Appendix 3-4-1

Rated capacity selection" and "Appendix 3-4-2 Momentary maximum rated capacity selection".

Appendix 3-4-1 Selecting according to the continuous rated capacity

Select the power supply capacity that satisfies the following conditions for the servomotor and spindle motor to which the power is supplied.

(a) When there is only one servomotor axis

Power supply unit rated capacity

≥ ∑

(spindle motor output) + (servomotor output) ….. (1)

(b) When there are two or more servomotor axes

Power supply unit rated capacity

≥ ∑

(spindle motor output) + 0.7 × (servomotor output) ….. (2)

Rated capacity of power supply unit

150 185 220 MDS-C1-CV- 37 55 75 110

Rated capacity:

(kW)

4.2 6.0 8.0 11.5

15.5

19.0

23.0

27.0 31.0 38.0

POINT

1. When no spindle motor is used, calculate as

∑

(spindle motor output) = 0kW.

2. "Spindle motor output" refers to the short time rated output (kW) of the spindle motor.

3. If the spindle motor output in acceleration/deceleration is different from that in steady state, substitute the larger value for "spindle motor output".

4. If the spindle motor output is limited, multiply the output value by the limit rate and then substitute the multiplied value for "spindle motor output".

5. "Servomotor output" refers to the rated output (kW) of the servomotor. Note that the servomotor rated output and the drive unit capacity are not always the same.

(Example) MDS-C1-V1-35 + HC203…servomotor output = 2.0kW

A3 - 13

Appendix 3. Selection

CAUTION

1. When there are two or more servomotor axes, select the power supply unit whose capacity is the same or larger than the largest rated capacity of the loaded servomotors.

(Example) HC902(9.0kW) + HC102(1.0kW) … Select MDS-C1-CV-110.

2. If the selection capacity exceeds 38.0kW, use two or more power supply units. Select so that the capacity of each power supply unit satisfies the expressions (1) and (2).

3. Only when MDS-B-SP-370 or larger capacity spindle drive unit is connected, a large-capacity power supply unit (MDS-B-CVE-450, 550) can be used.

Refer to "Appendix 4. Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit

Specifications" for details.

4. For the spindle drive unit, the drive unit capacity may become large depending on the spindle motor such as high-troupe motor. Make sure that the capacity limit of drive unit which can be connected is provided depending on the power supply.

Power supply unit

MDS-C1-CV-

Spindle drive unit

37 MDS-C1-SP □ -04 to 75

55 MDS-C1-SP □ -04 to 110

75 MDS-C1-SP □ -04 to 150

110 MDS-C1-SP □ -04 to 185

150 MDS-C1-SP □ -04 to 220

185 MDS-C1-SP □ -04 to 260

220 MDS-C1-SP □ -04 to 300

260

MDS-C1-SP □ -04 to 300

300

MDS-B-SP-370

MDS-C1-SP □ -04 to 300

370

MDS-B-SP-370 to 450

MDS-C1-SP □ -04 to 300

MDS-B-SP-370 to 550

A3 - 14

Appendix 3. Selection

Appendix 3-4-2 Selection with maximum momentary capacity

Select the capacity so that the total value of the total sum of maximum momentary output during spindle motor acceleration and the total sum of maximum momentary output during acceleration of servomotor that is accelerating and decelerating simultaneously is not more than the maximum momentary capacity of the power supply unit.

Maximum momentary capacity of power supply unit

≥

Σ

(Maximum momentary output of spindle motor)

+

Σ

(Maximum momentary output of servomotor accelerating/decelerating simultaneously)

(1) Spindle motor maximum momentary output

The maximum momentary output of the spindle motor is calculated by multiplying the acceleration/deceleration output of the spindle motor by 1.2.

Maximum momentary output of spindle motor = Spindle motor acceleration/deceleration output × 1.2

Spindle motor acceleration/deceleration output means the maximum output (kW) specified in the acceleration/deceleration output characteristics. If there are no specifications in the acceleration/deceleration output characteristics, maximum output (kW) of the short time rated output specified at a time of 10 minutes or more and 30 minutes or less.

(2) Servomotor maximum momentary output

Selection capacity of power supply unit

HC52 HC102 HC152 HC202 HC352 HC452 HC702 HC902

Maximum momentary output

(kW)

1.5 2.7 4.5 5.3 7.4 10.6 15 19.5

Motor type

Maximum momentary output

(kW)

HC53 HC103 HC153 HC203 HC353 HC453 HC703

13.7

Motor type

Maximum momentary output

(kW)

HC103R HC153R HC203R HC353R HC503R

1.5 2.3 3.0 5.3 7.6

Motor type

Maximum momentary output

(kW)

HA053N HA13N HA23N HA33N

0.15 0.3 0.6 1.1

HA-LF11K2-S8

21.7

HA-LF15K2-S8

30.6

(Note) The maximum momentary output in this table is reference data for selecting the power supply unit and is not data which guarantees the maximum output.

(3) Power supply unit maximum momentary capacity

Maximum momentary capacity of power supply unit

MDS-C1-CV-

Maximum momentary output

(kW)

37 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300 370

14 19 21 28 41 42 53 54 55 75

POINT

1. If a spindle motor has a coil switch function, calculate with the specification of the coil that has larger acceleration/deceleration output.

2. If a servomotor doesn’t accelerate/decelerate simultaneously with others, even if its load is applied to the power supply, the motor can be excluded from the selection.

A3 - 15

Appendix 3-4-3 Selection example

Appendix 3. Selection

(Example 1) Spindle motor : 30-minute rated output 22kW × 1 axis

Servomotor : HC452 × 1 axis

HC352 × 2 axes

(The three servo axes are simultaneously accelerated/decelerated)

(1) Selection with rated capacity

Σ

(Spindle motor output) + 0.7 x (servomotor output) = 22kW + 0.7 x (4.5kW + 3.5kW x 2) = 30.05kW

→

"MDS-C1-CV-300" that has the selection capacity of 31.0kW, or larger unit is required.

(2) Selection with maximum momentary rated capacity

Σ

(Maximum momentary output of spindle motor)

+

Σ

(Maximum momentary output of servomotor accelerating/decelerating simultaneously)

= 22kW x 1.2 + (10.6kW + 7.4kW x 2) = 51.8kW

→

"MDS-C1-CV-220" that has the maximum momentary capacity of 53kW, or larger unit is required.

(3) Overall selection

Select the power supply unit "MDS-C1-CV-300" that meets the conditions (1) and (2).

(Example 2) Spindle motor : 30-minute rated output 22kW × 1 axis

Servomotor : HC453 × 2 axes

HC353 × 1 axis

(The three servo axes are simultaneously accelerated/decelerated)

(1) Selection with rated capacity

Σ

(Spindle motor output) + 0.7 x (servomotor output) = 22kW + 0.7 x (4.5kW x 2 + 3.5kW) = 30.75kW

→

"MDS-C1-CV-300" that has the selection capacity of 31.0kW, or larger unit is required.

(2) Selection with maximum momentary rated capacity

Σ

(Maximum momentary output of spindle motor)

+

Σ

(Maximum momentary output of servomotor accelerating/decelerating simultaneously)

= 22kW × 1.2 + (13.7kW × 2 + 10.6kW) = 64.4kW

→

"MDS-C1-CV-370" that has the maximum momentary capacity of 75kW, or larger unit is required.

(3) Overall selection

Select the power supply unit "MDS-C1-CV-370" that meets the conditions (1) and (2).

A3 - 16

Appendix 4. Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle

Unit Specifications

Appendix 4-1 Explanation of large capacity spindle unit specifications .................................................A4-2

Appendix 4-1-1 Outline .......................................................................................................................A4-2

Appendix 4-1-2 List of units ................................................................................................................A4-2

Appendix 4-1-3 Selection of AC reactor (B-AL), contactor and NFB .................................................A4-2

Appendix 4-1-4 Outline dimension drawings ......................................................................................A4-3

Appendix 4-1-5 Panel cut dimension drawing ....................................................................................A4-8

Appendix 4-1-6 Heating value ............................................................................................................A4-9

Appendix 4-1-7 Selecting the power capacity ....................................................................................A4-9

Appendix 4-1-8 Selecting the wire size ..............................................................................................A4-9

Appendix 4-1-9 Drive unit connection screw size.............................................................................A4-10

Appendix 4-1-10 Connecting each unit ............................................................................................A4-10

Appendix 4-1-11 Restrictions............................................................................................................A4-12

Appendix 4-1-12 Parameters............................................................................................................A4-13

Appendix 4-1-13 Precautions ...........................................................................................................A4-14

A4 - 1

Appendix 4. Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications

Appendix 4-1 Explanation of large capacity spindle unit specifications

Appendix 4-1-1 Outline

The MDS-B-SP Series large capacity spindle unit (37KW, 45KW, 55KW) is an expanded capacity version of the MDS-C1-SP Series standard spindle unit (30KW or less).

Additional items related to the increased capacity are explained in this section.

Appendix 4-1-2 List of units

<Power supply unit> <Spindle drive unit>

Type

Capacity

(kW)

Weight

(kg)

B-CVE-450

B-CVE-550

45 20 B-SP-370

55 21 B-SP-450

37 20

45 21

B-SP-550 55 21

(Note) Use the MDS-C1-CV-370 for the power supply unit 37kW.

Appendix 4-1-3 Selection of AC reactor (B-AL), contactor and NFB

Always mount the AC reactor and contactor shown below on the input side of each power supply unit

(B-CVE-450, 550).

(Note 1) Always mount one contactor for each power supply unit when using the MDS-B-CVE-450 or

550. The power supply unit could be damaged if the contactor is omitted or shared with another unit.)

(Note 2) Always mount one AC reactor for each power supply unit. The power supply unit could be damaged if the AC reactor is omitted or shared.

The selection of the NFB when using only one power supply unit is shown below for reference.

Capacity

Type

(kW)

Weight

(kg)

Power supply unit type

AC reactor (ordered part)

Recommended contactor

(special order part)

Recommended NFB

(special order part)

MDS-B-CVE-450 MDS-B-CVE-550

B-AL-45K B-AL-55K

S-N150 S-N180

NF225CS3P-200A NF400CS3P-300A

(Note) Even when OFF, an earth leakage current of maximum 15mA flows at the coil connection terminal MC1 for the power supply unit's external contactor. Thus, when using a contactor other than that recommended above, do not use the contactor that can be turned ON at 15mA or less or cannot be turned OFF at 15mA. When using a contactor with an internal electronic circuit, consult with the contactor manufacturer and make sure that the contactor will operate correctly even if an earth leakage current of 15mA or less flows.

A4 - 2

Appendix 4. Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications

Appendix 4-1-4 Outline dimension drawings

The I bolt mounting hole is provided only at the top of the MDS-B-CVE-550 and MDS-B-SP-450, 550.

The I bolt (size: M10) is not enclosed and must be prepared by the user. Use an I bolt with a 13 to 25mm long thread.

(1) MDS-B-CVE-450

180

AIR FLOW

Fin

L+

L–

L+

L–

L11 L12

MC1

L21 L22

MC2

L1 L2 L3

60

4-ø6 hole

120

240

60 63 146 114

(Note) Always install a large capacity drive unit in the left side of power supply unit, and connect TE2(L+,L-) with DC connection bar.

[Unit : mm]

A4 - 3

Appendix 4. Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications

(2) MDS-B-CVE-550

2-M10 screw for I-bolt mounting

Only on top

180

AIR

FLOW

Fin

L+

L–

L+

L–

L11 L12

MC1

L21 L22

MC2

L1 L2 L3

60

4-ø6 hole

180

300

60 63 146

120

(Note) Always install a large capacity drive unit in the left side of power supply unit, and connect TE2(L+,L-) with DC connection bar.

[Unit : mm]

A4 - 4

Appendix 4. Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications

(3) MDS-B-SP-370

180

AIR FLOW

Fin

L+

L–

L11 L21

U V W

60

4-ø6 hole

120

240

60 62 146 114

(Note) Always install a large capacity drive unit in the left side of power supply unit, and connect TE2(L+,L-) with DC connection bar.

[Unit : mm]

A4 - 5

Appendix 4. Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications

(4) MDS-B-SP-450/550

2-M10 screw for I-bolt mounting

Only on top

180

AIR

FLOW

Fin

L11 L21

60

U V W

4-ø6 hole

180

300

60

L+

L–

63 146 120

(Note) Always install a large capacity drive unit in the left side of power supply unit, and connect TE2(L+,L-) with DC connection bar.

[Unit : mm]

A4 - 6

Appendix 4. Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications

1) 45kW

(for wire connection)

6-M6 screw

M5 screw

FG connection position

(with grounding mark)

PE connection position

Terminal cover

MAIN

L11

L12

DRIVE

L21

L22

70

±1

L31

L32

4-8×15 slot

(mounting slot)

2) 55kW

6-M10 screw

(for wire connection)

M5 screw

FG connection position

4-10×15 slot

(mounting slot)

Terminal cover

MAIN

L11

L12

DRIVE

L21

L22

L31

L32

200

±1.5

PE connection position

(with grounding mark)

215

±2.5

220

±2.5

[Unit : mm]

ACL type

Compatible power supply unit

D

3

D Weight

B-AL-45K MDS-B-CVE-450 120 160 12.8kg

(6) DC connection bar

[Unit : mm]

ACL type

Compatible power supply unit

φ 12

D

3

D Weight

B-AL-55K MDS-B-CVE-550 200

12 x 24 long hole

(17)

89

57.5

14.5

(Note) This DC connection bar is a set of two DC connection bars.

3

POINT

1. These DC connection bars are accessories.

2. Always install a large capacity drive unit in the left side of power supply unit, and connect TE2(L+,L-) with DC connection bar.

A4 - 7

Appendix 4. Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications

Appendix 4-1-5 Panel cut dimension drawing

Square hole

Square hole

8-M5 screw

Spindle drive unit mounting side Power supply unit mounting side

(Front view)

Unit [mm]

Sym- bol

H

W

H1

H2

W1

W2

W3

W4

W5

Power supply unit

MDS-B-CVE-450 MDS-B-CVE-550

Symbol

360±0.3 360±0.3 H

Spindle drive unit

MDS-B-SP-370 MDS-B-SP-450 MDS-B-SP-550

360±0.3 360±0.3 360±0.3

222±1 282±1 282±1

341±1 341±1 341±1

10±0.5 10±0.5 10±0.5

– – –

120±0.3 180±0.3 180±0.3

51±0.5 51±0.5 51±0.5

– – –

– – –

(Note 1) The spindle drive unit must be mounted to the left of the power supply unit looking from the front of the unit. The panel must be cut taking this into consideration.

(Note 2) L+ and L– connection conductors are enclosed with the MDS-B-CVE-450 and 550 capacities, so provide space between the units according to the dimensions shown above.

A4 - 8

Appendix 4. Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications

Appendix 4-1-6 Heating value

Power supply unit Spindle drive unit

Heating value (W) Type Type

MDS-B-CVE-450

MDS-B-CVE-550

MDS-B-SP-550

Heating value (W)

850

1000

1200

(Note 1) The heating value is the value at the continuous rated output.

(Note 2) Use the following expressions as a guide for the heating value outside the panel when mounting in an enclosed structure.

Unit Heating value outside panel

MDS-B-CVE-450, 550

Heating value outside panel =

(B-CVE heating value -30) × 0.75

MDS-B-SP-370, 450, 550

Heating value outside panel =

(B-SP heating value -40) × 0.75

Appendix 4-1-7 Selecting the power capacity

The power capacity required for the power supply unit is shown below.

Power supply unit type Power capacity (kVA)

MDS-B-CVE-450 63

MDS-B-CVE-550 77

Appendix 4-1-8 Selecting the wire size

(1) Recommended wire size for power lead-in wire

Regardless of the motor type, select the wire size as shown below using the power supply unit capacity as a reference.

Power supply unit type

MDS-B-CVE-450

MDS-B-CVE-550

Recommended wire size for power-lead-in wire

HIV60mm

2

HIV80mm

2

(2) Recommended wire size for spindle motor output wire

Regardless of the motor type, select the wire size as shown below using the spindle drive unit capacity as a reference.

Spindle drive unit type

MDS-B-SP-370

MDS-B-SP-450

MDS-B-SP-550

Recommended wire size for spindle motor output wire

HIV50mm

2

HIV60mm

2

HIV80mm

2

(3) L+, L– link bar wire size

Power supply unit type

MDS-B-CVE-450

MDS-B-CVE-550

L+, L– link bar wire size

Dedicated link bars are enclosed as accessories (always use accessories)

Dedicated link bars are enclosed as accessories (always use accessories)

(Note) The wire sizes above for the MDS-B-CVE-450/550 are the values when connecting to the terminal section on the left front.

(4) L11, L21, MC1

Regardless of the spindle drive unit and power supply unit capacities, use an IV2mm

2

or more wire size.

A4 - 9

Appendix 4. Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications

Appendix 4-1-9 Drive unit connection screw size

Power supply unit Spindle drive unit

Type

MDS-B-CVE-450 MDS-B-CVE-550

Left Right Left Right

MDS-B-SP-370

MDS-B-SP-450

MDS-B-SP-550

L1, L2, L3

U, V, W

L+, L–

L11, L21

M8 M10 – –

M10 M6 M10 M6 M10 M10

MC1 M4 M4 – –

Appendix 4-1-10 Connecting each unit

The wiring system is the same as the MDS-C1 Series. (Refer to the wiring system example below.)

Note that there are restrictions to the mounting and selection, so refer to the Restrictions given in

Section Appendix 5-1-11.

(a) When using MDS-C1-CV-370 or smaller

NC

MDS-B-SP(H)

-370 to 550

To terminator or battery unit

MDS-C1-CV

-260 to 370

MDS-C1-Vx

L11 L21

L+

L–

U V W

L+

L11

L21

MC1

L1 L2 L3

L–

U V W

L+

L

–

L11

L21

MC Contactor

AC reactor

B-AL

ENC

MAG

Spindle motor

PLG

NFB

For motor blower

NFB

A4 - 10

3ø 200VAC 50Hz

3ø 200 to 220VAC 60Hz

Servomotor

Appendix 4. Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications

(b) When using MDS-B-CVE-450, 550

NC

MDS-B-SP(H)-370 to 550

To terminator or battery unit

MDS-B-CVE-450 to 550 MDS-C1-Vx

Always use the link bar enclosed with

MDS-B-CVE.

L11L21

U V

L+

L–

W

L+

L–

Upper step

L11L12 MC1

L21L22 MC2

Lower step

L1 L2 L3

L11

L21

U V W

Contactor

AC reactor

Servomotor

B-AL

ENC

MAG

Spindle motor

PLG

NFB

For motor blower NFB

3ø 200VAC 50Hz

3ø 200 to 220VAC 60Hz

(Note 1) Connect the L11, L21 and MC1 external connections without removing the conductors connected between L21 and L22, L22 and MC2, and L11 and L12 of the MDS-B-CVE-450,

550.

(L12, L22 and MC2 are for special specifications, and normally, the external connection is not required.)

(Note 2) Always connect the contactor to MC1 so that it can be controlled with the drive unit's internal signal. The power supply unit could be damaged if the contactor is turned ON and OFF with a separate user-prepared sequence.

(Note 3) One end of the contactor coil is connected to the MC1 terminal and the other end is connected to the power supply. The phase on the side connected to the power supply must be different from the phase connected to the power supply unit's L21.

A4 - 11

Appendix 4. Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications

Appendix 4-1-11 Restrictions

(1) Mounting

Always mount the MDS-B-SP-370,450, 550 on the left of the power supply unit.

When using MDS-B-CVE-450, 550, always use the enclosed link bar to connect L+ and L- on the

MDS-B-SP-370, 450, 550.

(a) Layout when connecting only one spindle drive unit to power supply unit.

Mount the power supply on the right and the spindle drive unit on the left.

Always cut the panel according to the panel cut dimension drawings shown in Appendix 5-1-5.

<Example 1>

MDS-B-SP-450 MDS-B-CVE-450

(b) Layout when connecting multiple drive units to a large capacity power supply unit

The following number of servo/spindle drive units can be additionally connected.

•

When MDS-B-CVE-450 and MDS-B-SP-370 are combined, 9kW (=45kW–37kW+1kW)

worth of units.

•

When MDS-B-CVE-550 and MDS-B-SP-450 are combined, 11kW (=55kW–45kW+1kW)

worth of units.

•

When MDS-B-CVE-450 and MDS-B-SP-370 are combined, 19kW (=55kW–37kW+1kW)

worth of units.

In this case, arrange the MDS-B-SP-370, 450 to the left of MDS-B-CVE-450, 550 as shown in the panel cut dimension drawings in Appendix 5-1-5. Mount the additional drive units to the right of the MDS-B-CVE-450, 550.

If the spindle motor output differs from the spindle drive unit output, the above, excluding the layout, may not always apply. (This is because the power supply unit's output is determined by the motor output.)

<Example 2>

MDS-

B-SP-370

MDS-

B-CVE-450

MDS-

C1-V1-45×2

(2-axis)

A4 - 12

Appendix 4. Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications

(2) Selection

(a) When using the MDS-B-CVE-450, 550, one of the B-SP-370, 450, 550 units must be selected for the drive units connected to this power supply unit.

Only one MDS-B-SP-370, 450, 550 can be connected to one MDS-B-CVE-450, 550.

(b) When using MDS-B-SP-370, 450 or 550, the following power supply unit must be selected.

•

When using MDS-B-SP-370: Select MDS-C1-CV-260 or more or MDS-B-CVE-450 or 550

•

When using MDS-B-SP-450: Select MDS-C1-CV-300 or more or MDS-B-CVE-450 or 550

•

When using MDS-B-SP-550: Select MDS-C1-CV-370 or more or MDS-B-CVE-450 or 550

Note that if the total of the servo/spindle motor output corresponds to the above power supply unit with the normal selection method, that capacity power supply unit can be selected.

When total of servo/spindle motor output is 23kW or less: Select MDS-C1-CV-260

When total of servo/spindle motor output is 23.1kW or more: Select power supply unit with normal selection method.

When total of servo/spindle motor output is 27kW or less: Select MDS-C1-CV-300

When total of servo/spindle motor output is 27.1kW or more: Select power supply unit with normal selection method.

When total of servo/spindle motor output is 31kW or less: Select MDS-C1-CV-370

When total of servo/spindle motor output is 31.1kW or more: Select power supply unit with normal selection method.

A4 - 13

Appendix 4. Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications

Appendix 4-1-12 Parameters

The parameters added and changed in respect to the 30kW or smaller drive unit are shown below. The parameters other than those shown below are the same as the 30kW or smaller capacity. For details on the parameters, refer to "MDS-C1 SERIES INSTRUCTION MANUAL" (BNP-B2365)

No. Abbr.

Parameter name

Standard

Details Setting setting

Set the spindle drive unit's capacity type.

(HEX setting)

Setting Unit capacity Setting Unit capacity

0000 --- 0010 MDS-B-SP-550

0001 MDS-C1-SP-075 0011 ---

0002 MDS-C1-SP-15 0012 ---

--- 0003 MDS-C1-SP-22 0013

0004 MDS-C1-SP-37 0014

0005 MDS-C1-SP-55 0015

SP039 ATYP* Drive unit type 0006 MDS-C1-SP-75 0016

---

---

--- 0000 to FFFF 0000

--- 0007 MDS-C1-SP-110 0017

0008 MDS-C1-SP-150 0018

0009 MDS-C1-SP-185 0019

000A MDS-C1-SP-220 001A

000B MDS-C1-SP-260 001B

000C MDS-C1-SP-300 001C

000D MDS-B-SP-370 001D

000E MDS-B-SP-450 001E

000F MDS-C1-SP-04 001F

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

When the CN4 connector of the drive unit and the power supply are connected, setting below is necessary.

SP041 PTYP*

Power supply type

To validate the external emergency stop function, add

40h.

(HEX setting)

Unit capacity

External emergency stop invalid

External emergency stop valid

0000 to FFFF 0000

MDS-C1-CV-260

MDS-C1-CV-300

0126 0166

0130 0170

MDS-C1-CV-370

MDS-B-CVE-450

0137 0177

0145 0185

MDS-B-CVE-550 0155 0195

Parameters with an asterisk * in the abbreviation, such as ATYP*, are validated with the NC power turned ON again.

Appendix 4-1-13 Precautions

After turning the power OFF, wait at least 15 seconds before turning it ON again.

If the power is turned ON within 15 seconds, the drive unit's control power may not start up correctly.

A4 - 14

Appendix 5. Transportation Restrictions for Lithium

Batteries

Appendix 5-1 Transportation restrictions for lithium batteries ..................................................................A5-2

Appendix 5-1-1 Restriction for packing...............................................................................................A5-2

Appendix 5-1-2 Issuing domestic law of the United State for primary lithium battery transportation .A5-5

A5 - 1

Appendix 5. Transportation Restrictions for Lithium Batteries

Appendix 5-1 Transportation restrictions for lithium batteries

Appendix 5-1-1 Restriction for packing

The United Nations Dangerous Goods Regulations "Article 12" became effective from 2003. When transporting lithium batteries with means subject to the UN Regulations, such as by air transport, measures corresponding to the Regulations must be taken. The UN Regulations classify the batteries as dangerous goods (Class 9) or not dangerous goods according to the lithium content.

To ensure safety during transportation, lithium batteries (battery unit) directly exported from Mitsubishi are packaged in a dedicated container (UN package) for which safety has been confirmed. When the customer is transporting these products with means subject to the UN Regulations, such as air transport, the shipper must follow the details explained in section (2).

The following Mitsubishi NC products use lithium batteries. The UN Regulations classify the batteries as dangerous goods (Class 9) or not dangerous goods according to the lithium content.

(Refer to the battery unit's rating nameplate or section "4-1-2 Battery option" for details on the lithium content.) If the batteries subjected to hazardous materials are incorporated in a device and shipped, a dedicated packaging (UN packaging) is not required. However, the item must be packed and shipped following the Packing Instruction 912 specified in the IATA DGR (Dangerous Goods

Regulation) book.

Also, all lithium battery products incorporated in a machinery or device must be fixed securely in accordance with the Packing Instruction 900 and shipped with protection in a way as to prevent damage or short-circuits.

(a) Products requiring dedicated packaging (Materials falling under Class 9)

Mitsubishi type

MDS-A-BT-4

MDS-A-BT-6

MDS-A-BT-8

Battery type

Lithium metal content

Battery manufacturer

ER6-B4-11 2.6g

ER6-B6-11 3.9g

Battery class

Battery

FCU6-BT4-D1

(built-in battery)

Combination of

ER6-B4D-11 and ER6

CR23500SE-CJ5

2.6g+0.65g

1.52g Sanyo Battery Battery cell

(b) Products not requiring dedicated packaging (Materials not falling under Class 9)

Mitsubishi type

MDS-A-BT-2

FCU6-BTBOX

(built-in battery)

(built-in battery)

(built-in battery)

MR-BAT

Q6BAT

Battery type

Lithium metal content

Battery manufacturer

ER6-B2-12 1.3g

2CR5 1.96g

CR2032 0.067g

CR2450 0.173g

ER6, ER6V 0.7g

MR-BAT 0.48g

Mitsubishi Electric

Battery

Battery class

Battery

Battery cell

Note 1) Dedicated packaging is required if the shipment exceeds 12 batteries/24 battery cells.

Package the batteries so that this limit is not exceeded.

Note 2) The battery units labeled as "FCUA-" instead of "MDS-A-" also use the same battery.

Note 3) Always use the cell battery (MR-BAT) in combination with the dedicated case

(MDS-BTCASE). Maximum 8 (either 2, 4, 6 or 8) cell batteries can be installed to the dedicated case (MDS-BTCASE).

Example) Rating nameplate for battery units

Mitsubishi type

A5 - 2

Safety class

Battery manufacturer type

Lithium metal content

Appendix 5. Transportation Restrictions for Lithium Batteries

(2) Handling by user

The following technical opinion is solely Mitsubishi's opinion. The shipper must confirm the latest

IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations, IMDG Codes and laws and orders of the corresponding export country. These should be checked by the company commissioned for the actual transportation.

IATA : International Air Transport Association

IMDG Code : A uniform international code for the transport of dangerous goods by seas determined by IMO (International Maritime Organization).

(a) When shipping isolated lithium battery products (Packing Instruction 903)

1) Reshipping in Mitsubishi UN packaging

The isolated battery's safety test and packaging specifications comply with the UN Regulations

(Packing Instruction 903). Thus, the user only needs to add the following details before shipping.

(Consult with the shipping company for details.)

i) Indication of container usage mark on exterior box (Label with following details recorded.)

•

•

Proper shipping name (Lithium batteries)

UN NO. (UN3090 for isolated battery, UN3091 for battery incorporated in a device or included)

• Shipper and consignee's address and name

Example of completing form

Shipper information Consignee information

ii) Preparation of shipping documents (Declaration of dangerous goods)

2) When packaged by user

The user must follow UN Regulations when packing, preparing for shipping and preparing the indications, etc.

i) Packing a lithium battery falling under Class 9

•

•

Consult with The Ship Equipment Inspection Society of Japan for details on packaging.

Prepare for shipping as explained in "1) Reshipping in Mitsubishi UN packaging".

The Ship Equipment Inspection Society of Japan

Headquarters Telephone: 03-3261-6611 Fax: 03-3261-6979

ii) Packing a lithium battery not falling under Class 9

•

•

Cells and batteries are separated so as to prevent short circuits and are stored in a strong outer packaging. (12 or less batteries, 24 or less cells.)

Certificates or test results showing compliance to battery safety test.

The safety test results have been obtained from the battery manufacturer. (Consult with

•

Mitsubishi when the safety test results are required.)

Prepare for shipping as explained in "1) Reshipping in Mitsubishi UN packaging".

A5 - 3

Appendix 5. Transportation Restrictions for Lithium Batteries

(b) When shipping lithium batteries upon incorporating in a machinery or device

(Packing Instruction 900)

Pack and prepare for shipping the item in accordance with the Packing Instruction 900 specified in the IATA DGR (Dangerous Goods Regulation) book. (Securely fix the batteries that comply with the

UN Manual of Tests and Criteria to a machinery or device, and protect in a way as to prevent damage or short-circuit.)

Note that all the lithium batteries provided by Mitsubishi have cleared the UN recommended safety test; fixing the battery units or cable wirings securely to the machinery or device will be the user’s responsibility.

Check with your shipping company for details on packing and transportation.

(c) When shipping a device with lithium batteries incorporated (Packing Instruction 912)

A device incorporating lithium batteries does not require a dedicated packaging (UN packaging).

However, the item must be packed, prepared for shipping and labeled following the Packing

Instruction 912 specified in the IATA DGR (Dangerous Goods Regulation) book.

Check with your shipping company for details on packing and transportation.

The outline of the Packing Instruction 912 is as follows:

• All the items in the packing instructions for shipping the isolated lithium battery products

•

(Packing Instruction 903) must be satisfied, except for the items related to container, short-circuit, and fixation.

A device incorporating lithium batteries has to be stored in a strong water-proofed outer

•

•

• packaging.

To prevent an accidental movement during shipment, securely store the item in an outer packaging.

Lithium content per device should be not more than 12g for cell and 500g for battery.

Lithium battery mass per device should be not more than 5kg.

(3) Reference

Refer to the following materials for details on the regulations and responses.

Guidelines regarding transportation of lithium batteries and lithium ion batteries (Edition 2)

.......................................................... Battery Association of Japan

A5 - 4

Appendix 5. Transportation Restrictions for Lithium Batteries

Appendix 5-1-2 Issuing domestic law of the United State for primary lithium battery transportation

Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) and Research and Special Programs Administration (RSPA) announced an additional regulation (interim final rule) for the primary lithium batteries transportation restrictions item in "Federal Register" on Dec.15 2004. This regulation became effective from Dec.29,

2004.

This law is a domestic law of the United States, however if also applies to the domestic flight and international flight departing from or arriving in the United States. Therefore, when transporting lithium batteries to the United State, or within the United State, the shipper must take measures required to transport lithium batteries.

Refer to the Federal Register and the code of Federal Regulation ("(a), (b) and (c) in the item (4)" described below) for details.

(1) Outline of regulation

(a) Transporting primary lithium battery by passenger aircraft is forbidden.

•

Excluding primary lithium battery for personal use in a carry-on or checked luggage

( Lithium metal content should be not more than 5g for cell and 25g for battery. For details on the lithium metal content, refer to "(a) and (b) in the section 5-1-1 item (1)".

)

(b) When transporting primary lithium battery by cargo aircraft, indicate that transportation by passenger aircraft is forbidden on the exterior box.

All NC products for which the lithium batteries are used are subject to the regulation.

(Refer to the table "(a) and (b) in the section 5-1-1 item (1)".)

(3) Handling by user

The "(1) Outline of regulation" described above is solely Mitsubishi's opinion. The shipper must confirm orders of "(a), (b) and (c) in the item (4)" described below for transportation method corresponding the regulation. Actually, these should be checked by the company commissioned for the actual lithium buttery transportation.

(a) Indication of exterior box

When transporting primary lithium battery by cargo aircraft, indicate that transportation by passenger aircraft is forbidden on the exterior box.

Display example

PRIMARY LITHIUM BATTERIES

FORBIDDEN FOR TRANSPORT ABOARD PASSENGER AIRCRAFT.

•

The character color must be displayed with contrast. (black characters against white background, black characters against yellow background, etc.)

•

The height (size) of characters to be displayed is prescribed depending on the packaging weight.

When the total weight is over 30kg: at least 12mm

When the total weight is less than 30kg: at least 6mm

(4) Reference

(a) Federal Register (Docket No. RSPA-2004-19884 (HM-224E) ) PDF format http://www.regulations.gov/fredpdfs/05-11765.pdf

(b) 49CFR (Code of Federal Regulation, Title49) (173.185 Lithium batteries and cells.) http://www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr/waisidx_00/49cfr173_00.html

(c) DOT regulation body (Department of Transportation) http://hazmat.dot.gov/regs/rules/final/69fr/docs/69fr-75207.pdf

A5 - 5

Appendix 6. Compliance to EU EC Directives

Appendix 6-1 Compliance to EC Directives ...........................................................................................A6-2

Appendix 6-1-1 European EC Directives............................................................................................A6-2

Appendix 6-1-2 Cautions for EC Directive compliance ......................................................................A6-2

A6 - 1

Appendix 6. Compliance to EU EC Directives

Appendix 6-1 Compliance to EC Directives

Appendix 6-1-1 European EC Directives

In the EU Community, the attachment of a CE mark (CE marking) is mandatory to indicate that the basic safety conditions of the Machine Directives (issued Jan. 1995), EMC Directives (issued Jan. 1996) and the Low-voltage Directives (issued Jan. 1997) are satisfied. The machines and devices in which the servo and spindle drive are assembled are the targets for CE marking.

(1) Compliance to EMC Directives

The servo and spindle drive are components designed to be used in combination with a machine or device. These are not directly targeted by the Directives, but a CE mark must be attached to machines and devices in which these components are assembled. The next section "EMC

Installation Guidelines", which explains the unit installation and control panel manufacturing method, etc., has been prepared to make compliance to the EMC Directives easier.

(2) Compliance to Low-voltage Directives

The MDS-C1 Series units are targeted for the Low-voltage Directives. An excerpt of the precautions given in this specification is given below. Please read this section thoroughly before starting use.

A Self-Declaration Document has been prepared for the EMC Directives and Low-voltage

Directives. Contact Mitsubishi or your dealer when required.

Appendix 6-1-2 Cautions for EC Directive compliance

Use the Low-voltage Directive compatible parts for the servo/spindle drive and servo/spindle motor. In addition to the items described in this instruction manual, observe the items described below.

(1) Configuration

Isolating transformer

Circuit breaker

Electromagnetic contactor

AC reactor

CB MC

Drive unit

M

Use a type B (AC/DC detectable type) breaker

(2) Environment

Use the units under an Overvoltage Category II and Pollution Class of 2 or less environment as stipulated in IEC60664.

These units do not provide protection against electric shock and fire sufficient for the requirements of the Low-voltage Directive and relevant European standards by themselves, so provide additional protection (refer to 5.2.4 and 7.1.6.1 of EN50178)

Drive unit Motor

During operation

Storage

During transportation

During operation

Storage

During transportation

Ambient temperature

0°C to 55°C -15°C to 70°C -15°C to 70°C

Ambient temperature

0°C to 40°C -15°C to 70°C -15°C to 70°C

Humidity

Altitude

90%RH or less

1000m or less

90%RH or less

1000m or less

90%RH or less

13000m or less

Humidity

Altitude

80%RH or less

1000m or less

90%RH or less

1000m or less

90%RH or less

13000m or less

A6 - 2

Appendix 6. Compliance to EU EC Directives

[1] Use the power supply and servo/spindle drive unit under an Overvoltage Category II as stipulated in IEC60664.

[2] In case of Overvoltage Category III, connect the PE terminal of the units to the earthed-neutral of the star-connection power supply system.

[3] Do not omit the circuit breaker and electromagnetic contactor.

(4) Earthing

[1] To prevent electric shocks, always connect the servo/spindle drive unit protective earth (PE) terminal (terminal with mark) to the protective earth (PE) on the control panel.

[2] When connecting the earthing wire to the protective earth (PE) terminal, do not tighten the wire terminals together. Always connect one wire to one terminal.

PE terminal PE terminal

[3] Select the earthing wire size in accordance with Table 1 of EN60204-1.

(5) Wiring

[1] Always use crimp terminals with insulation tubes so that the connected wire does not contact the neighboring terminals.

Crimp terminal

Insulation tube

Wire

[2] Do not connect the wires directly.

[3] Select the size of the wires for input power supply to Power Supply unit in accordance with

Table 4 and 5 of EN60204-1.

A6 - 3

Appendix 6. Compliance to EU EC Directives

[1] Use EN/IEC Standards compliant parts for the circuit breaker and contactor.

[2] Select circuit breaker with instantaneous trip function. (Trip within 30 second when over current of 600%). Apply Annex C of EN60204-1 for sizing of the circuit breaker.

(7) Miscellaneous

[1] Refer to the next section "EMC Installation Guidelines" for methods on complying with the

EMC Directives.

[2] Ground the facility according to each country's requirements.

[3] The control circuit connector ( { ) is safely separated from the main circuit ( ).

[4] Inspect the appearance before installing the unit. Carry out a performance inspection of the final unit, and save the inspection records.

Mitsubishi CNC

SH21 cable

Power supply unit Spindle drive unit Servo drive unit

SV1,2

(CSH21)

Battery unit

CN1A CN1A CN1B

CN4

CN1A CN1B

SH21 cable

CN4 CN8 CN4 CN3M

Tool end detector

CN7 CN3L

CN9 CN9 CN9

Tool end detector

External emergency stop input

CN23 CN6

CN20

CN2L

CN5 CN2M

No-fuse breaker

AC reactor

Contactor

R

S

T

Ground

Breaker MC

L1

L2

TE1

L3

MC1

L11

TE3

L+

TE2

L-

L21

L+

L-

L11

L21

TE3

TE1

U

V

W

TE2

Spindle motor

PLG

MU

MV

MW

L+

L-

TE1

TE2

L11

L21

TE3

LU

LV

LW

Servo motor

Motor end detector

Servo motor

Motor end detector

: Main circuit

: Control circuit

Ground Ground Ground

A6 - 4

Appendix 7. EMC Installation Guidelines

Appendix 7-1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................A7-2

Appendix 7-2 EMC instructions ..............................................................................................................A7-2

Appendix 7-3 EMC measures ................................................................................................................A7-3

Appendix 7-4 Measures for panel structure ...........................................................................................A7-3

Appendix 7-4-1 Measures for control panel unit.................................................................................A7-3

Appendix 7-4-2 Measures for door .....................................................................................................A7-4

Appendix 7-4-3 Measures for operation board panel .........................................................................A7-4

Appendix 7-4-4 Shielding of the power supply input section..............................................................A7-4

Appendix 7-5 Measures for various cables ............................................................................................A7-5

Appendix 7-5-1 Measures for wiring in panel .....................................................................................A7-5

Appendix 7-5-2 Measures for shield treatment...................................................................................A7-5

Appendix 7-5-3 Servomotor power cable ...........................................................................................A7-6

Appendix 7-5-4 Servomotor feedback cable ......................................................................................A7-6

Appendix 7-5-5 Spindle motor power cable........................................................................................A7-7

Appendix 7-5-6 Spindle motor feedback cable...................................................................................A7-7

Appendix 7-6 EMC countermeasure parts .............................................................................................A7-8

Appendix 7-6-1 Shield clamp fitting ....................................................................................................A7-8

Appendix 7-6-2 Ferrite core ................................................................................................................A7-9

Appendix 7-6-3 Power line filter........................................................................................................A7-10

Appendix 7-6-4 Surge protector........................................................................................................A7-15

A7 - 1

Appendix 7. EMC Installation Guidelines

Appendix 7-1 Introduction

EMC Instructions became mandatory as of January 1, 1996. The subject products must have a CE mark attached indicating that the product complies with the Instructions.

As the NC unit is a component designed to control machine tools, it is believed to be out of the direct

EMC Instruction subject. However, we would like to introduce the following measure plans to backup

EMC Instruction compliance of the machine tool as the NC unit is a major component of the machine tools.

(1) Methods for installation in control/operation panel

(2) Methods of wiring cable outside of panel

(3) Introduction of countermeasure parts

Mitsubishi is carrying out tests to confirm the compliance to the EMC Standards under the environment described in this manual. However, the level of the noise will differ according to the equipment type and layout, control panel structure and wiring lead-in, etc. Thus, we ask that the final noise level be confirmed by the machine manufacturer.

These contents are the same as the EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES (BNP-B8582-45).

For measures for CNC, refer to "EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES" (BNP-B2230).

Appendix 7-2 EMC instructions

The EMC Instructions regulate mainly the following two withstand levels.

Emission ..... Capacity to prevent output of obstructive noise that adversely affects external sources.

Immunity ..... Capacity not to malfunction due to obstructive noise from external sources.

The details of each level are classified as Table 1. It is assumed that the Standards and test details required for a machine are about the same as these.

Table 1

Class Name

Radiated noise

Emission

Conductive noise

Details

Electromagnetic noise radiated through the air

Electromagnetic noise discharged from power line

Generic

Standard

Standards for determining test and measurement

EN50081-2

EN61800-3

(Industrial environment)

EN55011

IEC61000-4-2

Immunity

Static electricity electrical discharge

Radiated magnetic field

Burst immunity

Conductive immunity

Power supply frequency field

Power dip

(fluctuation)

Example) Withstand level of discharge of electricity charged in a human body.

Example) Simulation of immunity from digital wireless transmitters

Example) Withstand level of noise from relays or connecting/disconnecting live wires

Example) Withstand level of noise entering through power line, etc.

Example) 50/60Hz power frequency noise

Example) Power voltage drop withstand level

Surge

Example) Withstand level of noise caused by lightning

IEC61000-4-3

EN61000-6-2

EN61800-3

(Industrial environment)

IEC61000-4-4

IEC61000-4-6

IEC61000-4-8

IEC61000-4-11

IEC61000-4-5

A7 - 2

Appendix 7. EMC Installation Guidelines

Appendix 7-3 EMC measures

The main items relating to EMC measures include the following.

(1) Store the device in an electrically sealed metal panel.

(2) Earth all conductors that are floating electrically. (Lower the impedance.)

(3) Wire the power line away from the signal wire.

(4) Use shielded wires for the cables wired outside of the panel.

(5) Install a noise filter.

Ensure the following items to suppress noise radiated outside of the panel.

(1) Securely install the devices.

(2) Use shielded wires.

(3) Increase the panel's electrical seal. Reduce the gap and hole size.

Note that the electromagnetic noise radiated in the air is greatly affected by the clearance of the panel and the quality of the cable shield.

Appendix 7-4 Measures for panel structure

The design of the panel is a very important factor for the EMC measures, so take the following measures into consideration.

Operation board panel

Door

Control panel

Appendix 7-4-1 Measures for control panel unit

(1) Use metal for all materials configuring the panel.

(2) For the joining of the top plate and side plates, etc., mask the contact surface with paint, and fix with welding or screws.

In either case, keep the joining clearance to a max. of 20cm for a better effect.

(3) Note that if the plate warps due to the screw fixing, etc., creating a clearance, noise could leak from that place.

(4) Plate the metal plate surface (with nickel, tin) at the earthing section, such as the earthing plate.

(5) The max. tolerable hole diameter of the openings on the panel surface, such as the ventilation holes, must be 3cm to 5cm. If the opening exceeds this size, use a measure to cover it. Note that even when the clearance is less than 3cm to 5cm, noise may still leak if the clearance is long.

Example)

Painting mask

Hole exceeding

3cm to 5cm

∗

Provide electrical conductance

A7 - 3

Painting mask

Max. joining clearance 20cm

Appendix 7. EMC Installation Guidelines

Appendix 7-4-2 Measures for door

(1) Use metal for all materials configuring the door.

(2) Use an EMI gasket or conductive packing for the contact between the door and control panel unit.

(3) The EMI gasket or conductive packing must contact at a uniform and correct position of the metal surface of the control panel unit.

(4) The surface of the control panel unit contacted with the EMI gasket or conductive packing must have conductance treatment.

EMI gasket

Packing

Control panel

Door

Carry out conductance treatment on sections that the EMI gasket contacts.

(5) As a method other than the above, the control panel unit and door can be connected with a plain braided wire. In this case, the panel and door should be contacted at as many points as possible.

Appendix 7-4-3 Measures for operation board panel

(1) Always connect the operation board and indicator with an earthing wire.

(2) If the operation board panel has a door, use an EMI gasket or conductive packing between the door and panel to provide electrical conductance in the same manner as the control panel.

(3) Connect the operation board panel and control panel with a sufficiently thick and short earthing wire.

Refer to the "EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES" BNP-B2230 for the NC for more details.

Appendix 7-4-4 Shielding of the power supply input section

(1) Separate the input power supply section from other parts in the control panel so that the input power supply cable will not be contaminated by radiated noise.

(2) Do not lead the power line through the panel without passing it through a filter.

Control panel

Drive unit

Power line filter

Radiated noise

Breaker AC input

Control panel

Drive unit

Shielding plate

Power line filter

Radiated noise

Breaker AC input

The power supply line noise is eliminated Use a metal plate, etc., for the shielding by the filter, but cable contains noise again because of the noise radiated in the control panel.

partition. Make sure not to create a clearance.

A7 - 4

Appendix 7. EMC Installation Guidelines

Appendix 7-5 Measures for various cables

The various cables act as antennas for the noise and discharge the noise externally. Thus appropriate treatment is required to avoid the noise.

The wiring between the drive unit and motor act as an extremely powerful noise source, so apply the following measures.

Appendix 7-5-1 Measures for wiring in panel

(1) If the cables are led unnecessarily in the panel, they will easily pick up the radiated noise. Thus, keep the wiring length as short as possible.

Noise Noise

Device Device Device Device Device Device

(2) The noise from other devices will enter the cable and be discharged externally, so avoid internal wiring near the openings.

Control panel Control panel

Device Device Device Device

Noise

(3) Connect the control device earthing terminal and earthing plate with a thick wire. Take care to the leading of the wire.

Appendix 7-5-2 Measures for shield treatment

Common items

Use of shield clamp fittings is recommended for treating the shields. The fittings are available as options, so order as required. (Refer to section "6.1 Shield clamp fitting".)

Clamp the shield at a position within 10cm from the panel lead out port.

POINT

1. When leading the cables, including the grounding wire (FG), outside of the panel, clamp the cables near the panel outlet (recommendation: within

10cm).

2. When using a metal duct or conduit, the cables do not need to be clamped near the panel outlet.

3. When leading cables not having shields outside the panel, follow the instructions given for each cable. (Installation of a ferrite core, etc., may be required.)

A7 - 5

Appendix 7. EMC Installation Guidelines

Appendix 7-5-3 Servomotor power cable

Control panel

Control panel

Earth with paint mask

Conduit connector

Earth with P or U clip

Cannon connector To drive unit

Cannon connector

To drive unit

Servomotor

Servomotor

Conduit

Shield cable Cabtyre cable

Using shield cable Using conduit

(1) Use four wires (3-phase + earthing) for the power cable that are completely shielded and free from breaks.

(2) Earth the shield on both the control panel side and motor chassis side.

(3) Earth the shield with a metal P clip or U clip.

(A cable clamp fitting can be used depending on the wire size.)

(4) Directly earth the shield. Do not solder the braided shield onto a wire and earth the end of the wire.

Solder

(5) When not using a shield cable for the power cable, use a conventional cabtyre cable. Use a metal conduit outside the cable.

(6) Earth the power cable on the control panel side at the contact surface of the conduit connector and control panel. (Mask the side wall of the control panel with paint.)

(7) Follow the treatment shown in the example for the conduit connector to earth the power cable on the motor side. (Example: Use a clamp fitting, etc.)

Clamp fitting

To earthing

Conduit

Conduit connector

Appendix 7-5-4 Servomotor feedback cable

Control panel

Cannon connector

Use a conventional batch shield pair cable for the servomotor feedback cable, and ground it in the NC side

(control panel).

Cannon connector

To drive unit

Batch shield pair cable

A7 - 6

Appendix 7. EMC Installation Guidelines

Appendix 7-5-5 Spindle motor power cable

Control panel

Control panel

Earth with

P or U clip

Terminal box

Earth with paint mask

Conduit connector Terminal box

To drive unit

To drive unit

Conduit

Shield cable

Spindle motor

Using shield cable

Cabtyre cable

Using conduit

(1) Use four wires (3-phase + earthing) for the power cable that are completely shielded and free from breaks.

(2) Earth the shield in the same manner as the servomotor power cable.

(3) When not using a shield cable for the power cable, use a conventional cabtyre cable. Use a metal conduit outside the cable.

(4) Earth the power cable on the control panel side at the contact surface of the conduit connector and control panel side wall in the same manner as the servomotor power cable. (Mask the side wall of the control panel with paint.)

(5) Earth at the conduit connector section in the same manner as the servomotor power cable.

Appendix 7-5-6 Spindle motor feedback cable

Control panel

Clamp the shield, and connect to the connector case.

Terminal box

To drive unit

Spindle side connector

(State with the cover removed)

Batch shield pair cable

(1) Use a conventional batch shield pair cable for the spindle motor feedback cable.

Note) A shield for the spindle motor feedback cable is not "FG", and therefore do not ground it.

A7 - 7

Appendix 7. EMC Installation Guidelines

Appendix 7-6 EMC countermeasure parts

Appendix 7-6-1 Shield clamp fitting

The effect can be enhanced by connecting the cable directly to the earthing plate. Install an earthing plate near each panel's outlet (within 10cm), and press the cable against the earthing plate with the clamp fitting. If the cables are thin, several can be bundled and clamped together. Securely earth the earthing plate with the frame ground. Install directly on the cabinet or connect with an earthing wire.

Contact Mitsubishi if the earthing plate and clamp fitting set (AERSBAN- SET) is required.

•

Outline drawing

View of clamp section

AERSBAN-DSET

AERSBAN-ESET

100

70

86

56

30

–

Note 1) Screw hole for wiring to earthing plate in cabinet.

Note 2) The earthing plate thickness is 1.6mm.

Clamp fitting A

×

2

Clamp fitting B

×

1

Clamp fitting A

Clamp fitting B

L

70

45

CAUTION

The shield of the spindle detector cable is not connected to the "FG"(Earth). Do not connect the cable shield to the earth by clamping the cable, etc.

A7 - 8

Appendix 7. EMC Installation Guidelines

Appendix 7-6-2 Ferrite core

A ferrite core is integrated and mounted on the plastic case.

Quick installation is possible without cutting the interface cable or power cable.

This ferrite core is effective against common mode noise, allowing measures against noise to be taken without affecting the signal quality.

Recommended ferrite core

TDK ZCAT Series

Shape and dimensions

ZCAT type

A

B

D

C

ZCAT-A type

A

B

E

C

ZCAT-B type

A

B

Fig. 1

E

ZCAT-C type

A

Fig. 2

Fig. 3 Fig. 4

ZCAT3035-1330 (-BK)*

1

ZCAT2035-0930-M (-BK)

ZCAT2017-0930-M (-BK)

ZCAT2749-0430-M (-BK)

Unit [mm]

Applicable

Weight

Recommended ferrite core

1 39 34 13 30 --- 13 63

2 35 29 13 23.5

4 49 27 4.5

19.5

22 10 29

9 12

--- 4.5 26

*1 A fixing band is enclosed when shipped.

ZCAT-B type: Cabinet fixed type, installation hole ø4.8 to 4.9mm, plate thickness 0.5 to 2mm

ZCAT-C type: Structured so that it cannot be opened easily by hand once closed.

A7 - 9

Appendix 7. EMC Installation Guidelines

Appendix 7-6-3 Power line filter

(1) Power line filter for 200V

HF3000A-TM Series for 200V

Features

•

3-phase 3-wire type (250V series, 500V series)

•

Compliant with noise standards German Official Notice Vfg243,

EU Standards EN55011 (Class B)

•

Effective for use with IGBT inverter and MOS-FET inverter.

•

Easy mounting with terminal block structure, and outstanding reliability.

Application

•

Products which must clear noise standards German Official

Notice Vfg243 and EU Standards EN55011 (Class B).

•

For input of power converter using advanced high-speed power device such as IGBT MOS-FET.

Specifications (250V series)

Part name

HF3005A HF3010A HF3015A HF3020A HF3030A HF3040A HF3050A HF3060A HF3080A HF3100A HF3150A

-TM -TM -TM -TM -TM -TM -TM -TM -TM -TM -TM

Rated voltage 250VAC

Rated current 5A 10A 15A 20A 30A 40A 50A 60A 80A 100A

Leakage current 1.5mA MAX 250VAC 60Hz

Contact: Soshin Electric Co., LTD. Telephone: 03-3775-9112 (+81-3-3775-9112) http://www.soshin.co.jp

<Example of measuring voltage at noise terminal> ... Measured with IGBT inverter

150A

German Official Notice Vfg243 measurement data EU Standards EN55011 (Class B)

A7 - 10

<Typical characteristics>

Appendix 7. EMC Installation Guidelines

40A item

<Circuit diagram>

(250V series)

Outline dimensions

(500V series)

[ Unit : mm ]

Part name

Dimensions

A B C

HF3005A-TM

HF3010A-TM

HF3015A-TM

180 170 130

HF3020A-TM

HF3030A-TM

260 155 140

HF3040A-TM

HF3050A-TM

HF3060A-TM

290 190

170

230

HF3080A-TM

405 220

HF3100A-TM

HF3150A-TM 570 230

210

A7 - 11

Appendix 7. EMC Installation Guidelines

200V MX13 Series 3-phase high attenuation noise filter

Features

•

Perfect for mounting inside control panel:

New shape with uniform height and depth dimensions

•

Easy mounting and maintenance work:

Terminals are centrally located on the front

•

Complaint with NC servo and AC servo noise:

High attenuation of 40dB at 150KHz

•

Safety Standards:

UL1283, CSA22.2 No.8, EN133200

•

Patent and design registration pending

Specifications

Type

MX13030 MX13050 MX13100 MX13150

Item

1 Rated voltage (AC)

2 Rated current (AC)

3

Test voltage (AC for one minute across terminal and case)

4

Insulation resistance

(500VDC across terminal and case)

5 Leakage current (250V, 60Hz)

3-phase 250VAC (50/60Hz)

2500VAC (100mA) at 25°C, 70% RH

100M

Ω

min. at 25°C, 70% RH

8 Working ambient temperature

9 Working ambient humidity

10 Storage ambient temperature

11 Storage ambient humidity

12 Weight (typ)

3.5 mA max.

30 m

Ω

max. 11 m

Ω

max.

30°C max

8 mA max.

5.5 m

Ω

max. 3.5 m

Ω

max.

–25°C to +85°C

30% to 95% RH (non condensing)

–40°C to +85°C

10% to 95% RH (non condensing)

2.8kg 3.9kg 11.5kg 16kg

(Note) This is the value at Ta

≤

50°C.

Refer to the following output derating for Ta>50°C.

Contact : Densei-lambda Co., Ltd. Telephone : 03-3447-4411 (+81-3-3447-4411)

Fax : 03-3447-7784 (+81-3-3447-7784)

http://www.densei-lambda.com

A7 - 12

Appendix 7. EMC Installation Guidelines

Example of using MX13 Series

This is a noise filter with the same dimensions as MDS-D/DH drive unit depth (200mm) and height

(380mm). This unit can be laid out easily in the device by arranging it in a row with the servo unit.

As with the servo unit, the terminals are arranged on the front enabling ideal wire lead-out.

Refer to the following usage examples for details.

Wire to 3-phase power supply

Noise filter input terminal

200

380

Noise filter (MX13 Series)

Servo unit

Servo input terminal

Example of noise terminal voltage attenuation

Wire from noise filter to servo

Noise filter output terminal

Frequency [MHz] Frequency [MHz]

EMI data for independent control panel EMI data for control panel + noise filter

(with six-axis servo unit mounted) (MX13030)

Output derating

Ambient temperature Ta (°C)

A7 - 13

Outline drawing

MX13030, MX13050

Appendix 7. EMC Installation Guidelines

[ Unit : mm ]

MX13030 MX13050

A

B

C

D

E

F

66 81

45 55

10.5 13

50 67

13 16

10 13

G 177 179

H M4 screw M6 screw

I 70 85

J M4 screw M6 screw

K 195 200

MX13100, MX13150

(Installation hole) (Installation hole)

[ Unit : mm ]

A

B

C

D

E

130 165

90 110

20 27.5

115 150.5

37.5 57.5

J

K

L

F

G

18 23

174 176

H M6 screw M8 screw

I 21 27

37.5 56.5

115 149.5

276 284

A7 - 14

Appendix 7. EMC Installation Guidelines

Appendix 7-6-4 Surge protector

Insert a surge protector in the power input section to prevent damage to the control panel or power supply unit, etc. caused by the surge (lightning or sparks, etc.) applied on the AC power line.

Use a surge protector that satisfies the following electrical specifications.

(1) Surge protector for 200V

R•A•V BYZ series for 200V

Part name

Circuit voltage

50/60Hz Vrms

Maximum tolerable circuit voltage

Clamp voltage

(V) ±10%

Surge withstand level

8/20µs (A)

Surge withstand voltage

1.2/50µs (V)

Electrostatic capacity

Service temperature

RAV-781BYZ-2 3AC 250V 300V 783V 2500A 20kV 75pF -20 to 70°C

(Note) Refer to the manufacturer's catalog for details on the surge protector's characteristics and specifications, etc.

(1) Black (2) Black (3) Black

0 0

UL-1015 AWG16

41 1

R•A•V BXZ series for 200V unit: mm

Part name

Circuit voltage

50/60Hz Vrms

Maximum tolerable circuit voltage

Clamp voltage

(V) ±10%

Surge withstand level

8/20µs (A)

Surge withstand voltage

1.2/50µs (V)

Electrostatic capacity

Service temperature

RAV-781BXZ-4 3AC 250V 300V 1700V 2500A 2kV 75pF -20 to 70°C

(Note) Refer to the manufacturer's catalog for details on the surge protector's characteristics and specifications, etc. diagram

(1)Black (2)Black (3)Black

U Green

0 0

UL-1015 AWG16

41 1

A7 - 15 unit: mm

Appendix 7. EMC Installation Guidelines

(2) Example of surge protector installation

Factory power

Input power supply

Grounding

An example of installing the surge protector in the machine control panel is shown below.

A short-circuit fault will occur in the surge protector if a surge exceeding the tolerance is applied.

Thus, install a circuit protection breaker in the stage before the surge protector. Note that almost no current flows to the surge protector during normal use, so a breaker installed as the circuit protection for another device can be used for the surge protector.

Panel earth leakage breaker Breaker

Breaker

B

Grounding plate

A

Transformer

Contactor

MC

Breaker

AC reactor

NC unit

Other device

(panel power supply, etc.)

Power supply unit and drive unit

Other device

(panel power supply, etc.)

(1) Surge protector

(Protection across phases)

Control panel

(relay panel,

etc.)

(2) Surge protector

(Protection across each phase's grounding)

Installing the surge absorber

CAUTION

1. The wires from the surge protector should be connected without extensions.

2. If the surge protector cannot be installed just with the enclosed wires, keep the wiring length of A and B to 2m or less. If the wires are long, the surge protector's performance may drop and inhibit protection of the devices in the panel.

3. The selected surge protector differs according to the input power voltage.

A7 - 16

Appendix 8. EC Declaration of conformity

Appendix 8-1 Compliance to EC Directives ...........................................................................................A8-2

Appendix 8-1-1 Low voltage equipment .............................................................................................A8-2

Appendix 8-1-2 Electromagneic compatibility.....................................................................................A8-9

A8 - 1

Appendix 8. EC Declaration of conformity

Appendix 8-1 Compliance to EC Directives

MDS-D/DH Series can respond to LVD and EMC directive.

Approval from a third party certification organization has been also acquired for the Low Voltage

Directive. The declaration of conformity of each unit is shown below.

Appendix 8-1-1 Low voltage equipment

MDS-C1-CV series

A8 - 2

Appendix 8. EC Declaration of conformity

A8 - 3

MDS-C1-V1/V2 series

Appendix 8. EC Declaration of conformity

A8 - 4

Appendix 8. EC Declaration of conformity

A8 - 5

Appendix 8. EC Declaration of conformity

MDS-C1- SP/SPH/SPM/SPX series

A8 - 6

Appendix 8. EC Declaration of conformity

A8 - 7

B-AL series

Appendix 8. EC Declaration of conformity

A8 - 8

Appendix 8. EC Declaration of conformity

Appendix 8-1-2 Electromagneic compatibility

MDS-C1-CV series

A8 - 9

MDS-C1-V1/V2 series

Appendix 8. EC Declaration of conformity

A8 - 10

Appendix 8. EC Declaration of conformity

MDS-DH-SP/SPH/SPM/SPX series

A8 - 11

Appendix 9. Instruction Manual for Compliance with

UL/c-UL Standard

Appendix 9 Instruction Manual for Compliance with UL/c-UL Standard.............................. A9-2

A9 - 1

Appendix 9. Instruction Manual for Compliance with UL/c-UL Standard

Instruction Manual for Compliance with UL/c-UL Standard

The instruction of UL/c-UL listed products is described in this manual.

The descriptions of this manual are conditions to meet the UL/c-UL standard for the UL/c-UL listed products. To obtain the best performance, be sure to read this manual carefully before use.

To ensure proper use, be sure to read specification manual, connection manual and maintenance manual carefully for each product before use.

1. UL/c-UL listed products

[CNC system]

Unit name Unit part number

NC control panel

Display unit

Keyboard unit

FCU6-MU [*1]-[*2], FCU6-MA [*1]-[*2]

FCU6-DU [*39][*40], FCU6-YZ [*39][*40]

FCUA-LD [*41], FCUA-CT [*41], FCUA-CR [*41]

FCU6-YZ [*39][*40], FCU6-TZ [*39][*40]

FCU6-KB0 [*42], FCUA-KB [*42]

Base I/O unit

Remote I/O unit

I/O module

FCU6-DX [*3], HR377, HR378, HR353

FCUA-DX [*4]

HR357, HR371, QY231

[AC servo/spindle system]

Unit name

Power supply unit

Servo drive unit

Spindle drive unit

Option unit

Battery unit

Servo motor

Spindle Motor

Unit part number

MDS-B-CVE- [*5], MDS-C1-CV-[*5]

MDS-B-V1- [*6], MDS-B-V14- [*6], MDS-C1-V1- [*6]

MDS-B-V2- [*7], MDS-B-V24- [*7], MDS-C1-V2- [*7]

MDS-B-SVJ2- [*8]

MDS-B-SP [*38]-[*9], MDS-C1-SP [*38]-[*9]

MDS-B-PJEX

FCU6-BT4D1

HA-FF [*10][*11][*12][*13][*14][*15][*16][*17][*18][*19]

HC-MF [*10][*11][*12][*13][*14][*15][*16][*17][*18][*19]

HC-SF [*10][*11][*12][*13][*14][*15][*16][*17][*18][*19]

HC-RF [*10][*11][*12][*13][*14][*15][*16][*17][*18][*19]

HC [*20][*11][*21][*14][*22]-[*23][*24]

SJ [*25][*26][*27]-[*28][*29][*30][*31]-[*32]

SJ [*33][*26][*28][*34][*35][*36][*37][*31]

Suffixes listed below may be attached to the above part numbers at portions marked with [*]. For details regarding specifications, see the specification manuals for each product.

[*1] 011, 013, 021, 031, 032, 515, 516, 517, 535, 536

[*3] 210, 211, 220, 221, 310, 311, 320, 321, 330, 331, 340, 341, 350, 351, 410, 411, 420, 421, 430, 431, 440, 441, 450, 451

[*4] 100, 101, 110, 111, 120, 121, 130, 131, 140, 141

[*5] 37, 55, 75, 110, 150, 185, 220, 260, 300, 370,(450, 550: Only MDS-B Series)

[*6] 01, 03, 05, 10, 20, 35, 45S, 45, 70, 90, 110, 150

[*7] 0101, 0301, 0303, 0501, 0503, 0505, 1003, 1005, 1010, 2010, 2020, 3510S, 3510, 3520S, 3520, 3535, 4520, 4535, 4545,

7035, 7045, 7070S, 7070

[*8] 01, 03, 04, 06, 07, 10, 20

[*9] 04, 075, 15, 22, 37, 55, 75, 110, 150, 185, 220, 260, 300, 370, (450,550:Only MDS-B Series)

[*10] 05, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 15, 20, 30, 35

[*11] 1, 2, 3

[*13] None, P, N, I, E

[*12] None, C

[*14] None, B

[*15] None, Gn, GnH (n = serial number) [*16] None, K, D, X, T

[*17] None, Wn (n = serial number) [*18] None, UL, UE

[*19] None, Sn (n = serial number)

[*21] None, R

[*20] 5, 10, 15, 20, 35, 45, 70

[*22] S, T

[*23] E, A

[*25] NL, PF, PL, V, VL

[*27] None, S

[*29] 01 - 99

[*24] 1, 2, 33, 42, 51

[*26] None, K

[*28] Two digits decimal two digits

[*30] None, F, G, Y, Z

[*31] None, M

[*33] None, N, P

[*35] None, 1 - 9, A - F

[*37] None, B, C, F, G, R

[*39] T, C, N

[*41] 10, 100, 120

[*32] None, S01 - S99

[*34] A, B, L, M, N, X

[*36] None, D, H, P, Z

[*38] None, H, M, X, HX, MX

[*40] 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36

[*42] 05, 06, 10, 13, 14, 20, 30

A9 - 2

Appendix 9. Instruction Manual for Compliance with UL/c-UL Standard

2. Operation surrounding air ambient temperature

The recognized operation ambient temperature of each units are as shown in the table below. The recognized operation ambient temperatures are the same as an original product specification for all of the units. temperature

CNC system

AC servo/spindle system

NC control panel

Base I/O unit

Remote I/O unit

I/O module

Power supply unit

Servo drive unit

Spindle drive unit

Option unit, Battery unit

Servo motor, Spindle Motor

0 to 55

°

C

0 to 55

°

C

0 to 55

°

C

0 to 55

°

C

0 to 55

°

C

0 to 55

°

C

0 to 55

°

C

0 to 55

°

C

0 to 40

°

C

3. Notes for CNC system

3.1 Selection of external power supply unit

An UL recognized 24Vdc output power supply unit should be used to CNC system.

The “PD25” power supply unit provided by Mitsubishi will be changed to UL recognized product since

September 2000.

4. Notes for AC servo/spindle system

4.1 General Precaution

It takes 10 minutes to discharge the bus capacitor.

When starting wiring or inspection, shut the power off and wait for more than 15 minutes to avoid a hazard of electrical shock.

4.2 Installation

MDS-B/C1 Series have been approved as the products, which have been installed in the electrical enclosure. The minimum enclosure size is based on 150 percent of each MDS-B/C1 unit combination.

And also, design the enclosure so that the ambient temperature in the enclosure is 55

°

C (131

°

F) or less, refer to the manual book

4.3 Short-circuit ratings

Suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering, it is not more than 5kA rms symmetrical amperes.

A9 - 3

Appendix 9. Instruction Manual for Compliance with UL/c-UL Standard

4.4 Peripheral devices

To comply with UL/c-UL Standard, use the peripheral devices, which conform to the corresponding standard.

•

Circuit Breaker, Fuses, Magnetic Contactor and AC Reactor

Applicable power supply unit

Circuit Breaker

Fuse

Class K5

MDS-B-CVE-37

MDS-C1-CV-37

MDS-B-CVE-55

MDS-C1-CV-55

MDS-B-CVE-75

MDS-C1-CV-75

MDS-B-CVE-110

MDS-C1-CV-110

MDS-B-CVE-150

MDS-C1-CV-150

MDS-B-CVE-185

MDS-C1-CV-185

MDS-B-CVE-220

MDS-C1-CV-220

MDS-B-CVE-260

MDS-C1-CV-260

NF50 40A

NF50 40A

NF50 40A

NF50 50A

NF100 100A

NF100 100A

NF225 150A

NF225 150A

70A

100A

100A

100A

200A

200A

200A

300A

MDS-B-CVE-300

MDS-C1-CV-300

MDS-B-CVE-370

MDS-C1-CV-370

NF225 150A

NF225 175A

MDS-B-CVE-450 NF225 200A

MDS-B-CVE-550 NF400 300A

300A

300A

•

Circuit Breaker for spindle motor Fan

Magnetic contactor (AC3)

S-N25

S-N25

S-N25

S-N35

S-N50

S-N50

S-N80

S-N80

S-N80

S-N150

S-N150

S-N180

AC Reactor

BKO-NC6851-

H11 (B-AL-7.5K)

H11 (B-AL-7.5K)

H11 (B-AL-7.5K)

H12 (B-AL-11K)

H13 (B-AL-18.5K)

H13 (B-AL-18.5K)

H14 (B-AL-30K)

H14 (B-AL-30K)

H14 (B-AL-30K)

H15 (B-AL-37K)

H16 (B-AL-45K)

H17 (B-AL-55K)

Select the Circuit Breaker by doubling the spindle motor fan rated.

A rush current that is approximately double the rated current will flow, when the fan is started.

<Notice>

•

For installation in United States, branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the National Electrical Code and any applicable local codes.

•

For installation in Canada, branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the Canadian Electrical Code and any applicable provincial codes.

4.5 Flange of servo motor

Mount the servomotor on a flange, which has the following size or produces an equivalent or higher heat dissipation effect:

Flange size

(mm)

Servo Motor

HC † HC-RF † HC-MF † HA-FF † HC-SF †

150x150x6 --- --- Under 100W Under 100W ---

250x250x6 --- ---

250x250x12 0.5 to 1.5kW 1.0 to 2.0kW

200W

400W 400,600W

---

0.5 to 1.5kW

300x300x20 2.0 to 7.0kW

--- --- --- 2.0 to 7.0kW

4.6 Motor Over Load Protection

Servo drive unit MDS-B-V1/2/14/24 Series and MDS-C1-V1/2 series and spindle drive unit MDS-B-SP and MDS-C1-SP series have each solid-state motor over load protection.

When adjusting the level of motor over load, set the parameter as follows.

A9 - 4

Appendix 9. Instruction Manual for Compliance with UL/c-UL Standard

4.6.1 MDS-B-V1/2/14/24, MDS-C1-V1/2 Series

Parameter

No.

Parameter

Abbr.

Parameter

Name

Setting Procedure

Standard

Setting Value

Setting

Range

60s 1 to 300s SV021 OLT Overload

Time constant

Set the time constant for overload detection. (Unit: 1 second.)

SV022 OLL Overload

Detection level

Set the overload current detection level with a percentage (%) of the stall rating.

4.6.2 MDS-B-SP, MDS-C1-SP Series

Parameter

No.

Parameter

Abbr.

Parameter

Name

Setting Procedure

150%

Standard

Setting Value

1 to 500%

Setting

Range

SP063 OLT Overload

Time constant

Set the time constant for overload detection. (Unit: 1 second.)

60s 0 to 1000s

SP064 OLL Overload

Detection level

Set the overload current detection level with a percentage (%) of the rating.

110% 1 to 200%

4.7 Field Wiring Reference Table for Input and Output

Use the UL-approved Round Crimping Terminals to wire the input and output terminals of MDS-B

Series.

Crimp the terminals with the crimping tool recommended by the terminal manufacturer.

Following described crimping terminals and tools type are examples of Japan Solderless Terminal Mfg.

Co., Ltd.

4.7.1 Power Supply Unit (MDS-B-CVE, MDS-C1-CV Series)

3.7 to 7.5 11.0 to 18.5 22.0 to 37.0

45.0 55.0 Capacity [kW]

P, N

(L+, L-)

M6 M6 M6 M6,

Terminal

Screw Size

Screw Torque

[lb in/ N m]

L11, L21, MC1

(R0, S0)

Screw Torque

[lb in/ N m]

L1, L2, L3

Screw Torque

[lb in/ N m]

44.3/5.0 49.6/5.6

17.4/2.0 14.2/1.6

49.6/5.6

M4 M4 M4 M4 M4

14.2/1.6

14.2/1.6

M4 M5 M8 M8 M10

14.6/1.6 29.8/3.37

117.2/13.2 117.2/13.2

14.6/1.6

177/20

P, N (L+, L-)

Capacity [kW]

Wire Size (AWG)

3.7, 5.5

#10/60

°

7.5

C #8/60

°

C

11.0

#4/60

°

C

15.0

#4/60

°

C

/Temp Rating Note 1 #12/75

°

C #10/75

°

C #8/75

°

C #4/75

°

C

Crimping Terminals

Type

R5.5-6

R8-6 R22-6

R5.5-6 R8-6

R22-6

18.5, 22.0

#3/60

°

C

#4/75

°

C

Crimping Tools Type YHT-2210

YHT-8S YPT-60

YHT-2210 YHT-8S

YPT-60

Capacity [kW]

Wire Size (AWG)

/Temp Rating Note 1

26.0 30.0 37.0 45.0 55.0

#1/60

°

C

#3/75

°

C

#1/75

°

C #1/0/75

°

C

The bus bar is attached to the product.

Crimping Terminals

Type

38-S6

R22-6

38-S6

L330T

459-12

Crimping Tools Type YPT-60

YET300

YF-1

A9 - 5

Appendix 9. Instruction Manual for Compliance with UL/c-UL Standard

L11, L21 (R0, S0), MC1

Capacity [kW]

Wire Size (AWG)

/Temp Rating Note 1

Crimping Terminals

Type

Crimping Tools Type

3.7 to 55.0

#14/ 60

°

C

#14/ 75

°

C

V2-4

YNT-1614

L1, L2, L3

Capacity [kW]

Wire Size (AWG)

/Temp Rating Note 1

Crimping Terminals

Type

Crimping Tools Type

Earth Wire Size

(AWG)

#10/60

°

C #10/60

°

C

#12/75

°

C #10/75

°

C

#10/75

°

C

#4/60

°

C #3/60

°

C

#4/75

°

C #4/75

°

C

#3/75

°

C

Capacity [kW]

Wire Size (AWG)

/Temp Rating Note 1

Crimping Terminals

Type

Crimping Tools Type

Earth Wire Size

(AWG)

Terminal

Screw

Size

22.0 26.0 30.0 37.0 45.0 55.0

#1/60

°

C #1/0/60

°

C

#2/75

°

C #1/75

°

C

#1/75

°

C 1/0/75

°

C

#2/0

/75

°

C

#3/0

/75

°

C

38-S8

L330T

459-12 38-S8

L330T

459-12

70-8 R80-10

38-S8

YPT-60

YET300

YF-1

YPT-60

#3/60

°

C #1/60

°

C

#3/75

°

C #3/75

°

C

YPT-60

#3/75

°

C

YET300

YF-1

1/75

°

C #1/75

YTP-150

°

C

#1/0

/75

°

C

4.7.2 Servo Drive Unit (MDS-B-V1/2/14/24, MDS-C1-V1/2 Series)

Axis 1-axis (V1, V14) 2-axes (V2, V24)

Capacity [kW] 0.1 to 3.5 4.5 to 9.0

11.0,

15.0

0.1+0.1 to 7.0+7.0

P, N

(L+, L-)

Screw

Torque

[lb in/ N m]

L11, L21

(R0, S0)

Screw

Torque

[lb in/ N m]

U, V, W

Screw

Torque

[lb in/ N m]

M6 M6 M6

44.3/5.0 44.3/5.0

44.3/5.0

M4 M4 M4

17.4/2.0 17.4/2.0

17.4/2.0

M4 M5 M8

14.6/1.6 28.6/3.2

117.2/13.2

M6

44.3/5.0

M4

17.4/2.0

M4

14.6/1.6

P, N (L+, L-)

YHT-2210 YPT-60

#10/60

°

C #10/60

°

C

#10/75

°

C #10/75

°

C

#10/75

°

C

#4/60

#4/75

°

°

C

C

#3/60

#4/75

°

°

C

C

#3/75

°

C

Wire size depends on the Power Supply Unit (MDS-B-CVE, MDS-C1-CV Series).

L11, L21 (R0, S0)

Capacity [kW]

Wire Size (AWG)

/Temp Rating Note 1

Crimping Terminals

Type

Crimping Tools Type

0.1 to 15.0

#14/ 60

°

C

#14/ 75

°

C

V2-4

YNT-1614

A9 - 6

Appendix 9. Instruction Manual for Compliance with UL/c-UL Standard

U, V, W

Capacity [kW] 0.1 to 1.0 2.0 3.5 4.5

Wire Size (AWG) #14/60

°

C #10/60

°

C #8/60

°

C #8/60

°

C

/Temp Rating Note 1 #14/75

°

C #14/75

°

C #10/75

°

C #10/75

°

C

Crimping Terminals

Type

R2-4

R5.5-4 8-4

R8-5

(8-4)

R5.5-5

(R5.5-4)

Crimping Tools Type

Earth wire Size

(AWG)

YHT-2210

YHT-8S

YHT-2210

#14/60

°

C #10/60

°

C #8/60

°

C #8/60

°

C

#14/75

°

C #12/75

°

C #10/75

°

C #10/75

°

C

Capacity [kW]

Wire Size (AWG) #8/60

°

C #8/60

°

C #4/60

°

C

/Temp Rating Note 1 #8/75

°

C #8/75

°

C #4/75

°

C

Crimping Terminals

Type

R8-5

(8-4)

#2/60

#3/75

°

°

C

C

R8-5 R22-8 R38-8

Crimping Tools Type

Earth Wire Size

(AWG)

YHT-8S YPT-60

#8/60

°

C #8/60

°

C #4/60

°

C

#8/75

°

C #8/75

°

C #4/75

°

C

#3/60

#3/75

°

°

C

C

4.7.3 Spindle Drive Unit (MDS-B-SP, MDS-C1-SP Series)

Capacity [kW] 0.4~3.7 5.5~18.5 22.0~30.0

37.0 45.0/55.0

P, N

(L+, L-)

Screw

Torque

[lb in/ N m]

L11, L21

(R0, S0)

Terminal

Screw

Size

Screw

Torque

[lb in/ N m]

U, V, W

Screw

Torque

[lb in/ N m]

P, N (L+, L-)

44.3/5.0 44.3/5.0

44.3/5.0 234.3/26.5

177/20

M4 M4 M4 M4 M4

17.4/2.0 17.4/2.0

17.4/2.0

17.4/2.0

17.2/2.0

M4 M5 M8 M8 M10

14.6/1.6 28.6/3.2 117.2/13.2 88.5/10.0

177/20

Wire size depends on the Power Supply Unit (MDS-B-CVE, MDS-C1-CV Series).

L11, L21 (R0, S0)

Capacity [kW]

Wire Size (AWG)

/Temp Rating Note 1

Crimping Terminals

Type

Crimping Tools Type

0.4~55.0

#14/60

°

C

#14/75

°

C

V2-4

YNT-1614

A9 - 7

Appendix 9. Instruction Manual for Compliance with UL/c-UL Standard

U, V, W

Capacity [kW] 0.4, 0.75

Wire Size (AWG)

1.5 2.2, 3.7

5.5

#14/60

°

C #10/60

°

C #10/60

°

C

/Temp Rating

Note 1

#14/75

°

C #14/75

°

C #12/75

°

C

7.5

#8/60

°

#10/75

°

C

C

11.0

#8/60

#8/75

°

°

C

C

Crimping

Terminals Type

Crimping Tools

Type

Earth Wire Size

(AWG)

R2-4

5.5-S4 R5.5-4

R2-4

R5.5-5

R8-5

R5.5-5

R8-5

YHT-8S

YHT-2210 YHT-8S

YHT-2210

#14/60

°

C #11/60

°

C #10/60

°

C #8/60

°

C #8/60

°

C

#14/75

°

C #14/75

°

C #10/75

°

C #10/75

°

C #8/75

°

C

15.0

#4/60

°

C

#4/75

°

C

L330T

459-23

YPT-60

#4 /60

°

C

#4 /75

°

C

Capacity [kW]

Wire Size (AWG)

/Temp Rating

Note 1

#3/60

°

C #2/60

°

C #1/60

°

C

#4/75

°

C #3/75

°

C #2/75

°

C

#1/75

°

C #1/0/75

°

C

#2/0

75

°

C

#4/0

/75

°

C

Crimping

Terminals Type

22-S6

L330T

459-23

Crimping Tools

Type

Earth Wire Size

(AWG)

YPT-60

#3/60

°

C #3/60

°

C

#4/75

°

C #3/75

°

C

#3/75

°

C

YET300

YF-1

#1/75

°

C

YPT-150

#1/75

°

C

#3/0

/75

°

C

Note 1: 60

°

C: Polyvinyl chloride insulated wires (IV)

75

°

C: Grade heat-resistant polyvinyl chloride insulated wires (HIV)

Use copper wire only.

Above listed wire are for use in the electric cabinet on machine or equipment.

A9 - 8

Appendix 9. Instruction Manual for Compliance with UL/c-UL Standard

4.8 Spindle Drive / Motor Combinations

Following combinations are the Standard combinations

Rating Output (kW)

Of Applicable Spindle Motor

Drive Unit Note: 1

SJ- ( ) Series

SJ-V/VL Series

Note: 2

SJ-N Series

SJ-NL Series

MDS-B-SP []-04

MDS-C1-SP []-04

MDS-B-SP []-075

MDS-C1-SP []-075

MDS-B –SP []-15

MDS-C1-SP []-15

MDS-B –SP []-22

MDS-C1-SP []-22

MDS-B –SP []-37

MDS-C1-SP []-37

MDS-B-SP []-55

MDS-C1-SP []-55

MDS-B-SP []-75

MSD-C1-SP []-75

0.2

0.75

1.5

2.2 2.2

3.7 3.7

5.5 5.5

5.5

7.5

7.5

MDS-B-SP []-110

MDS-C1-SP []-110

MDS-B-SP []-150

MDS-C1-SP []-150

MDS-B-SP []-185

MDS-C1-SP []-185

MDS-B-SP []-220

MDS-C1-SP []-220

MDS-B-SP []-260

MDS-C1-SP []-260

MDS-B-SP []-300

MDS-C1-SP []-300

MDS-B-SP [] –370

MDS-B-SP [] -450

MDS-B-SP [] -550

11

15

18.5

22

26

15

18.5

22

26

30

15

18.5

22

26

30

37

22

26

30

37

45

30

37

45

55

11

15

18.5

11

15

18.5

22

5.5

7.5

11

7.5

11

15

11

Note1: [] can be H, M, X, HX, MX or none.

Note2: Applicable unit depends on the range of power constant of motor.

Inquire of Mitsubishi about the detail of the combinations.

A9 - 9

Appendix 9. Instruction Manual for Compliance with UL/c-UL Standard

5. AC Servo/Spindle System Connection

MDS-C1-V1/V2 Series

MDS-C1-SP[H][M][X] Series

MDS-B-V1/V2 Series

MDS-B-SP[H][M][X] Series

MDS-B-V14/V24 Series

MDS-C1-CV Series

MDS-B-CVE Series

CN1A CN1B CN1A CN1B

From NC

Regarding the connection of NC, see the NC manual book.

CN9 CN4 CN9 CN4 CN4

CN5 CN6 CN9

Battery Unit or

Terminator A-TM

CN2 CN3M CN7 CN8

External Emergency Stop

MU/MV/MW

LU/LV/LW

U/V/W

L+/L-

L11/L21

MC1

CN23 L1/L2/L3

MC

MC

Contactor

AC-L

AC reactor

Circuit Breaker

Fuse or

Breaker

3 phase

200/220VAC

Enclosure Side

Machine Side

Servo Motor Spindle Motor

Encoder FAN

Servo Motor

Encoder and

Thermal Protection

Encoder

A9 - 10

Appendix 10. Compliance with China Compulsory

Product Certification (CCC Certification)

System

Appendix 10-1 Outline of China Compulsory Product Certification System ........................................A10-2

Appendix 10-2 First Catalogue of Products subject to Compulsory Product Certification...................A10-2

Appendix 10-3 Precautions for Shipping Products ..............................................................................A10-3

Appendix 10-4 Application for Exemption ............................................................................................A10-4

Appendix 10-5 Mitsubishi NC Product Subject to/Not Subject to CCC Certification ...........................A10-5

A10 - 1

Appendix 10. Compliance with China Compulsory Product Certification (CCC Certification) System

Appendix 10-1 Outline of China Compulsory Product Certification System

The Safety Certification enforced in China included the "CCIB Certification (certification system based on the "Law of the People’s Republic of China on Import and Export Commodity Inspection" and

"Regulations on Implementation of the Import Commodities Subject to the Safety and Quality Licensing

System" enforced by the State Administration of Import and Export Commodity Inspection (SACI) on import/export commodities, and the "CCEE Certification" (certification system based on "Product

Quality Certification Management Ordinance" set forth by the China Commission for Conformity

Certification of Electrical Equipment (CCEE) on commodities distributed through China.

CCIB Certification and CCEE Certification were merged when China joined WTO (November 2001), and were replaced by the "China Compulsory Product Certification" (hereinafter, CCC Certification) monitored by the State General Administration of Quality Supervision, Inspection and Quarantine

(AQSIQ) of the People's Republic of China.

The CCC Certification system was partially enforced from May 2002, and was fully enforced from May

2003. Target commodities which do not have CCC Certification cannot be imported to China or sold in

China. (Indication of the CCIB or CCEE mark has been eliminated from May 1, 2003.)

CCIB : China Commodity Inspection Bureau

CCEE : China Commission for Conformity Certification of Electrical Equipment

CCC : China Compulsory Certification

Appendix 10-2 First Catalogue of Products subject to Compulsory Product

Certification

The First Catalogue of Products subject to Compulsory Product Certification, covering 132 items (19 categories) based on the CCIB products (104 items), CCEE products (107 items) and CEMC products

(Compulsory EMC Certification products) was designated on December 3, 2001.

Class Product catalogue Class Product catalogue

1 Electric Wires and Cables (5 items)

2 Switches, Installation protective and connection devices (6 items)

3

Circuit-breakers (including RCCB, RCBO, MCB)

Low-voltage switchers

(disconnectors, switch-disconnectors, and fuse-combination devices.

5

6

Electric tools

Welding machines

(16 items)

(15 items)

Regulations

Certification Household and similar electrical appliances

(18 items)

8 Audio and video equipment (16 items)

(12 items) equipment

10 Lighting apparatus

12 Motor vehicles and Safety

Parts

(2 items)

11 Telecommunication (9 items) equipment

(4 items) Other protective equipment for circuits

(Current limiting devices, circuits protective devices, over current protective devices, thermal protectors, over load relays, low-voltage electromechanical contactors and motor starters)

Relays (36V < Voltage

≤

1000V)

Other switches

(Switches for appliances, vacuum switches, pressure switches, proximity switches, foot switches, thermal sensitive switches, hydraulic switches, push-button switches, position limit switches, micro-gap switches, temperature sensitive switches, travel switches, change-over switches, auto-change-over switches, knife switches)

CNCA -01C -011: 2001

(Switch and Control

Equipment)

CNCA -01C -012: 2001

(Installation Protective

Equipment)

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

Tyres

Safety Glasses

Agricultural Machinery

Latex Products

Medical Devices

Fire Fighting Equipment

Detectors for Intruder Alarm

Systems

(3 items)

(1 item)

(1 item)

(7 items)

(3 items)

(1 item)

Other devices

(contactors, motor starters, indicator lights, auxiliary contact assemblies, master controllers, A.C. Semiconductor motor controllers and starters)

Earth leakage protectors

Fuses

Low-voltage switchgear

4 Small power motors (1 item)

(Note)

CNCA-01C-010:2001

(Low-voltage switchgear)

CNCA-01C-013:2001

(Small power motors)

(Note) When the servomotor or the spindle motor of which output is 1.1kW or less (at 1500 r/min) is used,

NC could have been considered as a small power motor. However, CQC (China Quality

Certification Center) judged it is not.

A10 - 2

Appendix 10. Compliance with China Compulsory Product Certification (CCC Certification) System

Appendix 10-3 Precautions for Shipping Products

As indicated in Appendix 10-2, NC products are not included in the First Catalogue of Products subject to Compulsory Product Certification. However, the Customs Officer in China may judge that the product is subject to CCC Certification just based on the HS Code.

Note 2

NC cannot be imported if its HS code is used for the product subject to CCC Certification. Thus, the importer must apply for a "Certification of Exemption" with CNCA.

Note 3

Refer to Appendix 10-4.

Application for Exemption for details on applying for an exemption.

(Note 1) The First Catalogue of Products subject to Compulsory Product Certification (Target HS

Codes) can be confirmed at http://www.cqc.com.cn/Center/html/60gonggao.htm

.

(Note 2) HS Code: Internationally unified code (up to 6 digits) assigned to each product and used for customs.

(Note 3) CNCA: Certification and Accreditation Administration of People's Republic of China

(Management and monitoring of certification duties)

A10 - 3

Appendix 10. Compliance with China Compulsory Product Certification (CCC Certification) System

Appendix 10-4 Application for Exemption

Following "Announcement 8" issued by the Certification and Accreditation Administration of the

People's Republic of China (CNCA) in May 2002, a range of products for which application for CCC

Certification is not required or which are exempt from CCC marking has been approved for special circumstances in production, export and management activities.

An application must be submitted together with materials which prove that the corresponding product complies with the exemption conditions. Upon approval, a "Certification of Exemption" shall be issued.

<Range of products for which application is exempt>

Range of products not requiring application

(a) Items brought into China for the personal use by the foreign embassies, consulates, business agencies and visitors

(Excluding products purchased from Service Company for Exporters)

(b) Products presented on a government-to-government basis, presents

(c) Exhibition products (products not for sale)

(d) Special purpose products (e.g., for military use)

Products not requiring application for CCC Certification are not required to be CCC marked or certified.

Range of products for which application is exempted

(e) Products imported or manufactured for research and development and testing purposes

(f) Products shipped into China for integration into other equipment destined for 100% re-export to a destination outside of China

(g) Products for 100% export according to a foreign trade contract (Excluding when selling partially in

China or re-importing into China for sales)

(h) Components used for the evaluation of an imported product line

(i) The products imported or manufactured for the service (service and repairs) to the end-user. Or the spare parts for the service (service and repairs) of discontinued products.

(j) Products imported or manufactured for research and development, testing or measurements

(k) Other special situations

The following documents must be prepared to apply for an exemption of the "Import Commodity Safety and Quality License" and "CCC Certification".

(a) Relevant introduction and description of the company.

(b) The characteristics of the products to be exempted.

(c) The reason for exemption and its evidence (ex. customs handbook).

(d) The name, trademark, quantity, model and specification of the products to be exempted.

(Attach a detail listing of these items for a large quantity of products. When importing materials for processing and repair equipments, submit a list of the importing materials for each month and repair equipments.)

(e) Guarantee for the safety of the products; self-declaration to be responsible for the safety during the manufacturing and use.

(f) To be responsible for the authenticity and legitimacy of the submitted documents. Commitment to assist CNCA to investigate on the authenticity of the documents (When CNCA finds it necessary to investigate on the authenticity of the documents.)

(2) Business license of the company (Copy)

(3) Product compliance declaration

Indicate which standard’s requirements the products comply with or submit a test report (Copy is acceptable. The report can be prepared in a manufacturer’s laboratory either at home or overseas.)

(4) Import license (Only if an import license is needed for this product. Copy is acceptable.)

(5) Quota certificate (Only if a quota certificate is needed for this product. Copy is acceptable.)

(6) Commercial contract (Copy is acceptable.)

(7) If one of item (4), (5) or (6) cannot be provided, alternative documents, such as bill of lading, the invoice, and other evidential documents must be submitted.

A10 - 4

Appendix 10. Compliance with China Compulsory Product Certification (CCC Certification) System

Appendix 10-5 Mitsubishi NC Product Subject to/Not Subject to CCC Certification

The state whether or not Mitsubishi NC products are subject to the CCC Certification is indicated below, based on the "First Catalogue of Products subject to Compulsory Product Certification" issued by the

State General Administration of Quality Supervision, Inspection and Quarantine (AQSIQ) of the

People's Republic of China and the Certification and Accreditation Administration of the People's

Republic of China (CNCA) on July 1, 2002.

Model China HS Code (Note 1)

Judgment on whether or not subject to

CCC Certification

Power supply unit

Servo/spindle drive unit

Servo/spindle

85044090

85371010

85015100

85015200

–

Not subject to CCC Certification

Not subject to CCC Certification

NC Not subject to CCC Certification

Display unit – Not subject to CCC Certification

(Note 1) The China HS Code is determined by the customs officer when importing to China. The above HS Codes are set based on the HS Codes used normally when exporting from Japan.

(Note 2) Reference IEC Standards are used as the actual IEC Standards may not match the GB

Standards in part depending on the model.

Whether or not the NC products are subject to CCC Certification was judged based on the following five items.

(a) Announcement 33 (Issued by AQSIQ and CNCA in December 2001)

(b) HS Codes for the products subject to CCC Certification (Export Customs Codes)

* HS Codes are supplementary materials used to determine the applicable range. The applicable range may not be determined only by these HS Codes.

(c) GB Standards (This is based on the IEC Conformity, so check the IEC. Note that some parts are deviated.)

(d) Enforcement regulations, and products specified in applicable range of applicable standards within

(e) "Products Excluded from Compulsory Certification Catalogue" (Issued by CNCA, November 2003)

Reference

•

Outline of China's New Certification System (CCC Mark for Electric Products), Japan Electrical

Manufacturers' Association

•

Outline of China's New Certification System (CCC Mark for Electric Products) and Electric

Control Equipment, Nippon Electric Control Equipment Industries Association

A10 - 5

Date of revision

May 2004

Dec. 2004

S ep . 2004

Manual No.

BNP-C3040B

BNP-C3040D

BNP-C3040E

Revision History

Revision details

First edition created.

•

C axis detector (OSE90K) was added.

•

C axis detector (MBE90K) was added.

•

C axis detector (MHE90K) was added.

•

Connector for motor brake: CNU20S(AWG14) was added.

•

C axis detector (OSE90K,MBE90K,MHE90K,OSE90K with 1024p output) cable was added.

•

Power cables and connector sets for MDS-B-PJEX unit were added.

•

Specifications for surge absorber selection was changed.

•

Cable for external emergency stop was added.

•

Selection of cable was added.

•

Appendix 9 "Compliance with China Compulsory Product Certification (CCC

Certification) System" was added.

•

Miswrite is corrected.

•

DC connection bar specifications were added.

•

Drive unit specifications list was revised.

•

Selection of wire was revised.

•

Protection fuse specifications were added.

•

The section "EC Declaration of conformity" was added.

•

Miswrite is corrected.

Global service network

NORTH AMERICA FA Center

EUROPEAN FA Center

CHINA FA Center

KOREAN FA Center

North America FA Center (MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION INC.)

Illinois CNC Service Center

500 CORPORATE WOODS PARKWAY, VERNON HILLS, IL. 60061, U.S.A.

TEL: +1-847-478-2500 (Se

California CNC Service Center

FAX: +1-847-478-2650 (Se

5665 PLAZA DRIVE, CYPRESS, CA. 90630, U.S.A.

TEL: +1-714-220-4796 FAX: +1-714-229-3818

Georgia CNC Service Center

2810 PREMIERE PARKWAY SUITE 400, DULUTH, GA., 30097, U.S.A.

TEL: +1-678-258-4500 FAX: +1-678-258-4519

New Jersey CNC Service Center

200 COTTONTAIL LANE SOMERSET, NJ. 08873, U.S.A.

TEL: +1-732-560-4500 FAX: +1-732-560-4531

Kentucky CNC Service Satellite

8025 PRODUCTION DRIVE, FLORENCE, KY., 41042, U.S.A.

TEL: +1-859-342-1700 FAX: +1-859-342-1578

Michigan CNC Service Satellite

2545 38TH STREET, ALLEGAN, MI., 49010, U.S.A.

TEL: +1-847-478-2500 FAX: +1-269-673-4092

Ohio CNC Service Satellite

62 W. 500 S., ANDERSON, IN., 46013, U.S.A.

TEL: +1-847-478-2608

Texas CNC Service Satellite

FAX: +1-847-478-2690

1000, NOLEN DRIVE SUITE 200, GRAPEVINE, TX. 76051, U.S.A.

TEL: +1-817-251-7468

Canada CNC Service Center

FAX: +1-817-416-1439

4299 14TH AVENUE MARKHAM, ON. L3R OJ2, CANADA

TEL: +1-905-475-7728

Mexico CNC Service Center

FAX: +1-905-475-7935

MARIANO ESCOBEDO 69 TLALNEPANTLA, 54030 EDO. DE MEXICO

TEL: +52-55-9171-7662 FAX: +52-55-9171-7698

Monterrey CNC Service Satellite

ARGENTINA 3900, FRACC. LAS TORRES, MONTERREY, N.L., 64720, MEXICO

TEL: +52-81-8365-4171 FAX: +52-81-8365-4171

Brazil MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center

(AUTOMOTION IND. COM. IMP. E EXP. LTDA.)

ACESSO JOSE SARTORELLI, KM 2.1 18550-000 BOITUVA – SP, BRAZIL

TEL: +55-15-3363-9900 FAX: +55-15-3363-9911

European FA Center (MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.)

Germany CNC Service Center

GOTHAER STRASSE 8, 40880 RATINGEN, GERMANY

TEL: +49-2102-486-0 FAX:+49-2102486-591

South Germany CNC Service Center

KURZE STRASSE. 40, 70794 FILDERSTADT-BONLANDEN, GERMANY

TEL: +49-711-3270-010 FAX: +49-711-3270-0141

France CNC Service Center

25, BOULEVARD DES BOUVETS, 92741 NANTERRE CEDEX FRANCE

TEL: +33-1-41-02-83-13 FAX: +33-1-49-01-07-25

Lyon CNC Service Satellite

U.K CNC Service Center

TRAVELLERS LANE, HATFIELD, HERTFORDSHIRE, AL10 8XB, U.K.

TEL: +44-1707-282-846 FAX:-44-1707-278-992

Italy CNC Service Center

ZONA INDUSTRIALE VIA ARCHIMEDE 35 20041 AGRATE BRIANZA, MILANO ITALY

TEL: +39-039-60531-342 FAX: +39-039-6053-206

Spain CNC Service Satellite

CTRA. DE RUBI, 76-80 -APDO.420 08190 SAINT CUGAT DEL VALLES, BARCELONA SPAIN

TEL: +34-935-65-2236 FAX:

Turkey MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center

(GENEL TEKNIK SISTEMLER LTD. STI.)

DARULACEZE CAD. FAMAS IS MERKEZI A BLOCK NO.43 KAT2 80270 OKMEYDANI ISTANBUL,

TURKEY

TEL: +90-212-320-1640 FAX: +90-212-320-1649

Poland MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center (MPL Technology Sp. z. o. o)

UL SLICZNA 34, 31-444 KRAKOW, POLAND

TEL: +48-12-632-28-85 FAX:

Wroclaw MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Satellite (MPL Technology Sp. z. o. o)

UL KOBIERZYCKA 23, 52-315 WROCLAW, POLAND

TEL: +48-71-333-77-53 FAX: +48-71-333-77-53

Czech MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center

(AUTOCONT CONTROL SYSTEM S.R.O. )

NEMOCNICNI 12, 702 00 OSTRAVA 2 CZECH REPUBLIC

TEL: +420-596-152-426 FAX: +420-596-152-112

ASEAN FA Center

HONG KONG FA Center

TAIWAN FA Center

ASEAN FA Center (MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ASIA PTE. LTD.)

Singapore CNC Service Center

307 ALEXANDRA ROAD #05-01/02 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC BUILDING SINGAPORE 159943

TEL: +65-6473-2308 FAX: +65-6476-7439

Thailand MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center (F. A. TECH CO., LTD)

898/19,20,21,22 S.V. CITY BUILDING OFFICE TOWER 1 FLOOR 12,14 RAMA III RD BANGPONGPANG,

YANNAWA, BANGKOK 10120. THAILAND

TEL: +66-2-682-6522 FAX: +66-2-682-6020

Malaysia MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center

(FLEXIBLE AUTOMATION SYSTEM SDN. BHD.)

60, JALAN USJ 10/1B 47620 UEP SUBANG JAYA SELANGOR DARUL EHSAN MALAYSIA

TEL: +60-3-5631-7605 FAX: +60-3-5631-7636

JOHOR MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Satellite

(FLEXIBLE AUTOMATION SYSTEM SDN. BHD.)

NO. 16, JALAN SHAHBANDAR 1, TAMAN UNGKU TUN AMINAH, 81300 SKUDAI, JOHOR MALAYSIA

TEL: +60-7-557-8218 FAX: +60-7-557-3404

Indonesia MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center

(PT. AUTOTEKNINDO SUMBER MAKMUR)

WISMA NUSANTARA 14TH FLOOR JL. M.H. THAMRIN 59, JAKARTA 10350 INDONESIA

TEL: +62-21-3917-144 FAX: +62-21-3917-164

India MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center (MESSUNG SALES & SERVICES PVT. LTD.)

B-36FF, PAVANA INDUSTRIAL PREMISES M.I.D.C., BHOASRI PUNE 411026, INDIA

TEL: +91-20-2711-9484 FAX: +91-20-2712-8115

BANGALORE MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Satellite

(MESSUNG SALES & SERVICES PVT. LTD.)

S 615, 6TH FLOOR, MANIPAL CENTER, BANGALORE 560001, INDIA

TEL: +91-80-509-2119 FAX: +91-80-532-0480

Delhi MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Parts Center (MESSUNG SALES & SERVICES PVT. LTD.)

1197, SECTOR 15 PART-2, OFF DELHI-JAIPUR HIGHWAY BEHIND 32ND MILESTONE GURGAON

122001, INDIA

TEL: +91-98-1024-8895 FAX:

Philippines MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center

(FLEXIBLE AUTOMATION SYSTEM CORPORATION)

UNIT No.411, ALABAMG CORPORATE CENTER KM 25. WEST SERVICE ROAD SOUTH

SUPERHIGHWAY, ALABAMG MUNTINLUPA METRO MANILA, PHILIPPINES 1771

TEL: +63-2-807-2416 FAX: +63-2-807-2417

Vietnam MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center (SA GIANG TECHNO CO., LTD)

47-49 HOANG SA ST. DAKAO WARD, DIST.1 HO CHI MINH CITY, VIETNAM

TEL: +84-8-910-4763 FAX: +84-8-910-2593

China FA Center (MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION (SHANGHAI) LTD.)

China CNC Service Center

2/F., BLOCK 5 BLDG.AUTOMATION INSTRUMENTATION PLAZA, 103 CAOBAO RD. SHANGHAI

200233, CHINA

TEL: +86-21-6120-0808

Shenyang CNC Service Center

TEL: +86-24-2397-0184

Beijing CNC Service Satellite

FAX: +86-21-6494-0178

FAX: +86-24-2397-0185

9/F, OFFICE TOWER1, HENDERSON CENTER, 18 JIANGUOMENNEI DAJIE, DONGCHENG DISTRICT,

BEIJING 100005, CHINA

TEL: +86-10-6518-8830 FAX: +86-10-6518-8030

China MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center

(BEIJING JIAYOU HIGHTECH TECHNOLOGY DEVELOPMENT CO.)

RM 709, HIGH TECHNOLOGY BUILDING NO.229 NORTH SI HUAN ZHONG ROAD, HAIDIAN DISTRICT ,

BEIJING 100083, CHINA

TEL: +86-10-8288-3030

Tianjin CNC Service Satellite

FAX: +86-10-6518-8030

RM909, TAIHONG TOWER, NO220 SHIZILIN STREET, HEBEI DISTRICT, TIANJIN, CHINA 300143

TEL: -86-22-2653-9090 FAX: +86-22-2635-9050

Shenzhen CNC Service Satellite

RM02, UNIT A, 13/F, TIANAN NATIONAL TOWER, RENMING SOUTH ROAD, SHENZHEN, CHINA 518005

TEL: +86-755-2515-6691 FAX: +86-755-8218-4776

Changchun Service Satellite

TEL: +86-431-50214546

Hong Kong CNC Service Center

TEL: +852-2619-8588

FAX: +86-431-5021690

UNIT A, 25/F RYODEN INDUSTRIAL CENTRE, 26-38 TA CHUEN PING STREET, KWAI CHUNG, NEW

TERRITORIES, HONG KONG

FAX: +852-2784-1323

Taiwan FA Center (MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC TAIWAN CO., LTD.)

Taichung CNC Service Center

NO.8-1, GONG YEH 16TH RD., TAICHUNG INDUSTIAL PARK TAICHUNG CITY, TAIWAN R.O.C.

TEL: +886-4-2359-0688

Taipei CNC Service Satellite

FAX: +886-4-2359-0689

FAX: +886-4-2359-0689 TEL: +886-4-2359-0688

Tainan CNC Service Satellite

TEL: +886-4-2359-0688 FAX: +886-4-2359-0689

Korean FA Center (MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION KOREA CO., LTD.)

Korea CNC Service Center

DONGSEO GAME CHANNEL BLDG. 2F. 660-11, DEUNGCHON-DONG KANGSEO-KU SEOUL, 157-030

KOREA

TEL: +82-2-3660-9607 FAX: +82-2-3663-0475

Notice

Every effort has been made to keep up with software and hardware revisions in the contents described in this manual. However, please understand that in some unavoidable cases simultaneous revision is not possible.

Please contact your Mitsubishi Electric dealer with any questions or comments regarding the use of this product.

Duplication Prohibited

This instruction manual may not be reproduced in any form, in part or in whole, without written permission from Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.

© 2004-2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED